MY17 GLC SUV Operator

Your Operator's Manual
Digital form inside the vehicle

Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via your
vehicle's multimedia system (Menu item "Vehicle").
Booklet inside the vehicle

In addition to the vehicle's Operator's Manual, you can obtain the complete multi-
media system Supplement from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Digital form via the Internet

You can find the Operator's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.
Digital form as an App

The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free on the Apple® App store or Google
Play.
Apple® iOS Android™
GLC
Operator's Manual
GLC Operator's Manual
É2535842902^ËÍ
2535842902
Order no. P253 0317 13 Part no. 253 584 29 02 Edition B 2017
Symbols instruction with several Publication details
Registered trademarks: steps.
Internet
(Y This symbol tells you where
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
page) you can find more informa-
tooth SIG Inc. tion about a topic. Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
YY This symbol indicates a following websites:
RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks warning or an instruction
of DOLBY Laboratories. that is continued on the next http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg- page. http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
istered trademarks of Daimler AG. Dis‐ This text indicates a mes-
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John- play sage on the multifunction
son Controls. display/multimedia display. Editorial office
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc. Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
RBurmester® is a registered trademark of
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Vehicle manufacturer
RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. Daimler AG
RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-
Mercedesstra e 137
uity Digital Corporation.
70327 Stuttgart
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc. Germany
RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-
tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-

gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle.
i Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
X This symbol indicates an
instruction that must be fol-
lowed.
X Several of these symbols in
succession indicate an As at 08.04.2016
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Digital form via the Internet
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual The Operator's Manual on the Internet pro-
carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi- vides easy access to all information
cle before driving. For your own safety and a regarding your vehicle and multimedia sys-
longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and tem. It also provides helpful animations,
warning notices in this Operator's Manual. interesting background information and a
Ignoring them could result in damage to the wide array of search options.
vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Digital form as an App
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- can view all the information on your vehicle
Benz Limited Warranty. and multimedia system via mobile Internet
The equipment or product designation of your or download it independently of network
vehicle may vary depending on: access. Available for smartphones or tab-
lets.
RModel
ROrder
RCountry specification
RAvailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App
differ from that shown in the descriptions and may not yet be available in your country.
illustrations. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
The following are integral components of the Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
vehicle: A Daimler Company
RDigital Operator's Manual
RPrinted Operator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
Your Operator's Manual:
Digital form inside the vehicle
The Digital Operator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted
information on your vehicle's equipment
and multimedia system. It contains infor-
mative animations, individual language
settings and an intuitive search function.
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to this manual and the afore-
mentioned digital media, you also have the
option to obtain a comprehensive printed
version of the Supplement for your multi-
media system from your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
2535842902 É2535842902^ËÍ
2 Contents
Mirrors ................................................. 106

Index ....................................................... 4 Memory function ................................. 109
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 26 Lights and windshield wipers .......... 111
Introduction ........................................... 26 Exterior lighting ................................... 111
Operation ............................................... 26 Interior lighting .................................... 115
Replacing bulbs ................................... 115
Introduction ......................................... 27 Windshield wipers ................................ 119
Protecting the environment ................... 27
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 27 Climate control ................................. 123
Operator's Manual ................................. 28 Overview of climate control systems ... 123
Service and vehicle operation ................ 28 Operating the climate control sys-
Operating safety .................................... 30 tems .................................................... 124
QR codes for the rescue card ................ 32 Air vents .............................................. 129
Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 32
Information on copyright ....................... 34
Driving and parking .......................... 131
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 131
At a glance ........................................... 35 Driving ................................................. 131
Cockpit .................................................. 35 DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 139
Instrument cluster ................................. 36 Automatic transmission ....................... 141
Multifunction steering wheel ................. 37 Refueling ............................................. 148
Center console ...................................... 38 Parking ................................................ 154
Overhead control panel ......................... 41 Driving tips .......................................... 157
Door control panel ................................. 42 Driving systems ................................... 162
Towing a trailer .................................... 202
Safety ................................................... 43
Panic alarm ............................................ 43 On-board computer and displays .... 208
Occupant safety .................................... 43 Important safety notes ........................ 208
Children in the vehicle ........................... 59 Displays and operation ........................ 208
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 64 Menus and submenus ......................... 212
Driving safety systems ........................... 64 Display messages ................................ 227
Protection against theft ......................... 76 Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................... 256
Opening and closing ........................... 77
SmartKey ............................................... 77 Multimedia system ........................... 268
Doors ..................................................... 83 General notes ...................................... 268
Cargo compartment ............................... 84 Important safety notes ........................ 268
Side windows ......................................... 90 Function restrictions ............................ 268
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding Operating system ................................ 269
panel ...................................................... 93
Stowage and features ...................... 278
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 98 Stowage areas ..................................... 278
Correct driver's seat position ................ 98 Features .............................................. 290
Seats ..................................................... 98
Steering wheel ..................................... 104
Contents 3
Maintenance and care ...................... 306

Engine compartment ........................... 306
ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 310
Care ..................................................... 311
Breakdown assistance ..................... 319

Where will I find...? .............................. 319
Flat tire ................................................ 321
Battery (vehicle) .................................. 325
Jump-starting ....................................... 328
Towing and tow-starting ...................... 330
Fuses ................................................... 333
Wheels and tires ............................... 336

Important safety notes ........................ 336
Operation ............................................ 336
Winter operation .................................. 338
Tire pressure ....................................... 339
Loading the vehicle .............................. 346
All about wheels and tires ................... 349
Changing a wheel ................................ 356
Wheel/tire combination ...................... 360
Technical data ................................... 362

Information regarding technical data ... 362
Vehicle electronics .............................. 362
Identification plates ............................. 363
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ...................................................... 364
Vehicle data ......................................... 370
Trailer tow hitch ................................... 371
4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 69
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Adaptive Damping System
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- Function/notes ............................. 174
tion System) Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 173
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel Adaptive Highbeam Assist
drive) .................................................. 175 Display message ............................ 240
12 V socket Function/notes ............................. 113
see Socket (12 V) Switching on/off ........................... 114
115 V socket ...................................... 294 Additional speedometer ................... 223
360° camera Additives (engine oil) ........................ 368
Cleaning ......................................... 316 Address book
Display in the multimedia system .. 188 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Function/notes ............................. 187 ual .................................................. 268
Adjusting the volume
A Multimedia system ........................ 269
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Air bags
Display message ............................ 228 Deployment ..................................... 55
Function/notes ................................ 65 Display message ............................ 237
Warning lamp ................................. 259 Front air bag (driver, front
Accident passenger) ....................................... 49
Automatic measures after an acci- Important safety notes .................... 48
dent ................................................. 58 Introduction ..................................... 48
Activating media mode Knee bag .......................................... 50
General notes ................................ 276 Occupant Classification System
Activating/deactivating cooling (OCS) ............................................... 51
with air dehumidification ................. 125 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
Active Blind Spot Assist lamps ............................................... 44
Activating/deactivating (on- Side impact air bag .......................... 50
board computer) ............................ 221 Window curtain air bag .................... 50
Display message ............................ 246 AIR BODY CONTROL
Function/notes ............................. 197 Display message ............................ 244
Active Lane Keeping Assist Function/notes ............................. 172
Activating/deactivating (on- Lowering the rear of the vehicle .... 174
board computer) ............................ 221 Raising the rear of the vehicle ....... 174
Display message ............................ 245 Setting the normal vehicle level ..... 173
Function/information .................... 200 Setting the raised vehicle level ...... 173
Active light function Air filter (display message) .............. 243
Display message ............................ 239 Air suspension
Active Parking Assist see AIR BODY CONTROL
Canceling ....................................... 182 Air vents
Detecting parking spaces .............. 179 Important safety notes .................. 129
Exiting a parking space .................. 181 Rear ............................................... 130
Function/notes ............................. 178 Setting ........................................... 129
Important safety notes .................. 178 Setting the center air vents ........... 130
Parking .......................................... 180 Setting the side air vents ............... 130
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 73 Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
Index 5
Airbag Automatic engine start (ECO start/

Warning lamp ................................. 262 stop function) .................................... 137
Alarm Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 76 start/stop function) .......................... 136
Switching off (ATA) .......................... 76 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 111
Switching the function on/off Automatic transmission
(ATA) ................................................ 76 Accelerator pedal position ............. 143
Alarm system Changing gear ............................... 143
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 141
AMG Display message ............................ 252
Performance Seat .......................... 102 Double-clutch function .................. 143
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 224 Drive program ................................ 144
Anti-lock braking system Drive program display .................... 142
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Driving tips .................................... 143
Armrest DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. 139
Stowage compartment .................. 279 Emergency running mode .............. 148
Ashtray ............................................... 292 Engaging drive position .................. 142
Assistance display (on-board com- Engaging neutral ............................ 142
puter) .................................................. 219 Engaging park position automati-
Assistance menu (on-board com- cally ............................................... 141
puter) .................................................. 220 Engaging reverse gear ................... 142
ASSYST PLUS Engaging the park position ............ 141
Displaying a service message ........ 310 Gearshift recommendation ............ 147
Driving abroad ............................... 311 Gliding mode ................................. 144
Hiding a service message .............. 310 Kickdown ....................................... 144
Resetting the service interval dis- Manual shifting .............................. 145
play ................................................ 311 Oil temperature (on-board com-
Service message ............................ 310 puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 224
Special service requirements ......... 311 Overview ........................................ 141
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Permanent setting ......................... 146
Activating/deactivating ................... 76 Problem (malfunction) ................... 148
Function ........................................... 76 Pulling away ................................... 135
Switching off the alarm .................... 76 Starting the engine ........................ 134
ATTENTION ASSIST Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 145
Activating/deactivating ................. 221 Trailer towing ................................. 144
Display message ............................ 244 Transmission position display
Displaying level .............................. 192 (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 142
Function/notes ............................. 191 Transmission positions .................. 143
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Automatic transmission emer-
see Qualified specialist workshop gency mode ....................................... 148
Authorized workshop Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-
see Qualified specialist workshop ing) ...................................................... 371
AUTO lights
Display message ............................ 239 B
see Lights
Automatic car wash (care) ............... 311 Back button ....................................... 269
Backup lamp
Display message ............................ 239
6 Index
Replacing bulbs ............................. 118 Brakes

Bag hook ............................................ 284 ABS .................................................. 65
Ball coupling Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 69
Installing ........................................ 204 BAS .................................................. 65
Removing ....................................... 206 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 65 Assist ............................................... 66
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 368
(Brake Assist PLUS with Cross- Display message ............................ 228
Traffic Assist) EBD .................................................. 73
Function/notes ................................ 66 Hill start assist ............................... 136
Important safety notes .................... 66 HOLD function ............................... 171
Battery (SmartKey) Important safety notes .................. 159
Checking .......................................... 80 Maintenance .................................. 160
Important safety notes .................... 80 Parking brake ................................ 155
Replacing ......................................... 80 Riding tips ...................................... 159
Battery (vehicle) Warning lamp ................................. 258
Charging ........................................ 327 Breakdown
Display message ............................ 241 Where will I find...? ........................ 319
Important safety notes .................. 325 see Flat tire
Jump starting ................................. 328 see Towing away
Blind Spot Assist Brightness control (instrument
Activating/deactivating (on- cluster lighting) ................................... 35
board computer) ............................ 221 Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 209
Display message ............................ 246
Notes/function .............................. 193 C
see Active Blind Spot Assist
California
Blootooth®
Important notice for retail cus-
Connecting a different mobile
tomers and lessees .......................... 28
phone ............................................ 276 Calling up a malfunction
BlueTEC
see Display messages
see DEF Calling up the climate control bar
Bluetooth® Multimedia system ........................ 272
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 275 Calling up the climate control
see also Digital Operator's Man- menu
ual .................................................. 268 Multimedia system ........................ 272
Telephony ...................................... 275 Camera
Brake Assist see 360° camera
see BAS (Brake Assist System) see Rear view camera
Brake fluid Car
Display message ............................ 233 see Vehicle
Notes ............................................. 368 Care
Brake force distribution 360° camera ................................. 316
see EBD (electronic brake force Car wash ........................................ 311
distribution) Carpets .......................................... 318
Brake linings Display ........................................... 316
Display message ............................ 233 Exhaust pipe .................................. 316
Exterior lights ................................ 315
Index 7
General notes ................................ 311 Change of address .............................. 29

Interior ........................................... 316 Change of ownership .......................... 29
Matte finish ................................... 314 Changing the media source ............. 216
Paint .............................................. 313 Charge-air pressure (on-board
Plastic trim .................................... 317 computer, Mercedes-AMG vehi-
Power washer ................................ 313 cles) .................................................... 224
Rear view camera .......................... 316 Child
Roof lining ...................................... 318 Restraint system .............................. 60
Seat belt ........................................ 318 Child seat
Seat cover ..................................... 317 Forward-facing restraint system ...... 63
Selector lever ................................ 317 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Sensors ......................................... 315 anchors ............................................ 61
Side running board ........................ 315 On the front-passenger seat ............ 62
Steering wheel ............................... 317 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 62
Trim pieces .................................... 317 Top Tether ....................................... 61
Washing by hand ........................... 312 Child-proof locks
Wheels ........................................... 314 Important safety notes .................... 63
Windows ........................................ 314 Rear doors ....................................... 64
Wiper blades .................................. 315 Children
Wooden trim .................................. 317 Special seat belt retractor ............... 59
Cargo compartment Children in the vehicle
Opening/closing (from outside, Important safety notes .................... 59
HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 87 Cigarette lighter ................................ 292
Plug-in module (telescopic rods) .... 287 Cleaning
Cargo compartment cover Mirror turn signal ........................... 315
Important safety notes .................. 285 Trailer tow hitch ............................. 316
Notes/how to use ......................... 285 Climate control
Cargo compartment enlargement ... 281 Control panel for dual-zone auto-
Cargo compartment floor matic climate control ..................... 123
Important safety notes .................. 288 Controlling automatically ............... 125
Opening/closing ............................ 288 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 125
Stowage well (under) ..................... 288 Cooling with air dehumidification
Cargo compartment plug-in mod- (multimedia system) ...................... 273
ule (telescope bars) .......................... 287 Defrosting the windows ................. 127
Cargo net Defrosting the windshield .............. 126
Attaching ....................................... 286 ECO start/stop function ................ 124
Important safety information ......... 285 General notes ................................ 123
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 284 Indicator lamp ................................ 125
CD Ionization ....................................... 129
see also Digital Operator's Man- Ionization (multimedia system) ...... 273
ual .................................................. 268 Notes on using the automatic cli-
CD player (on-board computer) ........ 217 mate control .................................. 124
Center console Overview ........................................ 272
Lower section .................................. 40 Overview of systems ...................... 123
Upper section .................................. 38 Perfume atomizer .......................... 128
Central locking Perfume atomizer (multimedia
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 77 system) .......................................... 272
8 Index
Problem with the rear window Coolant (engine)

defroster ........................................ 127 Checking the level ......................... 309
Problems with cooling with air Display message ............................ 240
dehumidification ............................ 125 Filling capacity ............................... 369
Refrigerant ..................................... 369 Important safety notes .................. 368
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 370 Temperature display in the instru-
Setting the air distribution ............. 126 ment cluster .................................. 209
Setting the air vents ...................... 129 Warning lamp ................................. 263
Setting the airflow ......................... 126 Cooling
Setting the climate mode ............... 126 see Climate control
Setting the climate mode (multi- Copyright ............................................. 34
media system) ............................... 272 Cornering light function
Setting the temperature ................ 126 Display message ............................ 239
Switching air-recirculation mode Function/notes ............................. 113
on/off ............................................ 128 Crosswind Assist ................................. 73
Switching on/off ........................... 124 Cruise control
Switching the rear window Cruise control lever ....................... 162
defroster on/off ............................ 127 Deactivating ................................... 163
Switching the synchronization Display message ............................ 248
function on and off ........................ 126 Driving system ............................... 162
Synchronization function (multi- Function/notes ............................. 162
media system) ............................... 273 General notes ................................ 162
Climate control settings Important safety notes .................. 162
Multimedia system ........................ 272 Setting a speed .............................. 163
Climate control system Storing and maintaining current
Climate control .............................. 124 speed ............................................. 163
Coat hooks ......................................... 287 Storing the current speed or call-
Cockpit ing up the last stored speed .......... 163
Overview .......................................... 35 Cup holder
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Center console .............................. 290
PLUS Important safety notes .................. 290
Activating/deactivating ................. 220 Rear compartment ......................... 290
Display message ............................ 233 Customer Assistance Center
Operation/notes .............................. 67 (CAC) ..................................................... 31
COMAND display Customer Relations Department ....... 31
Cleaning ......................................... 316
Combination switch .......................... 112 D
Connecting a USB device
see also Digital Operator's Man- Data
ual .................................................. 268 see Technical data
Consumption statistics (on-board Data carrier
computer) .......................................... 213 Selecting ........................................ 217
Daytime running lamps
Controller ........................................... 269
Controlling speed Display message ............................ 239
Function/notes ............................. 111
see DISTRONIC PLUS
Switching on/off (on-board com-
Convenience closing feature .............. 91
puter) ............................................. 223
Convenience opening feature ............ 91
Index 9
DEF Displays in the instrument cluster .. 168

Adding ........................................... 151 Driving tips .................................... 169
Display message ............................ 243 Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS ....... 166
Displaying level and range ............. 219 Function/notes ............................. 164
Filling capacity ............................... 367 Important safety notes .................. 164
Important safety notes .................. 367 Setting a speed .............................. 167
Low outside temperatures ............. 367 Setting the specified minimum
Purity ............................................. 367 distance ......................................... 167
DEF® Stopping ........................................ 167
Additives ........................................ 367 with Steering Assist and Stop&Go
Diagnostics connection ...................... 31 Pilot ............................................... 169
Diesel .................................................. 366 Doors
Digital Operator's Manual Automatic locking (switch) ............... 84
Help ................................................. 26 Central locking/unlocking
Introduction ..................................... 26 (SmartKey) ....................................... 77
Digital speedometer ......................... 213 Control panel ................................... 42
DIRECT SELECT lever Display message ............................ 254
Automatic transmission ................. 141 Emergency locking ........................... 84
Display Emergency unlocking ....................... 84
see Display messages Important safety notes .................... 83
see Warning and indicator lamps Opening (from inside) ...................... 83
Display messages Drinking and driving ......................... 157
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 310 Drive program
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 227 Automatic transmission ................. 144
Driving systems ............................. 244 SETUP (on-board computer,
Engine ............................................ 240 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 225
General notes ................................ 227 Drive programs
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 227 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 142
Introduction ................................... 227 DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. 139
Lights ............................................. 239 Driver's door
Safety systems .............................. 228 see Doors
SmartKey ....................................... 255 Driving abroad
Tires ............................................... 250 Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 311
Vehicle ........................................... 252 Driving Assistance PLUS package ... 197
Distance recorder ............................. 212 Driving on flooded roads .................. 161
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 265 Driving safety system
Distance warning function Crosswind Assist ............................. 73
Function/notes ................................ 68 Driving safety systems
Distance warning system ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 65
see COLLISION PREVENTION ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 73
ASSIST PLUS Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 69
DISTRONIC PLUS BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 65
Activating ....................................... 165 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic
Activation conditions ..................... 165 Assist ............................................... 66
Cruise control lever ....................... 165 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
Deactivating ................................... 169 PLUS ................................................ 67
Display message ............................ 247 Distance warning function ............... 68
10 Index
EBD (electronic brake force distri- Limited braking efficiency on sal-

bution) ............................................. 73 ted roads ....................................... 160
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Snow chains .................................. 338
gram) ............................................... 70 Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 160
Important safety information ........... 65 The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 131
Overview .......................................... 64 Towing a trailer .............................. 203
PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 73 Wet road surface ........................... 160
STEER CONTROL ............................. 75 DVD video
Driving system Operating (on-board computer) ..... 217
AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 172 see also Digital Operator's Man-
AMG sports suspension based on ual .................................................. 268
AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 174 DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Driving systems Automatic transmission ................. 139
360°camera .................................. 187 Climate control (3-zone automatic
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 197 climate control) ............................. 124
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 200
Active Parking Assist ..................... 178 E
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 191 EASY-ENTRY feature
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 193 Function/notes ............................. 105
Cruise control ................................ 162 EASY-EXIT feature
Display message ............................ 244 Function/notes ............................. 105
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 164 EBD (electronic brake force distri-
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering bution)
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 169 Display message ............................ 230
Driving Assistance Plus package ... 197 Function/notes ................................ 73
HOLD function ............................... 171 ECO display
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 195 Function/notes ............................. 158
Lane Tracking package .................. 193 On-board computer ....................... 213
PARKTRONIC ................................. 175 ECO start/stop function
Rear view camera .......................... 182 Automatic engine start .................. 137
Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 192 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 136
Driving tips Deactivating/activating ................. 137
Automatic transmission ................. 143 General information ....................... 136
Brakes ........................................... 159 Important safety notes .................. 136
Break-in period .............................. 131 Introduction ................................... 136
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 169 Electronic Stability Program
Downhill gradient ........................... 159
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Drinking and driving ....................... 157 Emergency
Driving in winter ............................. 161
Automatic measures after an acci-
Driving on flooded roads ................ 161
dent ................................................. 58
Driving on wet roads ...................... 161 Emergency release
Exhaust check ............................... 158
Driver's door .................................... 84
Fuel ................................................ 157
Vehicle ............................................. 84
General .......................................... 157 Emergency Tensioning Devices
Hydroplaning ................................. 161
Activation ......................................... 55
Icy road surfaces ........................... 161 Emergency unlocking
Important safety notes .................. 131
Tailgate ............................................ 89
Index 11
Emissions control Display message ............................ 228

Service and warranty information .... 28 Function/notes ................................ 70
Engine General notes .................................. 70
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 263 Important safety information ........... 70
Display message ............................ 240 Trailer stabilization ........................... 73
ECO start/stop function ................ 136 Warning lamp ................................. 259
Engine number ............................... 364 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-
Irregular running ............................ 138 tem) ...................................................... 70
Jump-starting ................................. 328 Exhaust
Starting (important safety notes) ... 133 see Exhaust pipe
Starting problems .......................... 138 Exhaust check ................................... 158
Starting the engine with the Exhaust pipe
SmartKey ....................................... 134 Cleaning ......................................... 316
Starting via smartphone ................ 134 Exterior lighting
Starting with the Start/Stop but- Cleaning ......................................... 315
ton ................................................. 134 Setting options .............................. 111
Switching off .................................. 155 see Lights
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 333 Exterior mirrors
Engine electronics Adjusting ....................................... 107
Problem (malfunction) ................... 138 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 108
Engine oil Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 107
Adding ........................................... 308 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 107
Additives ........................................ 368 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 108
Checking the oil level ..................... 307 Setting ........................................... 107
Checking the oil level using the Storing settings (memory func-
dipstick .......................................... 308 tion) ............................................... 109
Display message ............................ 242 Storing the parking position .......... 108
Filling capacity ............................... 368 Eyeglasses compartment ................. 279
General notes ................................ 367
Notes about oil grades ................... 367 F
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 307
Temperature (on-board computer, Favorites
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 224 Overview ........................................ 271
Entering an address Features ............................................. 290
see also Digital Operator's Man- Filler cap
ual .................................................. 268 see Refueling
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Flat tire
gram) Changing a wheel/mounting the
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 225 spare wheel ................................... 356
Characteristics ................................. 70 MOExtended tires .......................... 321
Crosswind Assist ............................. 73 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 321
Deactivating/activating (button TIREFIT kit ...................................... 322
in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 71 Floormats ........................................... 305
Deactivating/activating (notes, Frequencies
except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ...... 70 Mobile phone ................................. 362
Deactivating/activating (on- Two-way radio ................................ 362
board computer, except Front wheel arch
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 220 Removing/installing the cover ....... 117
12 Index
Front wheel arch cover Opening/closing the garage door .. 304

Installing/removing ....................... 117 Problems when programming ........ 304
Fuel Programming (button in the rear-
Additives ........................................ 366 view mirror) ................................... 303
Consumption statistics .................. 213 Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 303
Displaying the current consump- Gasoline ............................................. 365
tion ................................................ 213 Gear indicator (on-board com-
Displaying the range ...................... 213 puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 224
Driving tips .................................... 157 Genuine parts ...................................... 27
E10 ................................................ 365 Glove box ........................................... 279
Fuel gauge ....................................... 36 Google™ Local Search
Gasoline ......................................... 365 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 365 ual .................................................. 268
Low outside temperatures ............. 367 H
Problem (malfunction) ................... 151
Quality (diesel) ............................... 366 HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 87
Refueling ........................................ 148 Handwriting recognition
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 365 Switching text reader function
Fuel filler flap on/off ............................................ 271
Closing ........................................... 150 Touchpad ....................................... 270
Fuel filter (display message) ............ 243 Hazard warning lamps ...................... 113
Fuel level Head restraints
Calling up the range (on-board Adjusting (electrically) ................... 101
computer) ...................................... 213 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 101
Fuel tank Adjusting (rear) .............................. 101
Capacity ........................................ 365 Adjusting the fore-and-aft posi-
Problem (malfunction) ................... 151 tion manually ................................. 101
Fuses General notes ................................ 101
Allocation chart ............................. 334 Important safety notes .................. 100
Before changing ............................. 333 Installing/removing (rear) .............. 102
Dashboard fuse box ....................... 334 Head-up display
Fuse box in the cargo compart- Adjusting the brightness ................ 222
ment .............................................. 334 Displays and operating .................. 211
Fuse box in the engine compart- Function/notes ............................. 211
ment .............................................. 334 Important safety notes .................. 211
Fuse box in the front-passenger Selecting displays .......................... 222
footwell .......................................... 334 Setting the position ....................... 222
Important safety notes .................. 333 Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 109
G Headlamps
Display message ............................ 239
G-Meter (on-board computer, Fogging up ..................................... 114
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 224 see Automatic headlamp mode
Garage door opener Heating
Clearing the memory ..................... 305 see Climate control
General notes ................................ 302 High beam flasher ............................. 112
Index 13
High-beam headlamps iPod®

Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 113 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Display message ............................ 239 ual .................................................. 268
Replacing bulbs ............................. 117
Switching on/off ........................... 112 J
Hill start assist .................................. 136
HOLD function Jack
Activating ....................................... 172 Using ............................................. 357
Activation conditions ..................... 172 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 328
Deactivating ................................... 172
Display message ............................ 247 K
Function/notes ............................. 171 Key positions
General notes ................................ 171 SmartKey ....................................... 132
Home address Start/Stop button .......................... 133
see also Digital Operator's Man- KEYLESS-GO
ual .................................................. 268 Activating ......................................... 78
Hood Convenience closing feature ............ 92
Closing ........................................... 307 Deactivation ..................................... 78
Display message ............................ 254 Locking ............................................ 78
Important safety notes .................. 306 Removing the Start/Stop button ... 133
Opening ......................................... 306 Start function ................................... 79
Horn ...................................................... 35 Unlocking ......................................... 78
HUD Kickdown
see Head-up display Driving tips .................................... 144
Hydroplaning ..................................... 161 Manual gearshifting ....................... 147
Knee bag .............................................. 50
I
Ignition lock L
see Key positions Lamps
Immobilizer .......................................... 76 see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicator and warning lamps Lane Keeping Assist
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 196
PLUS .............................................. 265 Activating/deactivating (on-
Indicator lamps board computer) ............................ 221
see Warning and indicator lamps Display message ............................ 245
Indicators Function/information .................... 195
see Turn signals see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Insect protection on the radiator .... 307 Lane Tracking package ..................... 193
Instrument cluster Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 225
Overview .......................................... 36 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 36 anchors ................................................ 61
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 208 Level control
Interior lighting Display message ............................ 245
Automatic control .......................... 115 see AIR BODY CONTROL
Control ........................................... 115 License plate lamp (display mes-
Overview ........................................ 115 sage) ................................................... 239
Reading lamp ................................. 115
14 Index
Light function, active Matte finish (cleaning instruc-

Display message ............................ 239 tions) .................................................. 314
Light switch mbrace
Operation ....................................... 111 Call priority .................................... 298
Lights Display message ............................ 233
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 113 Downloading destinations
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 111 (COMAND) ..................................... 299
Cornering light function ................. 113 Downloading routes ....................... 301
Fogged up headlamps .................... 114 Emergency call .............................. 296
General notes ................................ 111 General notes ................................ 295
Hazard warning lamps ................... 113 Geo fencing ................................... 302
High beam flasher .......................... 112 Info call button .............................. 298
High-beam headlamps ................... 112 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 300
Light switch ................................... 111 Remote fault diagnosis .................. 300
Low-beam headlamps .................... 112 Remote vehicle locking .................. 300
Parking lamps ................................ 112 Roadside assistance button ........... 297
Rear fog lamp ................................ 112 Search & Send ............................... 299
Setting exterior lighting ................. 111 Self-test ......................................... 296
Standing lamps .............................. 112 Speed alert .................................... 301
Switching the daytime running System .......................................... 295
lamps on/off (on-board com- Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 302
puter) ............................................. 223 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 300
Turn signals ................................... 112 Mechanical key
see Interior lighting Function/notes ................................ 79
Loading guidelines ............................ 278 General notes .................................. 79
Locking Inserting .......................................... 79
see Central locking Locking vehicle ................................ 84
Locking (doors) Removing ......................................... 79
Automatic ........................................ 84 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 84
Emergency locking ........................... 84 Media Interface
From inside (central locking but- see Digital Operator's Manual
ton) .................................................. 83 Memory card (audio) ......................... 217
Locking centrally Memory function
see Central locking Seats, steering wheel, exterior
Low-beam headlamps mirrors ........................................... 109
Display message ............................ 239 Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
Replacing bulbs ............................. 116 360°camera .................................. 187
Switching on/off ........................... 112 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 197
Lumbar support Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 200
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- Active Parking Assist ..................... 178
port ................................................ 102 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 191
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 193
M DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 164
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering
M+S tires ............................................ 338
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 169
Malfunction message
General notes ................................ 162
see Display messages
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 195
PARKTRONIC ................................. 175
Index 15
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu- Music files

pant protection) ............................... 57 see also Digital Operator's Man-
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory ual .................................................. 268
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 58
Rear view camera .......................... 182 N
Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 192 Navigation
Message memory (on-board com- Displaying (on-board computer) ..... 214
puter) .................................................. 227 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 214
Messages see also Digital Operator's Man-
see Display messages ual .................................................. 268
see Warning and indicator lamps Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-
Mirror turn signal cle ....................................................... 131
Cleaning ......................................... 315
Mirrors
O
see Exterior mirrors
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) Occupant Classification System
Mobile phone (OCS)
Connecting (Bluetooth® inter- Conditions ....................................... 51
face) .............................................. 275 Faults ............................................... 54
Connecting another mobile Operation ......................................... 51
phone ............................................ 276 System self-test ............................... 53
Frequencies ................................... 362 Occupant safety
Installation ..................................... 362 Air bags ........................................... 48
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 218 Automatic measures after an acci-
Transmission output (maximum) .... 362 dent ................................................. 58
Modifying the programming Children in the vehicle ..................... 59
(SmartKey) ........................................... 79 Important safety notes .................... 43
MOExtended tires .............................. 321 Introduction to the restraint sys-
Mounting wheels tem .................................................. 43
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 360 Occupant Classification System
Mounting a new wheel ................... 359 (OCS) ............................................... 51
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 357 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
Raising the vehicle ......................... 357 lamps ............................................... 44
Removing a wheel .......................... 359 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 64
Securing the vehicle against roll- PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-
ing away ........................................ 357 pant protection) ............................... 57
MP3 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
Operation ....................................... 217 occupant protection PLUS) .............. 58
see also Digital Operator's Man- Restraint system warning lamp ........ 44
ual .................................................. 268 Seat belt .......................................... 44
Multifunction display OCS
Function/notes ............................. 210 Conditions ....................................... 51
Multifunction steering wheel Faults ............................................... 54
Operating the on-board computer .. 209 Operation ......................................... 51
Overview .......................................... 37 System self-test ............................... 53
Multimedia system Odometer ........................................... 212
Switching on and off ...................... 269
16 Index
Oil P
see Engine oil
On-board computer Paddle shifters
AMG menu ..................................... 224 see Steering wheel paddle shifters
Assistance graphic menu ............... 219 Paint code number ............................ 363
Assistance menu ........................... 220 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 313
Display messages .......................... 227 Panic alarm .......................................... 43
Displaying a service message ........ 310 Panorama roof with power tilt/
Displays and operation .................. 208 sliding panel
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 168 Important safety notes .................... 93
Factory settings ............................. 223 Operating ......................................... 94
G-Meter ......................................... 224 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 96
Head-up display ............................. 211 Rain closing feature ......................... 95
Head-up display menu ................... 222 Reversing feature ............................. 94
Important safety notes .................. 208 Panoramic roof
Instrument cluster menu ............... 223 Operating the roller sunblinds .......... 95
Lights menu ................................... 223 Parcel net ........................................... 286
Media menu ................................... 216 Parking
Menu overview .............................. 212 Important safety notes .................. 154
Message memory .......................... 227 Parking brake ................................ 155
Navigation menu ............................ 214 Parking position for the exterior
RACETIMER ................................... 225 mirror on the front-passenger
Radio menu ................................... 216 side ................................................ 108
Service menu ................................. 219 Rear view camera .......................... 182
Settings menu ............................... 220 Switching off the engine ................ 155
Standard display ............................ 212 see PARKTRONIC
Telephone menu ............................ 218 Parking aid
Trip menu ...................................... 212 see 360° camera
Video DVD operation ..................... 217 see Active Parking Assist
Opening and closing the side trim see Exterior mirrors
panels ................................................. 118 see PARKTRONIC
Operating safety see Rear view camera
Declaration of conformity ................ 30 Parking Assist
Important safety notes .................... 30 Display message ............................ 246
Operating system Parking brake
see On-board computer Applying automatically ................... 156
Operation Applying or releasing manually ...... 156
Digital Operator's Manual ................ 26 Display message ............................ 230
Operator's Manual Electric parking brake .................... 155
Overview .......................................... 28 Emergency braking ........................ 157
Vehicle equipment ........................... 28 General notes ................................ 155
Outside temperature display ........... 209 Releasing automatically ................. 156
Overhead control panel ...................... 41 Warning lamp ................................. 262
Override feature Parking lamps
Rear side windows ........................... 64 Switching on/off ........................... 112
PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating ................. 177
Driving system ............................... 175
Index 17
Function/notes ............................. 175 Q

Problem (malfunction) ................... 178 QR code
Range of the sensors ..................... 176 Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1
Warning display ............................. 177 Rescue card ..................................... 32
PASSENGER AIR BAG Qualified specialist workshop ........... 31
Display message ............................ 237 Quick access for audio and tele-
Indicator lamps ................................ 44 phone
Problems (malfunction) .................. 237 Changing the station/music
Perfume atomizer track .............................................. 271
Operating ....................................... 128
Problem (malfunction) ................... 129 R
Setting the perfume intensity RACE TIMER (on-board computer,
(multimedia system) ...................... 272 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 225
Vial ................................................ 128 Radar sensor system
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 64 Display message ............................ 235
Phone book Radiator cover ................................... 307
see also Digital Operator's Man- Radio
ual .................................................. 268 Selecting a station ......................... 216
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- Radio mode
tions) .................................................. 317 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Power washers .................................. 313 ual .................................................. 268
Power windows Radio-wave reception/transmis-
see Side windows sion in the vehicle
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant Declaration of conformity ................ 30
protection) Rain closing feature (panorama
Display message ............................ 234 roof with power tilt/sliding panel) .... 95
Operation ......................................... 57 Reading lamp ..................................... 115
PRE-SAFE® Brake Rear compartment
Activating/deactivating ................. 221 Setting the air vents ...................... 130
Display message ............................ 234 Rear fog lamp
Function/notes ................................ 73 Display message ............................ 239
Important safety notes .................... 74 Switching on/off ........................... 112
Warning lamp ................................. 265 Rear seat
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory Adjusting the angle of the backr-
occupant protection PLUS) ests ................................................ 283
Operation ......................................... 58 Rear seat backrest
Protection against theft Display message ............................ 254
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 76 Rear seats
Immobilizer ...................................... 76 Display message ............................ 254
Protection of the environment Rear view camera
General notes .................................. 27 "Reverse parking" function ............ 184
Pulling away Cleaning instructions ..................... 316
Automatic transmission ................. 135 Coupling up a trailer function ........ 186
General notes ................................ 135 Display in the multimedia system .. 183
Hill start assist ............................... 136 General notes ................................ 182
Trailer ............................................ 135
18 Index
Object detection (function/ Warning lamp ................................. 262

notes) ............................................ 186 Warning lamp (function) ................... 44
Switching on/off ........................... 183 Reversing feature
Wide-angle function ....................... 186 Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 94
Rear window defroster Roller sunblinds ............................... 95
Problem (malfunction) ................... 127 Side windows ................................... 90
Switching on/off ........................... 127 Tailgate ............................................ 85
Rear window wiper Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 29
Replacing the wiper blade .............. 121 Roller sunblind
Switching on/off ........................... 120 Operating ......................................... 96
Rear-view mirror Panorama roof with power tilt/
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 108 sliding panel ..................................... 95
Recuperation display ........................ 213 Rear side windows ......................... 291
Reflective safety jacket .................... 319 Resetting ......................................... 96
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- Roof carrier ........................................ 289
tem) Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
Important safety notes .................. 369 guidelines) ......................................... 318
Refueling Roof load (maximum) ........................ 370
Fuel gauge ....................................... 36 Route guidance
Important safety notes .................. 148 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Refueling process .......................... 149 ual .................................................. 268
see Fuel Route guidance active ...................... 214
Remote control
Garage door opener ....................... 302 S
Programming (garage door
opener) .......................................... 303 Safety
Replacing bulbs Children in the vehicle ..................... 59
Backup lamp .................................. 118 see Occupant safety
High-beam headlamps ................... 117 see Operating safety
Important safety notes .................. 115 SD card
Installing/removing the cover Inserting/removing ........................ 276
(front wheel arch) .......................... 117 Selecting ........................................ 217
Low-beam headlamps .................... 116 SD memory card
Opening/closing side trim panels .. 118 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Overview of bulb types .................. 116 ual .................................................. 268
Replacing front bulbs (vehicles Search & Send
with halogen headlamps) ............... 116 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Turn signals (front) ......................... 117 ual .................................................. 268
Reporting safety defects .................... 32 Seat
Rescue card ......................................... 32 Correct driver's seat position ........... 98
Reserve (fuel tank) Seat belts
see Fuel Adjusting the driver's and front-
Reserve fuel passenger seat belt ......................... 47
Display message ............................ 242 Adjusting the height ......................... 47
Warning lamp ................................. 263 center rear-compartment seat ......... 47
Restraint system Cleaning ......................................... 318
Display message ............................ 235 Correct usage .................................. 46
Introduction ..................................... 43 Fastening ......................................... 47
Index 19
Important safety guidelines ............. 45 Setting the language

Introduction ..................................... 44 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Releasing ......................................... 47 ual .................................................. 268
Warning lamp ................................. 256 Setting the time
Warning lamp (function) ................... 47 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Seats ual .................................................. 268
Adjusting (AMG Performance Settings
Seat) .............................................. 102 Factory (on-board computer) ......... 223
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 100 On-board computer ....................... 220
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- SETUP (on-board computer,
port ................................................ 102 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 225
Adjusting the head restraint .......... 100 Side impact air bag ............................. 50
Calling up a stored setting (mem- Side marker lamp (display mes-
ory function) .................................. 110 sage) ................................................... 239
Cleaning the cover ......................... 317 Side running board
Folding the backrest (rear com- Cleaning ......................................... 315
partment) forwards/back .............. 281 Side windows
Important safety notes .................... 98 Cleaning ......................................... 314
Seat heating .................................. 102 Convenience closing feature ............ 91
Seat heating problem .................... 104 Convenience opening feature .......... 91
Seat ventilation .............................. 103 Important safety information ........... 90
Seat ventilation problem ................ 104 Opening/closing .............................. 90
Storing settings (memory func- Problem (malfunction) ..................... 93
tion) ............................................... 109 Resetting ......................................... 92
Securing a load Reversing feature ............................. 90
see Securing cargo SIRIUS services
Securing cargo .................................. 284 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Selector lever ual .................................................. 268
Cleaning ......................................... 317 Ski and snowboard bag .................... 280
see Automatic transmission Sliding sunroof
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 315 Important safety notes .................... 93
Service menu (on-board com- Problem (malfunction) ..................... 96
puter) .................................................. 219 see Panorama roof with power
Service message tilt/sliding panel
see ASSYST PLUS SmartKey
Service products Changing the battery ....................... 80
Brake fluid ..................................... 368 Changing the programming ............. 79
Coolant (engine) ............................ 368 Checking the battery ....................... 80
DEF special additives ..................... 367 Convenience closing feature ............ 92
Engine oil ....................................... 367 Convenience opening feature .......... 91
Fuel ................................................ 364 Display message ............................ 255
Important safety notes .................. 364 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 77
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- Important safety notes .................... 77
tem) ............................................... 369 KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 79
Washer fluid ................................... 369 Loss ................................................. 81
Setting the date/time format Mechanical key ................................ 79
see also Digital Operator's Man- Overview .......................................... 77
ual .................................................. 268 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 132
20 Index
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 81 Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot

Starting the engine ........................ 134 (DISTRONIC PLUS)
Smartphone Display message ............................ 248
Starting the engine ........................ 134 Steering assistant STEER CON-
SMS TROL
see also Digital Operator's Man- see STEER CONTROL
ual .................................................. 268 Steering wheel
Snow chains ...................................... 338 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 105
Socket (12 V) Adjusting (manually) ...................... 104
Cargo compartment ....................... 293 Button overview ............................... 37
Center console .............................. 293 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 209
General notes ................................ 293 Cleaning ......................................... 317
Rear compartment ......................... 293 EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 105
Sound Important safety notes .................. 104
Switching on/off ........................... 269 Storing settings (memory func-
Special seat belt retractor .................. 59 tion) ............................................... 109
Specialist workshop ............................ 31 Steering wheel heating
Speed, controlling Problem (malfunction) ................... 105
see Cruise control Switching on/off ........................... 105
Speedometer Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 145
Activating/deactivating the addi- Stop&Go Pilot and Steering Assist .. 169
tional speedometer ........................ 223 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 225
Digital ............................................ 213 Stowage areas ................................... 278
In the Instrument cluster ................. 36 Stowage compartments
Segments ...................................... 208 Armrest (under) ............................. 279
Selecting the display unit ............... 223 Center console .............................. 279
SPORT handling mode Cup holders ................................... 290
Deactivating/activating Door ............................................... 280
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 71 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 279
Warning lamp ................................. 261 Glove box ....................................... 279
Standing lamps Important safety information ......... 278
Display message ............................ 239 Map pockets .................................. 280
Switching on/off ........................... 112 Rear ............................................... 280
Start button Stowage net ................................... 280
Display message ............................ 256 see Stowage areas
Start/Stop button Stowage net ....................................... 280
Key positions ................................. 133 Summer tires
Starting the engine ........................ 134 In winter ........................................ 338
Start/stop function Sun visor ............................................ 291
see ECO start/stop function Suspension settings
Starting (engine) ................................ 133 AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 173
STEER CONTROL .................................. 75 Suspension tuning
Steering AMG sports suspension based on
Display message ............................ 254 AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 174
Warning lamps ............................... 267 SETUP (on-board computer,
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot .. 169 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 225
Index 21
SUV see also Digital Operator's Man-

(Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 30 ual .................................................. 268
Switching air-recirculation mode Switching between mobile
on/off ................................................. 128 phones ........................................... 276
Switching on media mode see Mobile phone
Via the device list .......................... 276 Temperature
Coolant (display in the instrument
T cluster) .......................................... 209
Engine oil (on-board computer,
Tachometer ........................................ 209 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 224
Tail lamps Outside temperature ...................... 209
Display message ............................ 239 Setting (climate control) ................ 126
Tailgate Transmission oil (on-board com-
Display message ............................ 253 puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 224
Emergency unlocking ....................... 89 Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 225
HANDS-FREE ACCESS ..................... 87 Tire pressure
Important safety notes .................... 84 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 343
Limiting the opening angle ............... 89 Checking manually ........................ 342
Obstruction detection ...................... 85 Display message ............................ 250
Opening dimensions ...................... 370 Maximum ....................................... 342
Opening/closing (automatically Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 324
from inside) ...................................... 88 Notes ............................................. 341
Opening/closing (automatically Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 324
from outside) ................................... 86 Recommended ............................... 339
Opening/closing (manually from Using the TIREFIT kit ...................... 323
outside) ............................................ 85 Tire pressure loss warning system
Reversing feature ............................. 85 General notes ................................ 342
Tank content
Fuel gauge ....................................... 36 Restarting ...................................... 343
Technical data Tire pressure monitor
Capacities ...................................... 364 Checking the tire pressure elec-
Drawbar load (maximum) ............... 371 tronically ........................................ 345
Information .................................... 362 Function/notes ............................. 343
Trailer loads ................................... 371 General notes ................................ 343
Vehicle data ................................... 370 Important safety notes .................. 344
Telephone
Radio type approval for the tire
Accepting a call (multifunction pressure monitor ........................... 346
steering wheel) .............................. 218 Restarting ...................................... 345
Authorizing a mobile phone (con- Warning lamp ................................. 266
necting) ......................................... 275 Warning message .......................... 345
Connecting a mobile phone (gen- Tire pressure sensors
eral information) ............................ 275 Display message ............................ 251
Display message ............................ 254 Tire-change tool kit ........................... 320
Introduction ................................... 218 TIREFIT kit
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 218
Number from the phone book ........ 218
Storage location ............................ 320
Redialing ........................................ 219
Tire pressure not reached .............. 324
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 218
Tire pressure reached .................... 324
22 Index
Using ............................................. 323 Service life ..................................... 337

Tires Sidewall (definition) ....................... 355
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 355 Snow chains .................................. 338
Average weight of the vehicle Speed rating (definition) ................ 355
occupants (definition) .................... 354 Storing ........................................... 357
Bar (definition) ............................... 354 Structure and characteristics
Changing a wheel .......................... 356 (definition) ..................................... 354
Characteristics .............................. 354 Summer tires in winter .................. 338
Checking ........................................ 336 Temperature .................................. 350
Curb weight (definition) ................. 355 TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Definition of terms ......................... 354 (definition) ..................................... 356
Direction of rotation ...................... 356 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 355
Display message ............................ 250 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 355
Distribution of the vehicle occu- Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 354
pants (definition) ............................ 356 Tire size (data) ............................... 360
DOT (Department of Transporta- Tire size designation, load-bearing
tion) (definition) ............................. 354 capacity, speed rating .................... 351
DOT, Tire Identification Number Tire tread ....................................... 337
(TIN) ............................................... 353 Tire tread (definition) ..................... 355
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Total load limit (definition) ............. 356
(definition) ..................................... 354 Traction ......................................... 350
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def- Traction (definition) ....................... 356
inition) ........................................... 355 Tread wear ..................................... 350
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- Uniform Tire Quality Grading
ing) (definition) .............................. 355 Standards ...................................... 349
Important safety notes .................. 336 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Increased vehicle weight due to Standards (definition) .................... 354
optional equipment (definition) ...... 354 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 356
Information on driving .................... 336 Wheel and tire combination ........... 360
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 355 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 354
Labeling (overview) ........................ 351 see Flat tire
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 356 Top Tether ............................................ 61
Load index ..................................... 353 Topping up
Load index (definition) ................... 355 DEF ................................................ 151
Maximum load on a tire (defini- Touchpad
tion) ............................................... 355 Changing the station/music
Maximum loaded vehicle weight track .............................................. 271
(definition) ..................................... 355 Character suggestions ................... 270
Maximum permissible tire pres- Deleting characters ....................... 270
sure (definition) ............................. 355 Entering a space ............................ 270
Maximum tire load ......................... 353 Entering characters ....................... 270
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 355 Gesture control .............................. 270
MOExtended tires .......................... 338 Handwriting recognition ................ 270
Optional equipment weight (defi- Operating the touchpad ................. 270
nition) ............................................ 356 Overview ........................................ 270
PSI (pounds per square inch) (def- Quick access for Audio .................. 271
inition) ........................................... 355 Switching ....................................... 270
Replacing ....................................... 356 Switching input line ....................... 270
Index 23
Tow-starting Transmission oil

Emergency engine starting ............ 333 Temperature (on-board computer,
Important safety notes .................. 330 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 224
Towing a trailer Transmission position display ......... 142
Axle load, permissible .................... 371 Transporting the vehicle .................. 332
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 316 Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-
Coupling up a trailer ...................... 204 tions) .................................................. 317
Decoupling a trailer ....................... 206 Trip computer (on-board com-
Driving tips .................................... 203 puter) .................................................. 213
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Trip odometer
gram) ............................................... 73 Calling up ....................................... 212
Important safety notes .................. 202 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 214
Installing the ball coupling ............. 204 Trunk
Lights display message .................. 239 see Cargo compartment
Power supply ................................. 206 Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 370
Pulling away with a trailer .............. 135 Turn signals
Removing the ball coupling ............ 206 Display message ............................ 239
Trailer loads ................................... 371 Replacing bulbs (front) ................... 117
Towing away Switching on/off ........................... 112
Important safety guidelines ........... 330 Two-way radio
Installing the towing eye ................ 331 Frequencies ................................... 362
Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 333 Installation ..................................... 362
Removing the towing eye ............... 332 Transmission output (maximum) .... 362
Transporting the vehicle ................ 332 Type identification plate
With both axles on the ground ....... 332 see Vehicle identification plate
Towing eye ......................................... 320
Traffic reports U
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 268 Unlocking
Traffic Sign Assist Emergency unlocking ....................... 84
Display message ............................ 247 From inside the vehicle (central
Function/notes ............................. 192 unlocking button) ............................. 83
Important safety notes .................. 193 USB devices
Instrument cluster display ............. 193 Connecting to the Media Inter-
Trailer coupling face ............................................... 276
see Towing a trailer
Trailer loads and drawbar nose- V
weights ............................................... 206 Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 291
Trailer towing Vehicle
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 202 Correct use ...................................... 31
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 195 Data acquisition ............................... 32
Permissible trailer loads and Display message ............................ 252
drawbar noseweights ..................... 206 Electronics ..................................... 362
Transfer case ..................................... 148 Equipment ....................................... 28
Transmission Individual settings .......................... 220
Display message ............................ 253 Limited Warranty ............................. 32
see Automatic transmission Loading .......................................... 346
24 Index
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 84 General notes ................................ 256

Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 77 Overview .......................................... 36
Lowering ........................................ 360 Parking brake ................................ 262
Maintenance .................................... 29 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 44
Operating safety .............................. 30 Reserve fuel ................................... 263
Operation outside the USA/ Restraint system ............................ 262
Canada ............................................ 29 Seat belt ........................................ 256
Parking .......................................... 154 SPORT handling mode ................... 261
Parking for a long period ................ 157 Steering ......................................... 267
Pulling away ................................... 135 Tire pressure monitor .................... 266
Raising ........................................... 357 Warranty .............................................. 28
Reporting problems ......................... 31 Washer fluid
Securing from rolling away ............ 357 Display message ............................ 254
Technical data ............................... 362 Weather display (COMAND)
Towing away .................................. 330 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Transporting .................................. 332 ual .................................................. 268
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 84 Wheel and tire combinations
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 77 Tires ............................................... 360
Vehicle data ................................... 370 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 360
Vehicle data Wheel chock ...................................... 357
Dimensions .................................... 370 Wheels
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 84 Changing a wheel .......................... 356
Vehicle identification number Checking ........................................ 336
see VIN Cleaning ......................................... 314
Vehicle identification plate .............. 363 Important safety notes .................. 336
Vehicle level Information on driving .................... 336
AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 173 Interchanging/changing ................ 356
Display message ............................ 244 Mounting a new wheel ................... 359
Video Mounting a wheel .......................... 357
Operating the DVD ......................... 217 Removing a wheel .......................... 359
see also Digital Operator's Man- Snow chains .................................. 338
ual .................................................. 268 Storing ........................................... 357
VIN Tightening torque ........................... 360
Seat ............................................... 364 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 360
Type plate ...................................... 363 Window curtain air bag
Display message ............................ 236
W Operation ......................................... 50
Windows
Warning and indicator lamps
see Side windows
ABS ................................................ 259
Windshield
Air bags ......................................... 262
Defrosting ...................................... 126
Brakes ........................................... 258
Windshield washer fluid
Coolant .......................................... 263
see Windshield washer system
Distance warning ........................... 265
Windshield washer system
Engine diagnostics ......................... 263
Adding washer fluid ....................... 310
ESP® .............................................. 259 Important safety notes .................. 369
ESP® OFF ....................................... 261 Windshield wipers
Fuel tank ........................................ 263 Problem (malfunction) ................... 122
Index 25
Rear window wiper ........................ 120

Replacing the wiper blades ............ 120
Switching on/off ........................... 119
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 161
Snow chains .................................. 338
Winter operation
Radiator cover ............................... 307
Summer tires ................................. 338
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 338
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 315
Replacing ....................................... 120
Replacing (rear window) ................ 121
Replacing (windshield) ................... 120
Without changing gears
Display message ............................ 253
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 317
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
26 Digital Operator's Manual
Introduction Operating the Digital Operator's Man-

ual
The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-
mation about the safe operation of your vehicle. General notes
The Digital Operator's Manual provides compre-
Please observe the information about the oper-
hensive and specifically adapted information on
ation of the controller (Y page 269).
your vehicle's equipment and multimedia sys-
tem. You can call up the Digital Operator's Man-
ual via the multimedia system. Content pages
i You will not incur any costs when calling up The content pages can be accessed by means of
the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital a visual search, a keyword search or using the
Operator's Manual works without connecting contents.
to the Internet.
There are three ways to access the topics of the
Digital Operator's Manual:
RVisual search
The visual search allows you to explore your
vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the
vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can
access many of the different topics covered
by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access
the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-
cle interior" view.
RKeyword search
X To scroll forward/back: turn 3 the con-
The keyword search allows you to search for a
troller.
keyword by entering characters.
X To display in full-screen or animation: slide
RContents
8 the controller to the left :.
You can select individual sections in the con-
tents. X To select information text or save book-
marks: slide 9 the controller to the
i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva- right ;.
ted for safety reasons while driving.
X To select a link: slide 6 the controller
downwards =.
X To exit a content page: select the %
Operation symbol ?.
Calling up the Digital Operator's Man- X To call up the basic menu of the Digital
ual Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol A.
X To switch functions to the multimedia
X Press the Ø button on the center console. system using the buttons on the center
The overview relating to the vehicle appears. console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø
X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by button.
turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller. The selected menu appears. The Digital Oper-
X Confirm 7 the message about the warning ator's Manual remains open in the back-
and safety notes. ground.
The basic menu for the Digital Operator's
Manual appears.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 27
Protecting the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
Introduction
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion.
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and recom-
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner mendations
that takes the requirements of both nature Wherever the Operator's Manual requires you to
and humanity into account. dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-
You too can help to protect the environment use them. Observe the relevant environmental
by operating your vehicle in an environmen- rules and regulations when disposing of materi-
als. In this way you will help to protect the envi-
tally responsible manner.
ronment.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors: Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Roperating conditions of your vehicle
Ryour personal driving style H Environmental note
You can influence both factors. You should Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
bear the following in mind: assemblies and parts which are of the same
Operating conditions: quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
parts.
sumption.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
are correct. ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
the following areas of your vehicle:
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
Rdoors
them. Rdoor pillars
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute Rdoor sills
to environmental protection. You should Rseats
therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rcockpit
Ralways have service work carried out at a Rinstrument cluster
qualified specialist workshop. Rcenter console
Personal driving style: Do not install accessories such as audio sys-
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs
or welding. You could impair the operating
starting the engine. efficiency of the restraint systems.
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
is stationary. qualified specialist workshop.
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance You could jeopardize the operating safety of
from the vehicle in front. your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and well as accessories relevant to safety which
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This
braking.
could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant
Z
28 Service and vehicle operation
systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu- Service and vehicle operation
ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-
ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that Warranty
have been specifically approved for your vehi-
Introduction
cle. The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to accordance with the warranty terms and condi-
strict quality control. Every part has been spe- tions in the Service and Warranty Information
cifically developed, manufactured or selected booklet.
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
should be used. accordance with the following warranty terms
More than 300,000 different genuine and conditions:
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
Mercedes-Benz models. REmission System Warranty
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain REmission Performance Warranty
a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
necessary service and repair work. In addition, setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island
strategically located parts delivery centers pro- and Vermont Emission Control System War-
vide quick and reliable parts service. ranty
Always specify the vehicle identification number RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz laws)
parts (Y page 363).
Replacement parts and accessories are covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories
warranties. These are available at any author-
Operator's Manual ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
i This Operator's Manual describes all models Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-
and all standard and optional equipment of ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-
your vehicle available at the time of publica- mation booklet will be posted to you.
tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-
cific differences are possible. Bear in mind
that your vehicle may not feature all functions
described here. This also applies to safety- Information for customers in Califor-
relevant systems and functions. The equip- nia
ment in your vehicle may therefore differ from Under California law you may be entitled to a
that shown in the descriptions and illustra- replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
tions. purchase price or lease price, if after a reason-
The original purchase agreement lists all sys- able number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz
tems installed in your vehicle. USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service
Should you have any questions concerning facilities fail to fix one or more substantial
equipment and operation, please consult an defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. covered by its express warranty.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book- During the period of 18 months from original
let are important documents and should be kept delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of
in the vehicle. 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,
a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-
sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more
of the following occurs:
(1) the substantial defect or malfunction can
result in death or serious injuries for the
Service and vehicle operation 29
vehicle occupants while driving and this Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
defect has already been repaired at least Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
twice and Mercedes-Benz, LLC has been (USA) at the hotline number
informed in writing of the necessity of a 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Introduction
repair. Customer Service Center (Canada) at
(2) the defect or malfunction, though less seri- 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-
ous than (1) above, has already been ing you in a timely manner should the need arise.
repaired at least four times and Mercedes- If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter-
Benz has been informed in writing of the ature in the vehicle so that it is available to the
necessity of a repair. next owner.
(3) the vehicle cannot be used for longer than If you have purchased a used car, please send us
30 calendar days because of repair work the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the
resulting from this or other substantial Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
defects or malfunctions. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
Please send your written notice to: (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Customer Assistance Center
3 Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Vehicle operation outside the USA
and Canada
Maintenance When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe

the following points:
Always bring the Maintenance Booklet with you RService facilities or replacement parts may
when taking the vehicle to an authorized not be readily available.
Mercedes-Benz Center. Your customer service RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
advisor will enter every service into your Main-
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
tenance Booklet on your behalf.
can cause damage to the catalytic converter.
RThe fuel may have a considerably lower
octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause
Roadside Assistance engine damage.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for
gram offers technical help in the event of a delivery in Europe through our European Deliv-
breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis- ery Program. For details, consult an authorized
tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the
hours a day, 365 days a year. following addresses.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) In the USA
(USA) Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
1-800-387-0100(Canada) European Delivery Department
For additional information, refer to the One Mercedes Drive
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section in the Service and Warranty Booklet In Canada
(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu- Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
ment wallet. European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Change of address or change of own-
ership
In the event of a change of address, please send
us the "Notification of Address Change" in the
Z
30 Operating safety
Sports Utility Vehicle G WARNING

Modifications to electronic components, their
G WARNING
software as well as wiring can impair their
Introduction
Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle function and/or the function of other net-
may start to skid and roll over in the event of worked components. In particular, systems
an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road result, these may no longer function as inten-
conditions. There is a risk of an accident. ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
Always adapt your speed and driving style to the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the accident and injury.
prevailing road and weather conditions. Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll- tronic components or their software. You
over rate than other types of vehicles. should have all work to electrical and elec-
Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe specialist workshop.
or fatal injury.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signif- ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
icantly more likely to die than a person wearing Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
a seat belt. curb or an unpaved road
You and all vehicle occupants should always Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
wear your seat belts. curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road
Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or
parts of the chassis
Operating safety In situations like this, the body, the under-
body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be
Important safety notes damaged without the damage being visible.
Components damaged in this way can unex-
G WARNING pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no
If you do not have the prescribed service/ longer withstand the loads they are designed
maintenance work or any required repairs to.
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-
system failures. There is a risk of an accident. bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can gather between the underbody and
Always have the prescribed service/mainte- the underbody paneling. If these materials
nance work as well as any required repairs come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. system, they can catch fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle checked
G WARNING and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-
ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk paying attention to road and traffic condi-
of fire. tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-
When driving off road or on unpaved roads, cialist workshop.
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
particular, remove parts of plants or other
flammable materials which have become Declaration of conformity for wireless
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a vehicle components
qualified specialist workshop. USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-
ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
Operating safety 31
subject to the two following two conditions: 1) Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-
These devices may not cause harmful interfer- nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-
ence, and 2) These devices must accept any mation being reset, for example. This may lead
interference received, including interference to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
Introduction
that may cause undesired operation. Changes the next emissions test during the main inspec-
or modifications not expressly approved by the tion.
party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle Qualified specialist workshop
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol- An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-
lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary
not cause interference, and (2) These devices specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to
must accept any interference, including inter- correctly carry out the work required on your
ference that may cause undesired operation of vehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-
the device." evant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.
Always have the following work carried out at an
Diagnostics connection authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
Rwork relevant to safety
The diagnostics connection is only intended for
the connection of diagnostic equipment at a Rservice and maintenance work
qualified specialist workshop. Rrepair work
Ralterations, installation work and modifica-
G WARNING
tions
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics Rwork on electronic components
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the
operating safety of the vehicle could be affec- Correct use
ted. There is a risk of an accident.
If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-
Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con- ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.
nection in the vehicle, which is approved for Leave warning stickers in position.
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the following information when driving
your vehicle:
G WARNING Rthe safety notes in this manual
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the Rtechnical data for the vehicle
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. Rtraffic rules and regulations
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. vehicles
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats Problems with your vehicle
securely and as specified in order to ensure If you should experience a problem with your
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
loose floormats and do not place floormats on affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact
top of one another. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-
ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-
! If the engine is switched off and equipment fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-
on the diagnostics connection is used, the isfaction, please discuss the problem again with
starter battery may discharge. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec-
Z
32 Data stored in the vehicle
essary, contact us at one of the following ventions against these instructions is not cov-
addresses. ered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
In the USA Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War-
ranty.
Introduction
Customer Assistance Center

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
3 Mercedes Drive
QR codes for the rescue card
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap
Customer Relations Department and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. event of an accident, rescue services can use
98 Vanderhoof Avenue the QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue
card contains the most important information
about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the
routing of the electric cables.
Reporting safety defects You can find more information under
USA only: www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
The following text is reproduced as required of
all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the Data stored in the vehicle
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966. Data storage
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect A wide range of electronic components in your
which could cause a crash or could cause injury vehicle contain data memories.
or death, you should immediately inform the These data memories temporarily or perma-
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration nently store technical information about:
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC. Rthe vehicle's operating state
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may Rincidents
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety Rmalfunctions
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order In general, this technical information docu-
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA ments the state of a component, a module, a
cannot become involved in individual problems system or the surroundings.
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz These include, for example:
USA, LLC.
Roperating conditions of system components,
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 e.g. fluid levels
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, individual components, e.g. number of wheel
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, revolutions/speed, deceleration in move-
DC 20590. ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal
You can also obtain other information about position
motor vehicle safety from Rmalfunctions and defects in important system
http://www.safercar.gov components, e.g. lights, brakes
Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in
special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-
ment, intervention of stability control sys-
Limited Warranty tems
! Follow the instructions in this manual about Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature
the proper operation of your vehicle as well as
about possible vehicle damage. Damage to
your vehicle that arises from culpable contra-
Data stored in the vehicle 33
This data is of an exclusively technical nature Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-
and can be used to: tions.
Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-
Introduction
tions and defects
Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci- Event data recorders
dent This vehicle is equipped with an event data
Roptimize vehicle functions recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
movements. an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor- crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-
mation can be read from the event data memory ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
and malfunction data memory. assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
Services include, for example: performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
Rrepair services for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
Rservice processes or less.
Rwarranties The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
Rquality assurance such data as:
The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser- RHow various systems in your vehicle were
vice network (including the manufacturer) using operating
special diagnostic testers. More detailed infor- RWhether or not the driver and passenger
mation is obtained from it, if required. safety belts were buckled/fastened
After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor- RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
mation is deleted from the malfunction memory accelerator and/or brake pedal and
or is continually overwritten. RHow fast the vehicle was traveling
When operating the vehicle, situations are con- These data can help provide a better under-
ceivable in which this technical data, in connec- standing of the circumstances in which crashes
tion with other information (if necessary, under and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded
consultation with an authorized expert), could by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situa-
be traced to a person. tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
Examples include: under normal driving conditions and no personal
Raccident reports data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location)
Rdamage to the vehicle
are recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement could combine the EDR data
Rwitness statements with the type of personally identifying data rou-
Further additional functions that have been con- tinely acquired during a crash investigation.
tractually agreed upon with the customer allow Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed
certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi- to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and
cle as well. The additional functions include, for special equipment is required. In addition to the
example, vehicle location in case of an emer- vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
gency. the special equipment, such as law enforce-
ment, can read the information by accessing the
vehicle or the EDR.
COMAND/mbrace EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-
ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or
dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's
Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-
data from the EDR is commercially available,
uations, and the location of the vehicle may be
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-
disclaims any and all liability arising from the
tem.
extraction of this information by unauthorized
For additional information please refer to the Mercedes-Benz personnel.
COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's
Z
34 Information on copyright
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius
without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if XM Radio Inc.
the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-
lessee. Exceptions to this representation
Introduction
uity Digital Corporation.

include responses to subpoenas by law enforce- RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
ment; by federal, state or local government; in
connection with or arising out of litigation involv- Gracenote, Inc.
ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-
as required by law. tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter-
ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-
tem Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
This means that in the event of such conflict, the
federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,
13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
Information on copyright
Free and open-source software
Information on license for free and open-source
software used in your vehicle can be found on
the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet
and, including updates, on the following web-
site:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Registered trademarks
Registered trademarks:
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG Inc.
RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg-
istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John-
son Controls.
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
RBurmester® is a registered trademark of
Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Cockpit 35
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Steering wheel paddle shift- H Electric parking brake 155
ers 145
I Diagnostics connection 31
; Combination switch 112
J Opens the hood 306
= Horn
K Light switch 111
? Instrument cluster 36
L Control panel for:
A DIRECT SELECT lever 141 Activating Steering Assist
B Climate control systems 123 and Stop&Go Pilot 169
Switching on Active Lane
C Overhead control panel 41 Keeping Assist 200
D Control panel for multimedia Deactivating PARKTRONIC 175
system and vehicle functions 38 Switching on the 360° cam-
era 187
E Ignition lock 132 Switching on the Head-up
Start/Stop button 133 Display 211
F Adjusts the steering wheel 104 Vehicles without a driver
assistance system: map/
G Cruise control lever 162 coin holder
36 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
At a glance

: Speedometer with segments 208 ! ABS malfunctioning 259
Warning and indicator lamps: ; Check Engine 263
% Diesel engine: preglow 134
å ESP® OFF 259
Electric parking brake
÷ ESP® 259 applied (red) 262
· Distance warning 265 F USA only
Ð Power steering assis- ! Canada only
tance malfunctioning 267
Brakes (red) 258
6 Restraint system 44
$ USA only
ü Seat belt not fastened 256
J Canada only
K High-beam headlamps 112
M SPORT handling mode
L Low-beam headlamps 112 (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 261
T Parking lamps 112
R Rear fog lamp 112 A Coolant temperature gauge 209
h Tire pressure monitor 266 Warning and indicator lamps:
? Coolant too hot/cold 263
; #! Turn signals 112
B Fuel level indicator
= Multifunction display 210 Warning and indicator lamps:
? Tachometer 209 8 Reserve fuel level with
Warning and indicator lamps: fuel filler flap location indica-
tor (right) 263
! Electric parking brake
(yellow) 262
i Information on displaying the outside tem- found under "Outside temperature display"
perature in the multifunction display can be (Y page 209).
Multifunction steering wheel 37
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
: Multifunction display 210 ? ò Opens the menu list
; Multimedia system display 9 : Selects a menu
a Confirms the selection
= ~ Rejects or ends a call % Back
6 Makes or accepts a call Operates the on-board com-
Further telephone functions 218 puter 209
W X Adjusts volume ñ Switches on voice-
8 Mute operated control for naviga-
ó Switches on voice- tion or the Voice Control Sys-
operated control for naviga- tem
tion or the Voice Control Sys-
tem
i Vehicles with Audio 20 multimedia sys- i Vehicles with COMAND multimedia sys-
tem: you can find further information tem: you can find further information
Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Ron the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual Operator's Manual
Ron voice-controlled navigation in the man- Ron the DVD changer or single DVD drive in
ufacturer's operating instructions the Digital Operator's Manual
Ron the Voice Control System in the sepa-
rate operating instructions
38 Center console
Center console
Center console, upper section
At a glance

: Climate control systems 123 B Õ Media button (see Dig-
ital Operator's Manual)
; £ Hazard warning lamps 113
C $ Radio button (see Digi-
= Ø Vehicle functions/ tal Operator's Manual)
system settings button (see
Digital Operator's Manual) D Ø Navigation button (see
Digital Operator's Manual)
? % Telephone button (see
Digital Operator's Manual) E þ Inserts or ejects a CD
or DVD (see Digital Opera-
A PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator's Manual)
tor lamps 44
ATA indicator lamp 76
Center console 39
Center console, lower section (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
At a glance
: Stowage compartment 278 B è ECO start/stop func-
Ashtray 292 tion 136
Cigarette lighter 292 C c Deactivates
Socket 293 PARKTRONIC 175
Cup holder 290 É Adjusts the vehicle
level (AIR BODY CONTROL) 173
; Adjusts the volume 269
Switches the sound on or off 269 D DYNAMIC SELECT switch 139
= Ü Switches the multime- E % Back button 269
dia system on/off 269
F Controller 269
? Touchpad 270
G g Favorites button 271
A Opens stowage compart-
ment with Media Interface 278
40 Center console
Center console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

At a glance

: Stowage compartment 278 C Touchpad 270
Ashtray 292 D å Activates/deactivates
Cigarette lighter 292 ESP® 71
Socket 293 M Activates/deactivates
Cup holder 290 SPORT handling mode 71
; Adjusts the volume 269 E AMG sports suspension
Switches the sound on or off 269 based on AIR BODY CON-
TROL 174
= Ü Switches the multime-
dia system on/off 269 F Manual gearshifting (perma-
nent setting) 145
? è ECO start/stop func-
tion 136 G DYNAMIC SELECT switch 139
A É Adjusts the vehicle H % Back button 269
level (AIR BODY CONTROL) 173
I Controller 269
B Opens stowage compart-
ment with Media Interface 278 J g Favorites button 271
Overhead control panel 41
Overhead control panel
At a glance
: p Switches the left-hand D Eyeglasses compartment 279
reading lamp on/off 115
E 3 Operates the pano-
; | Switches the automatic rama roof with power tilt/
interior lighting control sliding panel 94
on/off 115 Operates the roller sunblinds 95
= G SOS button (mbrace F Rear-view mirror
system) 296 Automatic anti-glare 108
? c Switches the front inte- G Buttons for the garage door
rior lighting on/off 115 opener 303
A u Switches the rear inte- H Microphone for mbrace sys-
rior lighting on/off 115 tem, telephone and the Voice
B p Switches the right- Control System, see the sep-
hand reading lamp on/off 115 arate operating instructions
C ï Info call button I F Breakdown assistance

(mbrace system) 298 call button (mbrace system) 297
42 Door control panel
Door control panel

At a glance

: r45= E 7Zª\
Stores settings for the seat, Adjusts and folds the exterior
exterior mirrors and steering mirrors out/in electrically 107
column 109
F W Opens/closes the right
; Adjusts the seats electrically 100 side window 90
= c Seat heating 102 G W Opens/closes the rear
right side window 90
? s Seat ventilation 103
H n Override feature for the
A Opens the door 83 controls in the rear compart-
B % & Unlocks/locks ment 64
the vehicle 83 I p Opens/closes the tail-
C W Opens/closes the rear gate 88
left side window 90
D W Opens/closes the left
side window 90
Occupant safety 43
Panic alarm As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the correct
driver's seat position (Y page 98).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed (Y page 48).
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag
increases the level of protection for vehicle
Safety
occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-
ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protection
offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags
are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only
the air bags that increase protection in that par-
ticular accident situation are deployed. How-
X To arm: press and hold the ! button : ever, seat belts and air bags generally do not
for approximately one second. protect against objects penetrating the vehicle
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the from the outside.
alarm system is armed. Information on restraint system operation can
X To disarm: press the ! button : again. be found under "Triggering of the Emergency
or Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 55).
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. For information on children traveling with you in
or the vehicle and on child restraint systems, see
X Press the Start/Stop button.
"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59).
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
Important safety notes
Occupant safety G WARNING
Introduction to the restraint system Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi- restraint system may then not perform its
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of intended protective function and may fail in an
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
The restraint system can also reduce the forces
to which vehicle occupants are subjected during This poses an increased risk of injury or even
an accident. fatal injury.
The restraint system comprises: Never modify parts of the restraint system.
Rseat belt system Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
Rair bags components or their software.
Rchild restraint system If it is necessary to modify components of the
Rchild seat securing systems restraint system to accommodate a person
The components of the restraint system work in with disabilities, contact an authorized
conjunction with each other. They can only Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only:
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all for further information contact our Customer
vehicle occupants: Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly (1‑800‑367‑6372).
(Y page 46)
Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
properly (Y page 98). driving aids which have been approved specifi-
cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Z
44 Occupant safety
Restraint system warning lamp The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
The functions of the restraint system are RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
checked after the ignition is switched on and at
onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
regular intervals while the engine is running.
off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in
front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
good time.
in the event of an accident.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is
passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
Safety
switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-

then not be deployed in the event of an acci-
onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-
dent.
nents of the restraint system are in operational
readiness. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
system warning lamp:
front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
on Depending on the person in the front-passenger
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the seat, the front-passenger front air bag must
engine running either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-
Rlights up again while the engine is running lowing points. You must make sure of this both
before and during a journey.
G WARNING
RChildren in a child restraint system:
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, whether the front-passenger front air bag is
restraint system components may be trig- enabled or deactivated depends on the instal-
gered unintentionally or may not deploy as led child restraint system, and the age and
intended during an accident. This can affect size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe
for example the Emergency Tensioning the notes on the "Occupant Classification
System (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Chil-
Device or the air bag. This poses an increased dren in the vehicle" (Y page 59). There you
risk of injury or even fatal injury. will also find instructions on rearward and
Have the restraint system checked and forward-facing child restraint systems on the
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as front-passenger seat.
soon as possible. RAll other persons: depending on the classi-
fication of the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-
bled or deactivated (Y page 51). Be sure to
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp observe the notes on "Seat
belts“ (Y page 44) and "Air bags"
(Y page 48). There you can also find infor-
mation on the correct seat position.
Seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occupants
in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling
over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and coming into contact with parts of the vehicle
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-
part of the Occupant Classification System thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
(OCS).
Occupant safety 45
occupant in the best position in relation to the injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
air bag. dent or when braking or changing direction
The seat belt system comprises: abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
RSeat belts or even fatal injury.
REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat belts
ting properly.
and the outer seat belts in the rear
Safety
If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet
G WARNING
quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt
retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac- The seat belt does not offer the intended level
ted any further. of protection if you have not moved the back-
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close ing or in the event of an accident, you could
against the body. However it does not pull the slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
vehicle occupant back in the direction of the abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
backrest.
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-
rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of injury.
an incorrectly fastened seat belt. Adjust the seat properly before beginning
When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the is in an almost vertical position and that the
vehicle occupant. shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are across the center of your shoulder.
synchronized with the front air bags, which
absorb part of the deceleration force. This can G WARNING
reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu-
pants during an accident. Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot
wear the seat belt correctly without an addi-
! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, tional and suitable restraint system. If the
do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle of
the front-passenger seat. This may otherwise seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-
lead to the triggering of the Emergency Ten- form its intended protective function. An
sioning Device in the event of an accident, incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
which will then need to be replaced. injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
dent or when braking or changing direction
Important safety notes abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems or even fatal injury.
is required by law in: For this reason, always secure persons under
Rall 50 states 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint
Rthe U.S. territories systems.
Rthe District of Columbia
If a child younger than twelve years old and
Rall Canadian provinces under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle vehicle:
occupants should correctly fasten their seat Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
belts before starting the journey. system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-
G WARNING cle. The child restraint system must be appro-
priate to the age, weight and size of the child
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot
Ralways observe the instructions and safety
perform its intended protective function. An notes on "Children in the vehicle"
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause (Y page 59) in addition to the child restraint
Z
46 Occupant safety
system manufacturer's installation and oper- Proper use of the seat belts
ating instructions
Ralways observe the instructions and safety
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
notes on the "Occupant classification system (Y page 45).
(OCS)" (Y page 51) All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat
belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also
G WARNING make sure that all vehicle occupants are always
The seat belts may not perform their intended wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle
is in motion.
protective function if:
Safety
When fastening the seat belt, always make sure

Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely that:
dirty, bleached or dyed Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or buckle belonging to that seat.
extremely dirty Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
anchorages or inertia reels have been modi- coat.
fied. Rthe seat belt is not twisted.
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, Only then can the forces which occur be dis-
tributed over the area of the belt.
although the damage may not be visible, e.g.
Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always
due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged
routed across the center of your shoulder.
seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.
The shoulder section of the belt must not
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices come into contact with your neck or be routed
could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy under your arm. Where possible, adjust the
when necessary. This poses an increased risk seat belt to the appropriate height.
of injury or even fatal injury. Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down as
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten- possible across your lap.
sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia The lap belt must always be routed across
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are your hip joints and not across your abdomen.
undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow- This applies particularly to pregnant women.
If necessary, push the lap belt down to your
ing an accident, have the seat belts checked hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder
immediately at a qualified specialist work- section of the belt.
shop. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-
ted or fragile objects.
Only use seat belts that have been approved for
If you have such items located on or in your
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store
AMG Performance seat: this seat is designed these in a suitable place.
for the standard three-point seat belt. If you Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time.
install another multi-point seat belt, e.g. sport or
racing seat belts, the restraint system cannot Infants and children must never travel sitting
provide the best level of protection. on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event
of an accident, they could be crushed
G WARNING between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.
If you feed seat belts through the opening in Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be the seat belt is also being used by one of the
vehicle's occupants.
damaged or may even break in the event of an
Also ensure that there are never objects
accident. This poses an increased risk of
between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.
injury or even fatal injury.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and
Only use the standard three-point seat belt. restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the
Never modify the seat belt system. "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-
gage or loads (Y page 278).
Occupant safety 47
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts Seat belt for the center rear seat
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded down
(Y page 45) and the notes on correct use of seat and back up again, the rear center seat belt may
belts (Y page 46). lock. The seat belt can then not be pulled out.
If the center rear seat belt is being used, also X To release the rear center seat belt: pull
observe the information about the seat belt for the seat belt out approximately 1 in (25 mm)
the center rear seat (Y page 47). at the belt outlet on the backrest and then
release it again.
Safety
The seat belt is retracted and released.
Releasing seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.
Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be
trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.
This could damage the door, the door trim
panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts
can no longer fulfill their protective function
and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-
Basic illustration cialist workshop.
X Adjust the seat (Y page 98). X Press the release button in the belt buckle,
The seat backrest must be in an almost hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt
upright position. back.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet
and engage belt tongue ; into belt Seat belt adjustment
buckle :.
The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
front-passenger seat may be tightened auto- the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This func-
matically, see "Belt adjustment" tion adjusts the driver's and front-passenger
(Y page 47). seat belt to the upper body of the occupants.
X If necessary, pull up on the shoulder section The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle and
body. Rthe ignition is switched on
The shoulder section of the seat belt must The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain
always be routed across the center of the shoul- retraction force if any slack is detected between
der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary. the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not
X To raise: slide the belt outlet up. hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust-
The belt outlet will engage in various posi- ing.
tions. You can activate and deactivate the seat-belt
X To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide adjustment function using the multimedia sys-
the belt outlet down. tem. Information on activating and deactivating
the seat-belt adjustment function can be found
X Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired
in the Digital Operator's Manual.
position and make sure that the belt outlet
engages.
Belt warning for the driver and front
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are passenger
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to
securely fasten child restraint systems in the The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
vehicle. Further information can be found under ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-
"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 59). pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up
continuously or flash. In addition, there may be
a warning tone.
Z
48 Occupant safety
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has deployed. This poses an increased risk of
already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn- injury or even fatal injury.
ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time the
engine is started. If, after six seconds, the driver To avoid hazardous situations, always make
or front-passenger seat belt has not been fas- sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,
belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driv-
er's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened including pregnant women
or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great-
belt warning lamp goes out.
Safety
est possible distance to the air bags

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the Rfollow the following instructions
engine is started, an additional warning tone will
sound. The warning tone switches off after six Always make sure that there are no objects
seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas- between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
tened. pants.
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front- RAdjust the seats properly before beginning
passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning your journey. Always make sure that the seat
tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with is in an almost upright position. The center of
increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the the head restraint must support the head at
driver or front passenger have fastened their about eye level.
seat belts. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn- tion must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.
ing is activated again. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.
RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-
Air bags ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against the
door or side window. You may otherwise be in
Introduction the deployment area of the air bags.
RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front
The installation point of an air bag can be rec-
ognized by the AIR BAG symbol. of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-
board, for example. Your feet may otherwise
An air bag complements the correctly fastened be in the deployment area of the air bag.
seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The
RFor this reason, always secure persons less
air bag provides additional protection in appli-
cable accident situations. than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-
tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The be worn correctly.
different air bag systems function independ-
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
ently from one another (Y page 55).
observe the following notes:
However, no system available today can com-
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities. RAlways secure children under twelve years of
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable
caused by an air bag due to the high speed at child restraint systems.
which the air bag must be deployed. RChild restraint systems should be installed on
the rear seats.
ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
G WARNING when the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
If you do not sit in the correct seat position, indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-
the air bag cannot protect as intended and
could even cause additional injury when
Occupant safety 49
passenger front air bag is deactivated eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-
(Y page 44). shop.
RAlways observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Children in the Front air bags
vehicle" (Y page 59) in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation ! Do not place heavy objects on the front-
and operating instructions. passenger seat. This could cause the system
to identify the seat as being occupied. In the
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent
event of an accident, the restraint systems on
Safety
an air bag from functioning correctly. Before the front-passenger side may be triggered
starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting and have to be replaced.
from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make
sure that:
Rthere are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air
bag.
Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar.
Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on
the grab handles or coat hooks.
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are
attached to the vehicle within the deployment
area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,
rear side trim or side walls. Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steer-
Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ;
the pockets of your clothing. Store such deploys in front of and above the glove box.
objects in a suitable place. When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-
G WARNING tional head and thorax protection for the occu-
pants in the front seats.
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer informs you about the status of the front-
function correctly. There is an increased risk passenger front air bag (Y page 44).
of injury. The front-passenger front air bag will only
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects deploy if:
to it. Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor
readings, detects that the front-passenger
G WARNING seat is occupied (Y page 51). The
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
Sensors to control the air bags are located in not lit (Y page 51)
the doors. Modifications or work not per- Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a
formed correctly to the doors or door panel- high accident severity
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
function of the sensors being impaired. The air
bags might therefore not function properly
anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot
protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door pan-
Z
50 Occupant safety
Driver's knee bag When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. However, it does
not protect the:
Rhead
Rneck
Rarms
In the event of a side impact, the side impact air
bag is deployed on the side on which the impact
occurs.
Safety
The side impact air bag on the front-passenger

side deploys under the following conditions:
Rthe OCS system detects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied or
Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the
column. The driver's knee bag is triggered
belt buckle of the front-passenger seat
together with the front air bag.
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,
The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh,
the side impact air bag on the front-passenger
knee and lower leg protection for the occupant
side deploys if an appropriate accident situation
in the driver's seat.
occurs. In this case, deployment is independent
of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
Side impact air bags or not.
G WARNING
Window curtain air bags
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-
vent deployment of the air bags integrated
into the seats. Consequently, the air bags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. In addition, the operation of
the occupant classification system (OCS)
could be adversely affected. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Window curtain air bags : are integrated into
the side of the roof frame and deployed in the
area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
When deployed, the window curtain air bag
enhances the level of protection for the head.
However, it does not protect the chest or arms.
In the event of a side impact, the window curtain
air bag is deployed on the side on which the
impact occurs.
If the system determines that they can offer
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be
Front side impact air bags : and rear side deployed in other accident situations
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bol- (Y page 55).
ster of the seat backrest.
Occupant safety 51
Occupant Classification System Occupant Classification System opera-

(OCS) tion (OCS)
Introduction
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-
egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.
Depending on that result, the front-passenger
front air bag is either enabled or deactivated.
Safety
The system does not deactivate:
Rthe side impact air bag
Rthe window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
Requirements : PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp

; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit: The indicator lamps inform you whether the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly
enabled.
Rin an almost upright position with their back
X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or
against the seat backrest
turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible
ignition lock.
If the front passenger does not observe these The system carries out self-diagnostics.
conditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-
tion, e.g. because the front passenger: The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simul-
Rtransfers their weight by supporting them- taneously for approximately six seconds.
selves on a vehicle armrest The indicator lamps display the status of the
Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised front-passenger front air bag.
from the seat cushion
RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
sure to observe the correct positioning of the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
child restraint system. Never place objects in the event of an accident.
under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a
RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
cushion. Fully retract the seat cushion length.
The entire base of the child restraint system passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
must always rest on the seat cushion of the then not be deployed in the event of an acci-
front-passenger seat. The backrest of the dent.
forward-facing child restraint system must lie as If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
flat as possible against the backrest of the front- off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
passenger seat. lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
The child restraint system must not touch the front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
roof or be subjected to a load by the head indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest If the status of the front-passenger front air bag
and the head restraint position accordingly. changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function display message appears in the instrument clus-
correctly. Always observe the child restraint sys- ter (Y page 237). When the front-passenger
tem manufacturer's installation and operating seat is occupied, always pay attention to the
instructions. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be
aware of the status of the front-passenger front
air bag both before and during the journey.
Z
52 Occupant safety
G WARNING G WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is restraint system on the front-passenger seat
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of and you position the front-passenger seat too
an accident and cannot perform its intended close to the dashboard, in the event of an
protective function. A person in the front- accident, the child could:
passenger seat could then, for example, come Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe- rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
Safety
cially if the person is sitting too close to the cator lamp is lit, for example
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of
Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
always ensure that:
fatal injury.
Rthe classification of the person in the front-
Always move the front-passenger seat as far
passenger seat is correct and the front- back as possible and fully retract the seat
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- cushion length. Always make sure that the
bled in accordance with the person in the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from
front-passenger seat the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved belt guide on the child restraint system. The
back as far back as possible. shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards
Rthe person is seated correctly. and downwards from the vehicle belt sash
Make sure, both before and during the jour- guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt
ney, that the status of the front-passenger sash guide and the front-passenger seat
front air bag is correct. accordingly. Always observe the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
G WARNING instructions.
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child If OCS determines that:
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag lights up after the system self-test and
may deploy in the event of an accident. The remains lit. This indicates that the front-
child could be struck by the air bag. This poses passenger front air bag is deactivated.
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a
Make sure that the front-passenger front air child of up to twelve months old, in a standard
bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the
BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. system self-test and remains lit. This indi-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp deactivated.
stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat. But even in the case of a twelve-month-old
You can find more information on OCS under child, in a standard child restraint system, the
"Problems with the Occupant Classification Sys- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can
tem" (Y page 54). go out after the system self-test. This indi-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
activated. The result of the classification is
dependent on, among other factors, the child
restraint system and the child's stature. It is
Occupant safety 53
recommended that you install the child System self-test

restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a per- G DANGER
son of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do
indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after
not light up during the system self-test, the
the system self-test depending on the result
of the classification or, alternatively, goes out. system is malfunctioning. The front-
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator passenger front air bag might be triggered
Safety
lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat unintentionally or might not be triggered at all
as far back as possible. Alternatively, a per- in the event of an accident with high deceler-
son of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat. ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator even fatal injury.
lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature In this case the front-passenger seat may not
should not use the front-passenger seat.
be used. Do not install a child restraint system
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an
on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-
adult or a person of adult stature, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp pant Classification System (OCS) checked
goes out after the system self-test. This indi- and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag is cialist workshop.
activated.
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to G WARNING
observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
(Y page 59).
lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the
When the occupant classification system (OCS)
is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will
warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the not be deployed in the event of an accident. In
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light this case, the front-passenger front air bag
up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air cannot perform its intended protective func-
bag is deactivated in this case and does not tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-
deploy during an accident. Have the Occupant passenger seat.
Classification System (OCS) checked and
repaired immediately at a qualified specialist That person could, for example, come into
workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if the person is sitting too close to the dash-
for this purpose. board. This poses an increased risk of injury or
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the even fatal injury.
seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
repair work carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that always ensure that:
you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Rthe classification of the person in the front-
for this purpose. passenger seat is correct and the front-
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
mends that you only use seat accessories that
bled in accordance with the person in the
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
front-passenger seat
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
mean that the front-passenger front air bag will Rthe person is seated properly with a cor-
also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys- rectly fastened seatbelt
tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front- Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
passenger seat. Depending on that result, the
as far back as possible
front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or
deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
Z
54 Occupant safety
passenger seat may not be used. Do not facing child restraint system must, as far as
install a child restraint system on the front- possible, be resting on the backrest of the
passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi- front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
cation System (OCS) checked and repaired child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
immediately at a qualified specialist work- lation instructions.
shop.
After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR
G WARNING BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lamp displays the status of the front-passenger
Safety
Objects between the seat surface and the front air bag (Y page 51). If the front-passenger
child restraint system could affect OCS oper- front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR
ation. This could result in the front-passenger BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds
air bag not functioning as intended during an and then goes out.
accident. This poses an increased risk of If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
injury or even fatal injury. off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
Do not place any objects between the seat front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
surface and the child restraint system. The indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
entire base of the child restraint system must For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-
always rest on the seat cushion of the front- lems with the Occupant Classification System"
passenger seat. The backrest of the forward- (Y page 54).
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 53).
Occupant safety 55
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-
BAG OFF indicator lamp rect.
lights up and remains lit, X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person
even though the front- on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 51).
passenger seat is occu-
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-
pied by an adult or a per-
passenger seat may not be used.
son of a stature corre-
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Safety
sponding to that of an
adult. Benz Center.
The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning.

BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child
does not light up and/or seat.
does not stay on.
X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on
The front-passenger seat the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
is: forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible
Runoccupied against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,
Roccupied with the adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
weight of a child up to X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.
twelve months old in a X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat
child restraint system belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger
seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child
restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child
restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-
ingly.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the
seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or
the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install
a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recom-
mended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear
seat.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning G WARNING

Devices and air bags A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-
tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
tection in an accident. There is an increased
G WARNING risk of injury.
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-
been deployed. There is a risk of injury. ist workshop in order to have a deployed air
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a bag replaced.
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-
It is important for your safety and that of your
cialist workshop as soon as possible. passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
Z
56 Occupant safety
and to have any malfunctioning air bags An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags triggered, if:
continue to perform their protective function for Rthe ignition is switched on
the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.
Rthe components of the restraint system are
G WARNING operational. You can find further information
Emergency Tensioning Devices that have under: "Restraint system warning lamp"
(Y page 44)
deployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera-
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in
tional and are unable to perform their inten- the belt buckle of the respective front seat
Safety
ded protective function. This poses an

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. compartment are triggered independently of the
Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency lock status of the seat belts.
Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a If the restraint system control unit detects a
qualified specialist workshop. more severe accident, further components of
the restraint system are activated independ-
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trig- ently of each other in certain frontal collision
ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations:
situations. This procedure is reversible. RFront air bags and driver's knee bag
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered RWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter-
or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, mines that deployment can offer additional
and a small amount of powder may also be protection to that provided by the seat belt
released. The 6 restraint system warning The front-passenger front air bag is activated or
lamp lights up. deactivated depending on the person on the
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear- front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front
ing. The powder that is released generally does air bag can only deploy in an accident if the
not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
short-term breathing difficulties in people with Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR
asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided BAG indicator lamps (Y page 44).
it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During
immediately or open the window in order to pre- the first deployment stage, the front air bag is
vent breathing difficulties. filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with
Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, the maximum amount of propellant gas if a sec-
which may require special handling and regard ond deployment threshold is reached within a
for the environment. National guidelines must few milliseconds.
be observed during disposal. In California, see The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ sioning Devices and the air bag are determined
Perchlorate/index.cfm. by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or
acceleration which occurs at various points in
Method of operation the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in
nature. Deployment should take place in good
During the first stage of a collision, the restraint time at the start of the collision.
system control unit evaluates important physi- The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration
cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel- and the direction of the force are essentially
eration, such as: determined by:
Rduration Rthe distribution of forces during the collision
Rdirection Rthe collision angle
Rintensity Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle
Based on the evaluation of this data, the Rthe characteristics of the object with which
restraint system control unit triggers the Emer- the vehicle has collided
gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or
Factors which can only be seen and measured
rear collision.
after a collision has occurred do not play a deci-
Occupant safety 57
sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do How the air bag system works is determined
they provide an indication of air bag deploy- by the severity of the accident detected,
ment. especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-
The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with- eration and the apparent type of accident:
out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if RFrontal collision
only parts which are relatively easily deformed RSide impact
are affected and the rate of deceleration is not
RRollover
high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even
though the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-
Safety
tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigid
vehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem- PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs protection system)
as a result.
If the restraint system control unit detects a side Introduction
impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable
components of the restraint system are activa- In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®
ted independently of each other depending on takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehi-
the apparent type of accident. cle occupants.
RSide impact air bags on the side where the
impact takes place, independently of the Important safety notes
Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of
the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer ! Make sure that there are no objects in the
seats in the second row footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger
that the seats and/or objects could be dam-
The side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side deploys under the following aged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.
conditions: Despite your vehicle being equipped with the
- the OCS system detects that the front- PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of personal
passenger seat is occupied or injuries occurring as a result of an accident can-
- the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in not be eliminated. Always adapt your driving
the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat style to suit the prevailing road and weather
conditions and maintain a safe distance from
RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact,
the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
independently of the use of the seat belt and
independently of whether the front-
passenger seat is occupied Function
RFront Emergency Tensioning Devices, if the
PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
system determines that deployment can offer
additional protection for the vehicle occu- Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when
pants in this situation BAS is activated
RRear Emergency Tensioning Devices in cer- Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physi-
tain situations if the vehicle rolls over cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under-
RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and
steers or oversteers severely
front-passenger side in certain situations Rvehicles with the Driving Assistance package:
when the vehicle rolls over, if the system when a driver assistance system intervenes
determines that deployment can offer addi- powerfully or the radar sensor system detects
tional protection to that provided by the seat an imminent danger of collision in certain sit-
belt uations
i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.
The different air bag systems work independ-
ently of each other.
Z
58 Occupant safety
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures Assist, PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply the
depending on the hazardous situation detected: brakes.
Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows and the Function
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situa-
are closed.
tions if the radar sensor system detects an
Rvehicles with the memory function for the imminent head-on or rear-end collision.
front-passenger seat: the front-passenger
seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable posi- PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measures
Safety
tion. depending on the hazardous situation detected:

If the hazardous situation passes without result- Rif the radar sensor system detects that a
ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts
pre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® are pre-tensioned.
can then be reversed. Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear-
end collision is imminent:
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:
- the brake pressure is increased if the driver
X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly applies the brakes when the vehicle is sta-
when the vehicle is stationary. tionary.
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and - the seat belts are pre-tensioned.
the locking mechanism is released.
The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is can-
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of celed:
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Informa-
tion about the convenience function can be Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a
found under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 47). gear is engaged
Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer
detected
Rif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention to
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu-
pull away
pant protection system PLUS)
If the hazardous situation passes without result-
Introduction ing in an accident, the original settings are
restored.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles
with the Driving Assistance package.
Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® Automatic measures after an acci-
PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end dent
collision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit-
uations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptive Immediately after an accident, the following
measures to protect the vehicle occupants. measures are implemented, depending on the
type and severity of the impact:
Important safety notes Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated
Rthe emergency lighting is activated
The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannot Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked
prevent an imminent collision.
Rthe front side windows are lowered
The driver is not warned about the intervention
Rvehicles with a memory function: the electri-
of PRE-SAFE® PLUS.
cally adjustable steering wheel is raised
PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene: Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply
Rif the vehicle is backing up is cut off
Rwhen the vehicle is towing a trailer and there Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency
is a risk of a rear-end collision call
When driving, or when parking or exiting a park-
ing space with assistance from Active Parking
Children in the vehicle 59
Children in the vehicle dren may burn themselves on these parts,

particularly on the metal parts of the child
Important safety notes restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
Accident statistics show that children secured If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
in the rear seats are safer than children secured you, always ensure that the child restraint
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
are generally better protected there. restraint system has been exposed to direct
Safety
If a child younger than twelve years old and sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the child in it. Never leave children unattended in
vehicle: the vehicle.
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
The child restraint system must be appropri- their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
ate to the age, weight and size of the child properly. Particular attention must be paid to
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
children.
notes in this section in addition to the child Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
restraint system manufacturer's installation (Y page 45) and the notes on correct use of seat
instructions belts (Y page 46).
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
notes on the "Occupant classification system proper seat belt positioning for children over
(OCS)" (Y page 51) 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a
three-point seat belt can be properly fastened
G WARNING without a booster seat.
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Special seat belt retractor
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the G WARNING
parking position P. If the seat belt is released while driving, the
Rstart the engine. child restraint system will no longer be
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a
an accident and injury. portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
be immediately refastened. There is an
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
G WARNING the special seat belt retractor and secure the
child restraint system properly.
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the retractor. When activated, the special seat belt
vehicle. retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot
slacken once the child seat is secured.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
Z
60 Children in the vehicle
Installing a child restraint system: always resting completely on the seat cush-
X Make sure you observe the child restraint ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under
system manufacturer's installation instruc- or behind the child restraint system. Only use
tions. child restraint systems with the original cover
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out- designed for them. Only replace damaged
let. covers with genuine covers.
X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
Activating the special seat belt retractor: G WARNING

Safety
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia If the child restraint system is installed incor-
reel retract it again. rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
While the seat belt is retracting, you should the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt sudden change in direction. The child
retractor is enabled.
restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
X Push the child restraint system down so that
the seat belt is tight and does not loosen. ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Removing the child restraint system and deac-
tivating the special seat belt retractor: Always install child restraint systems prop-
erly, even if they are not being used. Make
X Make sure you observe the child restraint
sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions. tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
X Press the release button of the seat belt
You will find further information on stowing
buckle and guide the seat belt tongue back objects, luggage and loads securely under
towards the belt sash guide. "Loading guidelines" (Y page 278).
The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
G WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
Child restraint system tems which have been damaged or subjected
The use of seat belts and infant and child to a load in an accident can no longer protect
restraint systems is required by law in: as intended. The child cannot then be
Rall 50 states
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or sudden changes of direction. There
Rthe U.S. territories
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
Rthe District of Columbia
fatal.
Rall Canadian provinces
Replace child restraint systems which have
You can obtain further information about the
correct child restraint system from any author- been damaged or subjected to a load in an
ized Mercedes-Benz Center. accident as soon as possible. Have the secur-
ing systems on the child restraint system
G WARNING checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
If the child restraint system is installed incor- before you install a child restraint system
rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as again.
intended. The child cannot then be restrained
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or Securing systems for child restraint systems
sudden changes of direction. There is an include:
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Rthe seat belt system
Make sure that you observe the child restraint Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
system manufacturer's installation instruc- RTop Tether anchorage points
tions and the notes on use. Please ensure, If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on
that the base of the child restraint system is the front-passenger's seat, be sure to observe
the instructions on “Occupant Classification

System (OCS)” (Y page 51). This includes infor-
mation on deactivating the front-passenger's air
bag.
All child restraint systems must meet the fol-
lowing standards:
RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
Safety
213 and 210.2
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer
of compliance with these standards can be
found on the instruction label on the child Vehicles with rear seat armrest: adjust the
restraint system. You will also find the state- rear seat armrest so that LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
ment in the instruction manual provided with the securing rings : for the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
child restraint system. child restraint system are accessible.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
rior and on the child restraint system. system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings :.
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur- specially designed child restraint systems on
ing system the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
G WARNING systems are installed on the left and right of the
rear seats.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also
do not offer sufficient protective effect for be used and can be installed using the vehicle's
children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs seat belt system. Install the child seat according
(22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt to the manufacturer's instructions.
integrated in the child restraint system. In the
event of an accident, a child might not be
restrained correctly. This poses an increased Top Tether
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Introduction
If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),
only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint Top Tether provides an additional connection
systems with which the child is also secured between the child restraint system secured with
with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.
This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.
child restraint system with the Top Tether If the child restraint system is equipped with a
belt, if available. Top Tether belt, this should always be used.
Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-
lation and operating instructions for the child Important safety notes
restraint system used.
G WARNING
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing could fold forwards in the event of an acci-
rings dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of
direction. As a result, child restraint systems
! When installing the child restraint system,
make sure that the seat belt for the middle cannot perform their intended protective
seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could function. Rear seat backrests that are not
otherwise be damaged. locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
Z
62 Children in the vehicle
in the event of an accident. This poses an X Hook Top Tether hook A into Top Tether
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. anchorage ? on the back of rear seat back-
rest ;.
Always lock rear seat backrests after instal- X Make sure that Top Tether belt B is not twis-
ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri- ted.
fication indicator. X Tension Top Tether belt B. Always comply
with the child restraint system manufactur-
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and er's installation instructions when doing so.
locked, this will be shown in the multifunction X Move head restraint : back down again
Safety
display in the instrument cluster.

slightly if necessary (Y page 101). Make sure
that you do not interfere with the correct rout-
Top Tether anchorages ing of Top Tether belt B.
Child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat
General notes
Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children secured
in the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-
Benz strongly advises that you install a child
restraint system on a rear seat.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
Top Tether anchorage points ? are located on restraint system on the front-passenger's seat,
the rear side of the rear seat backrests. be sure to observe the instructions and safety
X Move head restraint : upwards. notes on the "Occupant Classification System
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint (OCS)" (Y page 51).
system with Top Tether. Always comply with This will help to rule out any risks that may arise
the child restraint system manufacturer's due to:
installation instructions when doing so. Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-
passenger's seat
Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front-
passenger's front air bag
Ran unfavorable positioning of the child
restraint system, e.g. too near to the dash-
board
Rearward-facing child restraint system

Only secure a child on the front-passenger's
seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system
if the front-passenger front air bag has been
X Route Top Tether belt B under head deactivated. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG
restraint : between the two head restraint OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit
bars. (Y page 44) is the front-passenger's front air bag
X Guide Top Tether belt B down between cargo
deactivated.
compartment cover = and rear seat back- Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-
rest ;. lation and operating instructions for the child
restraint system.
Forward-facing child restraint system G WARNING

Always move the front-passenger's seat as far If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
back as possible if the child must be secured on cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
the front-passenger seat in a forward-facing
child restraint system. Fully retract the seat
cushion length. The base of the child restraint Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
system must always rest on the seat cushion of parking position P.
the front-passenger's seat. As much as possible
Rstart the engine.
of the backrest of the child restraint system
Safety
must be resting on the backrest of the front- In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
passenger's seat. The child restraint system ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
may not touch the roof or be subjected to a load an accident and injury.
by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the
seat backrest and the head restraint position When leaving the vehicle, always take the
accordingly. Always make sure the shoulder belt SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
is correctly secured, running from the belt outlet leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
to the belt guide of the child restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward G WARNING
and down from the vehicle belt outlet. Adjust the
belt outlet and front-passenger seat as required. If persons, particularly children are subjected
Always comply with the manufacturer's instal- to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
lation and operating instructions for the child cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
restraint system. fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Child-proof locks G WARNING

If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
G WARNING dren may burn themselves on these parts,
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they particularly on the metal parts of the child
could: restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
you, always ensure that the child restraint
or road users
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
traffic restraint system has been exposed to direct
Roperate vehicle equipment and become sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
trapped child in it. Never leave children unattended in
There is a risk of an accident and injury. the vehicle.
Always activate the child-proof locks and
override feature if children are traveling in the
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Override feature for:

Rthe rear doors (Y page 64)
Rthe rear side windows (Y page 64)
Z
64 Driving safety systems
Child-proof locks for the rear doors Pets in the vehicle
G WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
switches, for example.
As a result, they could:
Safety
Ractivate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example
Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
endangering other road users
You secure each door individually with the child- Unsecured animals could also be flung around
proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-
with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-
inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked,
the door can be opened from the outside. cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
and injury.
X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever
up in the direction of arrow :. Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are work- cle. Always secure animals properly during
ing properly. the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock port box.
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
Override feature for the rear side win- Driving safety systems
dows
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 65)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 65)
RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist (Brake
Assist System PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist)
(Y page 66)
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
(Y page 67)
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
X To enable/disable: press button ;.
(Y page 70)
If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear
side windows is disabled. Operation is only REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
possible using the switches in the driver's (Y page 73)
door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 73)
possible using the switches in the rear com- RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 73)
partment. RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 75)
Driving safety systems 65
Important safety notes tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-

If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are ding and accidents.
inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei- Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are
merely aids designed to assist driving. You are When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
responsible for maintaining the distance to the including driving safety systems, will also
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in become inoperative. Observe the information
good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 259) and dis-
Safety
your driving style to suit the prevailing road and play messages which may be shown in the
weather conditions and maintain a safe distance instrument cluster (Y page 228).
from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
The driving safety systems described only work Braking
as effectively as possible when there is ade-
quate contact between the tires and the road X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
surface. Pay particular attention to the informa- brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-
tion regarding tires, recommended minimum uation is over.
tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires" X To make a full brake application: depress
section (Y page 336). the brake pedal with full force.
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. pulsing in the brake pedal.
Only in this way will the driving safety systems
described in this section work as effectively as The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
possible. of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a
reminder to take extra care while driving.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

BAS (Brake Assist System)
General information
General information
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that
the wheels do not lock when you brake. This BAS operates in emergency braking situations.
allows you to continue steering the vehicle when If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS
braking. automatically boosts the braking force, thus
shortening the stopping distance.
The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
on. It goes out when the engine is running. Important safety notes
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. tion (Y page 65).
ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you
only brake gently. G WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
Important safety notes in an emergency braking situation is
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- increased. There is a risk of an accident.
tion (Y page 65). In an emergency braking situation, depress
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
G WARNING
the wheels from locking.
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking charac-
teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-
ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
Z
Braking Important safety notes

X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until G WARNING
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify
objects and complex traffic situations.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. In such cases, BAS PLUS may:
Rintervene unnecessarily
Rnot intervene
Safety
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System

PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
General information uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and
reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS G WARNING
PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify peo-
assisted when braking.
ple, this is especially the case if they are mov-
i Pay attention to the important safety notes ing. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these
in the "Driving safety systems" section cases. There is a risk of an accident.
(Y page 65).
BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with the uation and be ready to brake.
Driving Assistance package.
For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the G WARNING
radar sensor system and the camera system
must be operational. BAS PLUS does not react:
With the help of a sensor system and a camera Rto small people, e.g. children
system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles: Rto animals
Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for an
Rto oncoming vehicles
extended period of time
Rwhen cornering
Rthat cross the path of your vehicle
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi- As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all
cle can be detected. critical situations. There is a risk of an acci-
BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typical dent.
characteristics such as the body contours and Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
posture of a person standing upright. uation and be ready to brake.
If the radar sensor system or the camera system
is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions are In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
restricted or no longer available. The brake sys- ognition can be impaired.
tem is still available with complete brake boost- Recognition by the radar sensor system is also
ing effect and BAS. impaired if:
i Observe the restrictions described in the Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
"Important safety notes" section covering the sensors
(Y page 66). Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph

Rvehicles quickly move into the radar sensor (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can react to:
system detection range Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,
Recognition by the camera system is also e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
impaired in the event of: Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle
Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Robstacles crossing your path, which move in
Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun the detection range of the sensors and are
being low in the sky recognized by them
Safety
Rdarkness i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak-
Ror if: ing force, preventative passenger protection
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simulta-
of the vehicle neously (Y page 57).
- the camera system no longer recognizes a X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
pedestrian as a person due to special cloth- emergency braking situation is over.
ing or other objects ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects
BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-
- the typical outline of a pedestrian is not tion as usual, if:
distinguishable from the background Ryou release the brake pedal.
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.
have the configuration and operation of the
radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow cle.
speeds where there is no visible damage to the Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
front of the vehicle. Ryou activate kickdown.
Following damage to the windshield, have the
configuration and operation of the camera sys-
tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS
Function
General information
To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the
brake force necessary if: i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
Ryou approach an obstacle, and tion (Y page 65).
RBAS PLUS has detected a danger of collision COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS consists
At speeds of more than20 mph(30 km/h): if of a distance warning function with an autono-
you depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is acti- mous braking function and Adaptive Brake
vated. The increase in brake pressure will be Assist.
carried out at the last possible moment. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help
At speeds of above20 mph(30 km/h): if you you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision
depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of
automatically increases the brake pressure to a such a collision.
degree suited to the traffic situation. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz- detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will
ardous situations with vehicles in front within a be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not
speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and react to the visual and audible collision warning,
155 mph (250 km/h). autonomous braking can be initiated in critical
situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a
critical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTION
ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you.
Z
Important safety notes G WARNING

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be The distance warning function does not react:
impaired if: Rto people or animals
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rto crossing traffic
Rthere is snow or heavy rain
Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rwhen cornering
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- Thus, the distance warning function cannot
Safety
ple in parking garages provide a warning in all critical situations.

Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a There is a risk of an accident.
motorbike Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
uation and be ready to brake.
Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COLLI-
SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system G WARNING
Observe the important safety notes in the
"Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 131). The distance warning function cannot always
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, clearly identify objects and complex traffic
have the configuration and operation of the situations.
radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist In such cases, the distance warning function
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow may:
speeds where there is no visible damage to the
front of the vehicle. Rgive an unnecessary warning
Rnot give a warning
Activating/deactivating There is a risk of an accident.
The COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
automatically active after switching on the igni- uation and do not rely solely on the distance
tion. warning function.
You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PRE-
VENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board com- Function
puter (Y page 220). When deactivated, the dis- Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph
tance warning function and the autonomous (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns
braking function are also deactivated. you if you are rapidly approaching a vehicle in
If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is front. An intermittent warning tone will then
deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the sound, and the · distance warning lamp will
assistance graphics display. light up in the instrument cluster.
X Brake immediately in order to increase the
Distance warning function distance from the vehicle in front.
or
General information X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
The distance warning function can help you to so.
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a
vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a Due to the nature of the system, particularly
collision. If the distance warning function complicated but non-critical driving conditions
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will may also cause the system to display a warning.
be warned visually and acoustically. With the help of the radar sensor system, the
distance warning function can detect obstacles
Important safety notes that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- ded period of time.
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 65). Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), the distance warning function can
also react to stationary obstacles, such as stop- been detected as such at least once over the
ped or parked vehicles. period of observation.
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
Autonomous braking function (70 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta-
tionary obstacles.
If the driver does not react to the distance warn- If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly
ing signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PRE- high braking force, preventative passenger pro-
VENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the
tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated
autonomous braking function.
simultaneously (Y page 57).
Safety
Vehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: the
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
autonomous braking function is available in the
following speed ranges: emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
R4–65 mph (7–105 km/h) for moving objects
The brakes will work normally again if:
R4–31 mph (7–50 km/h) for stationary objects
Ryou release the brake pedal.
Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the autono-
mous braking function is available in the follow- Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.
ing speed ranges: Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-
R4–124 mph (7–200 km/h) for moving objects

cle.
R4–31 mph (7–50 km/h) for stationary objects
Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly Important safety notes
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the Autonomous Braking Func-
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 65).
tion to intervene.
If the autonomous braking function requires a G WARNING
particularly high braking force, preventative Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) identify objects and complex traffic situa-
are activated simultaneously (Y page 57).
tions.
Adaptive Brake Assist In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:
Rintervene unnecessarily
General information Rnot intervene
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- There is a risk of an accident.
tion (Y page 65).
With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis-
tance warning signal can detect obstacles that uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
are in the path of your vehicle for an extended intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
period of time.
If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli- G WARNING
sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates the Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If
you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake Rto people or animals
Assist will automatically increase the braking Rto oncoming vehicles
force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. Rto crossing traffic
Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-
Rwhen cornering
tance in hazardous situations at speeds above
4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not
to assess the traffic situation. intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph risk of an accident.
(250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable of
reacting to moving objects that have already
uation and be ready to brake.
Z
Due to the nature of the system, particularly Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause Brake Assist to intervene. qualified specialist workshop.
If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up
malfunction in the radar sensor system, the
brake system remains available with full brake continuously, ESP® is deactivated.
boosting effect and BAS. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up contin-
uously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunc-
tion.
Safety
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Observe the information on warning lamps

(Y page 259) and display messages which may
General notes be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 228).
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Only use wheels with the recommended tire
tion (Y page 65). sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.
power transmission between the tires and the Characteristics of ESP®
road surface.
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from General information
the direction desired by the driver, one or more If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp goes out before
wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically
engine output is also modified to keep the vehi- active.
cle on the desired course within physical limits.
ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp
wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize flashes in the instrument cluster.
the vehicle during braking. If ESP® intervenes:
X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) stances.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 65). necessary when pulling away.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles road and weather conditions.
with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.
Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi- ECO start/stop function
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull The ECO start/stop function switches the
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for engine off automatically when the vehicle stops
example if the road surface is slippery on one moving. The engine starts automatically when
side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer- the driver wants to pull away again. ESP®
red to the wheel or wheels with traction. remains in its previously selected status, e.g. if
Traction control remains active, even if you ESP® was deactivated before the engine was
deactivate ESP®. automatically switched off.
Important safety notes Deactivating/activating ESP® (except

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)
tion (Y page 65).
G WARNING i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to tion (Y page 65).
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-
ing safety systems are deactivated. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
You can select between the following states of Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
ESP®:
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
RESP® is activated. start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the
RESP® is deactivated. instrument cluster flashes. In such situations,
ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®:
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
REngine torque is no longer limited and the
Safety
of skidding and an accident. drive wheels are able to spin.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- RTraction control is still activated.
bed in the following. RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer
available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow- with assistance from ESP®.
ing situations: RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it
Rwhen using snow chains activated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter-
Rin deep snow venes.
Ron sand or gravel RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it is
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP®
which provides better grip. intervenes.
RESP® still provides support when you brake
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
firmly.
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if
the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to Deactivating/activating ESP®
spin. (Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an Important safety notes
extended period with ESP® deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 65).
Deactivating/activating ESP® You can select between the following states of
ESP®:
RESP® is activated.
RSPORT handling mode is activated.
RESP® is deactivated.
G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is activated,
there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-
dents.
Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-
uations described in the following.
X To deactivate: press button :.
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the G WARNING
instrument cluster lights up.
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
X To activate: press button :.
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. of skidding and an accident.
Z
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- X To deactivate ESP®: press button : until
bed in the following. the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster.
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an The ÷ OFF message appears in the multi-
function display.
extended period with ESP® deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain. X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :.
In the following situations, it may be better to The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ON
message appears in the multifunction display.
Safety
ESP®:
Rwhen using snow chains Characteristics of activated SPORT han-
Rin deep snow dling mode
Ron sand or gravel If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or
Ron specially designated roads when the vehi- more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warn-
cle's own oversteering and understeering ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP®
characteristics are desired only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree.
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action When SPORT handling mode is activated:
which provides better grip.
RESP® only improves driving stability to a limi-
Driving in SPORT handling mode or without
ted degree.
ESP® requires an extremely qualified and expe-
rienced driver. RTraction control is still activated.
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations drive wheels are able to spin.
described above no longer apply. ESP® will RESP® still provides support when you brake
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if
firmly.
the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to
spin. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
Deactivating/activating ESP® If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the
instrument cluster does not flash. In such situa-
tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP®:
RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
drive wheels are able to spin.
RTraction control is still activated.
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer
available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly
with assistance from ESP®.
X To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it
press button :. activated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter-
The M SPORT handling mode warning venes.
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it is
SPORT handling mode message appears in also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP®
the multifunction display. intervenes.
X To deactivate SPORT handling mode: RESP® still provides support when you brake
briefly press button :. firmly.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
ESP® trailer stabilization EBD (electronic brake force distribu-

tion)
General information
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to General information
swerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP® EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting on the rear wheels to improve driving stability
the engine output until the vehicle/trailer com- while braking.
bination has stabilized.
Safety
Important safety notes Important safety notes
G WARNING i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
If road and weather conditions are poor, tion (Y page 65).
trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent G WARNING
the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity can
lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the
tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is risk of skidding and an accident.
a risk of an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
Always adapt your driving style to the prevail- to the different handling characteristics. Have
ing road and weather conditions. the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com-
bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize
the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing Observe information regarding indicator and
the brake firmly. warning lamps (Y page 259) as well as display
messages (Y page 230).
ESP® trailer stabilization is active above speeds
of approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).
ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP® ADAPTIVE BRAKE
is deactivated or malfunctioning.
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and
Crosswind Assist offers increased braking comfort. In addition to
the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has
General information the HOLD function (Y page 171) and hill start
assist (Y page 136).
Strong crosswind gusts can impair the ability of
your vehicle to drive straight ahead. The cross-
wind driving assistance function integrated in
ESP® noticeably reduces these impairments. PRE-SAFE® Brake
ESP® intervenes automatically according to the General information
direction and intensity of the crosswinds affect-
ing your vehicle. PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize the
ESP® intervenes with stabilizing braking to risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a
assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane. pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a
Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk
above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight of collision, you will be warned visually and
ahead or cornering gently. acoustically as well as by automatic braking.
i Pay attention to the important safety notes
Important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section
Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is (Y page 65).
switched off or deactivated because of a mal-
function. PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
with the Driving Assistance Plus package.
Z
For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, G WARNING

the radar sensor system and the camera system
must be switched on and be operational. PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-
With the help of the radar sensor system and the tify people, especially if they are moving. In
camera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot inter-
obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an vene. There is a risk of an accident.
extended period of time. Always pay particular attention to the traffic
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi- situation and be ready to brake, especially if
cle can be detected.
PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you.
Safety
PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians using

typical characteristics such as the body con- In order to maintain the appropriate distance to
tours and posture of a person standing upright. the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision,
i Observe the restrictions described in the you must apply the brakes yourself.
"Important safety notes" section G WARNING
(Y page 74).
PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:
Important safety notes Rto small people, e.g. children
Rto animals
G WARNING
PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi-
Rto crossing traffic
cle by a partial application of the brakes if a
danger of collision is detected. There may be Rwhen cornering
a collision unless you brake yourself. Even As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither
after subsequent full application of the brakes give warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-
a collision cannot always be avoided, partic- uations. There is a risk of an accident.
ularly when approaching at too high a speed. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
There is a risk of an accident. uation and be ready to brake.
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
take evasive action, provided it is safe to do In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
so. ognition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is also
In the event of a partial application of the brakes, impaired if:
the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
braking pressure. covering the sensors
G WARNING Rthere is interference by other radar sources
PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden- ple in parking garages
tify objects and complex traffic conditions. Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: motorbike
Rgive Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
an unnecessary warning and then
relative to the center of your vehicle
brake the vehicle
Recognition by the camera system is also
Rnot give a warning or intervene
impaired in the event of:
There is a risk of an accident. Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered
Always pay particular attention to the traffic Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun
situation and be ready to brake, especially if being low in the sky
PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
Rdarkness i If there is an increased risk of a collision,

Ror if: preventive passenger protection measures
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path (PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Y page 57).
of the vehicle If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front
- the camera system no longer recognizes a remains and you do not brake, take evasive
pedestrian as a person due to special cloth- action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle
ing or other objects may perform automatic emergency braking, up
- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects to the point of full brake application. Automatic
- the typical outline of a pedestrian is not emergency braking is not performed until imme-
Safety
distinguishable from the background diately prior to an imminent accident.
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-
have the configuration and operation of the SAFE® Brake at any time by:
radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow Ractivating kickdown.
speeds where there is no visible damage to the Rreleasing the brake pedal
front of the vehicle.
Following damage to the windshield, have the The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended
configuration and operation of the camera sys- automatically if:
tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.
Function Ran obstacle is no longer detected in front of
your vehicle.
X To activate/deactivate: activate or deacti-
vate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board com-
puter (Y page 221).
If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the
STEER CONTROL
æ symbol appears in the multifunction dis- General information
play.
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
this function warns you if you are rapidly noticeable steering force to the steering wheel
approaching a vehicle in front. An intermittent in the direction required for vehicle stabilization.
warning tone will then sound and the · dis- This steering assistance is provided in particular
tance warning lamp will light up in the instru- if:
ment cluster. Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a
X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. wet or slippery road surface when you brake
or Rthe vehicle begins to skid
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
so. Important safety notes
PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
automatically under the following conditions: tion (Y page 65).
Rthe driver and front passenger have their seat
No steering support is provided from STEER
belts fastened CONTROL, if:
Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately
RESP® is deactivated
4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)
At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph RESP® is malfunctioning
(70 km/h), PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect: Rthe steering is malfunctioning
Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted
e.g. stopped or parked vehicles further by the electrical power steering.
Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle
Z
76 Protection against theft
Protection against theft A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the

alarm system is armed and you open:
Immobilizer Ra door
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
being started without the correct SmartKey. Rthe tailgate
X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the Rthe hood
SmartKey from the ignition lock. X To stop the alarm with the SmartKey:
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-func- press the % or & button on the Smart-
Safety
tion or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off Key.

and open the driver's door. The alarm is stopped.
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. or
When leaving the vehicle, always take the X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone tion lock (Y page 133).
can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
left inside the vehicle. The alarm is stopped.
i The immobilizer is always deactivated when X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
you start the engine. grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey
In the event that the engine cannot be started must be outside the vehicle.
(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys- The alarm is stopped.
tem is not operational. Contact an authorized or
Mercedes-Benz Center or call X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). cle.
The alarm is stopped.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you close
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) the open door that triggered it, for example.
i If the alarm continues for more than
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-
tem automatically notifies the Customer
Assistance Center. This is done either by text
message or data connection.
The emergency call system sends a message
or establishes a data connection provided
that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service.
Rthe mbrace service has been activated
properly.
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
available.
KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system
is armed after approximately ten seconds.
X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart-
Key or KEYLESS-GO.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button.
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
SmartKey 77
SmartKey Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do

not keep the SmartKey in the cargo compart-
Important safety notes ment. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be
detected, e.g. when starting the engine using
G WARNING the Start/Stop button.
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, A brief radio connection between the vehicle
they could: and the SmartKey determines whether a valid
SmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other vehicle. This occurs, for example:
people or road users. Rwhen starting the engine
Rget out and disrupt traffic. Rwhile driving
Opening and closing

Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in Rwhen the external door handles are touched
motion if, for example, they: Rduring convenience closing

Rshifting the automatic transmission out of SmartKey functions
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
G WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
: & Locks the vehicle
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
; F Opens/closes the tailgate
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
= % Unlocks the vehicle
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
risk of an accident. X To unlock centrally: press % button.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Rthe vehicle is locked again.
Rprotection against theft is reactivated.
! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag- X To lock centrally: press the & button.
netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control
function could be affected. The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks the
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin- following components:
ity of powerful electrical installations. Rthe doors
Do not keep the SmartKey: Rthe tailgate
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone Rthe fuel filler flap
or another SmartKey. The turn signals flash once when unlocking and
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. three times when locking.
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
This can affect the functionality of the Smart- signal can be activated and deactivated via the
Key.
Z
78 SmartKey
multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's

Manual.
You will receive visual and acoustic locking con-
firmation if all components were able to be
locked.
When the locator lighting is activated via the
multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark
after the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey;
see the Digital Operator's Manual.
X To open the tailgate automatically from
outside the vehicle: press and hold the F
Opening and closing
button until the tailgate opens. X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-
X To close the tailgate automatically from face of the door handle.
outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is loca- X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :
ted in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle, or ;.
press the F button on the SmartKey. Make sure that you do not touch the inner
When the tailgate closes you can then release surface of the door handle.
the button.
X Convenience closing feature: touch
recessed sensor surface ; for an extended
period.
KEYLESS-GO Further information on the convenience clos-
ing feature (Y page 91).
General notes
X To unlock the tailgate: pull the tailgate han-
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by dle.
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-
Key in the vehicle (Y page 134).
Deactivating and activating
Locking/unlocking centrally If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an
extended period of time, you can deactivate the
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby
SmartKey with you. You can combine the func- conserving battery power. For the purposes of
tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven- activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be
tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using nearby.
KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the
X To deactivate: press the & button on the
& button on the SmartKey.
SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
The driver's door and the door at which the han- The battery check lamp (Y page 80) of the
dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up
must be outside the vehicle. When locking or once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance
X To activate: press any button on the Smart-
between the SmartKey and the corresponding
door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). Key.
A brief radio connection between the vehicle or
and the SmartKey determines whether a valid X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
SmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features
vehicle. This occurs, for example: are available again.
Rwhen starting the engine
Rwhile driving
Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Rwhen the external door handles are touched
Rduring convenience closing
SmartKey 79
KEYLESS-GO start function Mechanical key

General notes General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart- unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
Key in the vehicle (Y page 134). use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-
Changing the settings of the locking tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
system (Y page 76).
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
You can change the settings of the locking sys-
Opening and closing

key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-
tem. This means that only the driver's door and matically.
the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle
X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel
alone. SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X To change the setting: press and hold down
the % and & buttons simultaneously Removing the mechanical key
for approximately six seconds until the bat-
tery check lamp (Y page 80) flashes twice.
If the setting of the locking system is changed
within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
Rlocks or
Runlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
X To unlock: press the % button once.
X To unlock centrally: press the % button
twice.
X To lock: press the & button. X Push release catch : in the direction of the
X To restore the factory settings: press and arrow and at the same time remove mechan-
hold the % and & buttons simultane- ical key ; from the SmartKey.
ously for approximately six seconds until the For further information about:
battery check lamp (Y page 80) flashes
RLocking/unlocking the driver's door
twice.
(Y page 84)
The KEYLESS-GO functions can be changed as RUnlocking the tailgate (Y page 89)
follows:
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner Inserting the mechanical key
surface of the door handle on the driver's
door. X Push mechanical key ; completely into the
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface
SmartKey until it engages and release
catch : is back in its basic position.
of the door handle on the front-passenger
door or the rear door.
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
Z
80 SmartKey
SmartKey battery Checking the battery

G WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
Opening and closing
immediately.
X Press the & or % button.
H Environmental note The battery is working properly if battery
Batteries contain dangerous check lamp : lights up briefly.
substances. It is against the The battery is discharged if battery check
law to dispose of them with lamp : does not light up briefly.
the household rubbish. They X Change the battery (Y page 80).
must be collected separately If the SmartKey battery is checked within the
and recycled to protect the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing
environment. the & or % button:
Dispose of batteries in an Rlocks or
environmentally friendly Runlocks the vehicle
manner. Take discharged i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-
batteries to a qualified specialist workshop.
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat- Replacing the battery
teries.
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
material, which may require special handling (Y page 79).
and regard for the environment. National guide-
lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-
ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
batteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey

opening in the direction of the arrow until bat-
tery compartment cover : opens. Do not
hold battery compartment cover : closed
while doing so.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.
SmartKey 81
X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment

cover : into the housing first and then press
to close it.
X Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
(Y page 79).
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on
the vehicle.
Opening and closing

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to
do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
Problems with the SmartKey

You can no longer lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle using X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
the SmartKey. (Y page 80).
If this does not work:
X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

The SmartKey is faulty.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock or KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.

unlock the vehicle using X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 78).
KEYLESS-GO.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 80).

Z
82 SmartKey

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
SmartKey.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-
trol function:
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
Opening and closing
workshop.
The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the Smart- X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
Key. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 327).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 328).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked.

started using the Start/ X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
Stop button. The Smart-
Key is in the vehicle. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 80).
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
You have lost a Smart- X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
Key. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors 83
Doors X To unlock and open a front door: pull door

handle ;.
Important safety notes If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up.
The door is unlocked and opens.
G WARNING X To unlock a rear door: pull rear door handle.
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, The locking knob on the rear door pops up and
they could: the rear door unlocks.
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other X To open a rear door: pull rear door handle
people or road users. again.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
The rear door opens.
Opening and closing

Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in Centrally locking and unlocking the
motion if, for example, they: vehicle from the inside
Rrelease the parking brake. You can centrally lock and unlock the vehicle
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of from the inside. The switches are on the driver’s
park position P door.
RStart the engine.
reach of children.
Unlocking and opening doors from

the inside X To unlock: press button :.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle X To lock: press button ;.
even if it has been locked. You can only open the When the front-passenger door is closed, the
rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not vehicle is locked.
secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 64). If Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked
the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or unlocked.
or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the
Switch off the alarm (Y page 76). inside if the vehicle has been locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey
or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 76).
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the
previous unlock status of the vehicle will be
taken into consideration if:
Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but-
ton for the central locking, or
Rlocked automatically
Z
84 Cargo compartment
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-

ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked, only the
door which has been opened from the inside is
unlocked.
Automatic locking feature

Opening and closing
X Insert the mechanical key into opening : in

the protective cap.
X Pull and hold the door handle.
X Pull the protective cap on the mechanical key
as straight as possible away from the vehicle
until it releases.
X Release the door handle.
X To deactivate: press and hold button : for

approximately five seconds until a tone
sounds.
X To activate: press and hold button ; for
approximately five seconds until a tone
sounds.
If you press one of the two buttons and do not
hear a tone, the relevant setting has already
been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-
ing. X To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise as
You could therefore be locked out if: far as it will go to position 1.
X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-
Rthe vehicle is being pushed.
clockwise as far as it will go to position 1.
Rthe vehicle is being towed.
Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-
You can activate and deactivate the automatic tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
locking mechanism via the multimedia system (Y page 76).
(see the Digital Operator's Manual).
Cargo compartment
Locking/unlocking the driver's door
with the mechanical key Important safety notes
i If you want to centrally lock the vehicle using G WARNING
the mechanical key, begin by pressing the
locking button for the interior locking mech- Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
anism while the driver's door is open. Then gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
lock the driver's door using the mechanical is open when the engine is running, particu-
key. larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
Cargo compartment 85
could enter the passenger compartment. G WARNING

There is a risk of poisoning. The reversing feature does not respond:
Turn off the engine before opening the tail- Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
Rover the last Ó in (8 mm) of the closing
movement
G WARNING
The reversing feature cannot prevent some-
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
one from becoming trapped in these situa-
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
tions in particular. There is a risk of injury.
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
Opening and closing

larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
den change in direction. If somebody becomes trapped:
Always store objects so that they cannot be Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or Rpull or press the remote operating switch
loads against slipping or tipping before the on the driver's door or
journey.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear tailgate or

when opened. Therefore, make sure that Rpull the handle on the tailgate
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be It is also possible to stop the closing process by
found in the "Vehicle data" section performing a kicking movement under the rear
(Y page 370). bumper.
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate
(Y page 89).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com- Opening and closing manually
partment. You could otherwise lock yourself
out. Opening
You should preferably place luggage or loads in
the cargo compartment. Observe the loading
guidelines (Y page 278).
Tailgate obstruction detection with

reversing feature
Vehicles with remote tailgate closing:
The tailgate is equipped with automatic obstruc-
tion detection with reversing feature. If a solid
object blocks or restricts the tailgate when auto-
matically opening, this procedure is stopped. If a X Press the F button on the SmartKey.
solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate when
automatically closing, the tailgate automatically or
opens again slightly. The automatic obstruction X Pull handle :.
detection with reversing feature is only an aid. It The tailgate opens.
is not a substitute for your attentiveness when
opening and closing the tailgate.
Z
Closing Use one of the following options to stop the

closing process:
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
Rpull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
tailgate.
Rpull the handle on the tailgate
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:

Opening and closing
It is also possible to stop the closing process by

performing a kicking movement under the rear
X Pull the tailgate down using recesses : and bumper.
push it closed.
X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the & ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO when opened. Therefore, make sure that
(Y page 78). there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is
Opening/closing automatically from opening or closing.
outside The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
Important safety notes (Y page 370).
G WARNING Opening automatically

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust You can open the tailgate automatically with the
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate.
is open when the engine is running, particu- X Press and hold the F button on the Smart-
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes Key until the tailgate opens.
could enter the passenger compartment. or
There is a risk of poisoning. X If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handle and
Turn off the engine before opening the tail- let it go again immediately.
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open. or
X With the tailgate stopped in an intermediate
G WARNING position, pull the tailgate up.
Parts of the body could become trapped dur- You can release the tailgate as soon as the
tailgate starts to open.
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More-
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
the closing area or may enter the closing area
during the closing process. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Closing automatically HANDS-FREE ACCESS

General notes
With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS,
you can open or close the tailgate or stop the
procedure without using your hands. This is use-
ful if you have your hands full. To do this, make
a kicking movement under the bumper with your
foot.
Observe the following points:
RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your per-
Opening and closing

son. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear
detection range of the vehicle.
: Closing button
RWhen making the kicking movement, make
; Locking button
sure that you are standing firmly on the
X Press closing button : in the tailgate. ground and that there is sufficient clearance
or to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise
X Pull the tailgate down slightly. lose your balance, for example on ice.
You can release the tailgate as soon as the
tailgate starts to close.
When the driver's door is closed, you can simul-
taneously close the tailgate and lock the vehicle.
The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detec-
tion range of the vehicle.
X Press locking button ; in the tailgate.
If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey outside
the vehicle, the tailgate closes. The vehicle is
locked.
or
X Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate and RAlways ensure that you only make the kicking
KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start func- movement within the detection range of sen-
tion: if the SmartKey is located in the imme- sors :.
diate vicinity of the vehicle, press the F RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
button on the SmartKey. rear area while doing so.
You can release the button as soon as the
RDo not come into contact with the bumper
tailgate starts to close.
while making the kicking movement. Other-
If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the cargo wise, the sensors may not function correctly.
compartment, the tailgate is unlocked again RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function
after closing. when the engine is started.
If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey out- RDirt caused by road salt or snow around sen-
side the vehicle, the tailgate remains locked. sors : may restrict functionality.
If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the cargo Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a pros-
compartment before the closing procedure thetic leg may restrict functionality.
starts, the tailgate remains open.
RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detec-
tion range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-FREE
ACCESS could be triggered. The tailgate
Z
could thus be opened or closed unintention- X To open or close: kick into sensor detection
ally, for example, if you: range : under the bumper with your foot.
- install or remove the ball coupling. Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is
- couple or uncouple a trailer. opening or closing.
- install or remove a rear-mounted bicycle X If the tailgate does not open or close after
rack. several attempts: wait at least ten seconds
- load/unload bicycles on/from a rear- then kick under the bumper once again.
mounted bicycle rack. If you hold your foot under the bumper for too
- sit on the edge of the cargo compartment. long, the tailgate does not open or close. Repeat
- set something down or lift something up the leg movement more quickly if this occurs.
behind the vehicle. To stop the opening or closing procedure, you
Opening and closing
- polish the rear of the vehicle. have the following options:

Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your RKick with your foot into sensor detection
person in these situations or in situations sim- range : under the bumper.
ilar to these. This will prevent unintentional RPull the handle on the outside of the tailgate.
opening or closing of the tailgate. RPress the closing button on the tailgate.
RPress the F button on the SmartKey
If the tailgate closing procedure has been stop-
G WARNING ped:
The vehicle's exhaust system may be very hot. RMove your foot under the bumper again and
You could burn yourself by touching the the tailgate will open.
exhaust system if you use HANDS-FREE If the tailgate opening procedure has been stop-
ped:
ACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Always
ensure that you only make the kicking move- RKick with your foot under the bumper again
ment within the detection range of sensors. and the tailgate will close.
! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection

range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa- Opening/closing automatically from
tions, for example, could lead to the uninten- inside
tional opening of the tailgate:
Rusing a car wash
Rusing a power washer G WARNING
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
(3 m) away from the vehicle.
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running, particu-
Operation larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
could enter the passenger compartment.
There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tail-
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. In addi-
tion, people may be standing in the closing
area or may enter the closing area, e.g. chil-
dren, during the closing procedure. There is a Limiting the opening angle of the tail-
risk of injury. gate
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
General notes
closing area during the closing process.
Release the remote operating switch imme- ! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to
diately if somebody becomes trapped. To reopen the tailgate fully when setting the open-
open the tailgate pull on the remote operating ing angle. The tailgate could otherwise be
damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle out-
switch.
side.
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate.
It is also possible to stop the closing process by This is possible in the top half of its opening
Opening and closing

performing a kicking movement under the rear range, up to approximately 8 in (20 cm) before
bumper. the stop.
To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped
when opened. Therefore, make sure that automatically. This does not delete the stored
there is sufficient clearance above and behind position.
the tailgate.
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is Activating
opening or closing.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the
found in the "Vehicle data" section tailgate.
(Y page 370). X To stop the opening procedure at the
desired position: press the closing button in
Opening and closing the tailgate or pull the handle on the outside
of the tailgate again.
X To store the position: press and hold the
closing button in the tailgate until you hear a
short tone.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The
tailgate will now stop in the stored position
when opening.
Deactivating
X Press and hold the closing button on the tail-
gate until two short tones sound.
X To open: pull remote operating switch : for

the tailgate until the tailgate opens. Unlocking the tailgate using the
X To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1 or mechanical key
2 in the ignition lock.
X Press and hold remote operating switch for General notes
tailgate : until the tailgate is completely
closed. Use the mechanical key if the tailgate can no
longer be unlocked:
When the vehicle is stationary, you can close the
Rusing the SmartKey
tailgate from the driver's seat. When the vehicle
is also unlocked, you can also open the tailgate Rusing HANDS-FREE ACCESS
from inside. Rusing the remote operating switch on the door
control panel
Z
90 Side windows
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear becomes trapped, release the switch or press
when opened. Therefore, make sure that the switch to open the side window again.
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
G WARNING
Unlocking If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
Opening and closing
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the

vehicle.
Side window reversing feature

The side windows are equipped with an auto-
X Remove cargo compartment cover matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
(Y page 285). or restricts a side window from traveling
X Fold the rear seat backrest forward upwards during the automatic closing process,
(Y page 281). the side window opens again automatically. Dur-
X Insert mechanical key ; into opening : in
ing the manual closing process, the side window
the paneling and push it in. only opens again automatically after the corre-
sponding switch is released. The automatic
X Open the tailgate.
reversing feature is only an aid and is no substi-
When you lock the vehicle, the cargo compart- tute for your attention when closing a side win-
ment is also locked again. dow.
G WARNING
Side windows The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
Important safety notes gers
G WARNING Rwhile resetting
While opening the side windows, body parts This means that the reversing feature cannot
could become trapped between the side win- prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
dow and the door frame as the side window uations. There is a risk of injury.
moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close
Make sure that nobody touches the side win- proximity during the closing procedure. If
dow during the opening procedure. If some- someone becomes trapped, press the switch
body becomes trapped, release the switch or to open the side window again.
pull the switch to close the side window again.
G WARNING Opening and closing the side win-

While closing the side windows, body parts in dows
the closing area could become trapped. There The switches for all side windows are located on
is a risk of injury. the driver's door. There is also a switch on each
When closing make sure that no parts of the door for the corresponding side window.
body are in the closing area. If somebody
Side windows 91
The switches on the driver's door take prece- Convenience opening

dence.
General notes
If the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehi-
cle, the convenience opening function is availa-
ble.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
start function: you can ventilate the vehicle
before you start driving.
To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out the
following functions simultaneously:
Opening and closing

Runlock the vehicle
Ropen the side windows
: Front left Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
; Front right ing panel and the roller sunblind
= Rear right Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's
? Rear left seat
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the The "convenience opening" feature is also avail-
ignition lock. able when the vehicle is unlocked.
X To open manually: press and hold the cor-
responding switch. Convenience opening
X To open fully: press the switch beyond the
pressure point and release it.
X Press and hold the % button on the Smart-
Automatic operation is started. Key until the side windows and the panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel are in the
X To close manually: pull the corresponding desired position.
switch and hold it. If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof
X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the
pressure point and release it. roller sunblinds are opened first.
Automatic operation is started. X Press and hold the % button again until the
X To interrupt automatic operation: press/ panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is
pull the corresponding switch again. in the desired position.
If you press the switch beyond the pressure X To interrupt convenience opening: release
point and release, automatic operation is star- the % button.
ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by pressing/pulling the
switch again. Convenience closing feature
You can continue to operate the side windows
after you switch off the engine or remove the Important safety notes
SmartKey. This function remains active for five
minutes or until you open a front door. G WARNING
When the override feature for the side windows When the convenience closing feature is oper-
is activated, the side windows cannot be operating, parts of the body could become trapped
ated from the rear (Y page 64).
in the closing area of the side window and the
Information on opening and closing the roller
sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
sunblinds on the rear side windows
(Y page 291). Observe the complete closing procedure
when the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating. Make sure that no body parts are in
close proximity during the closing procedure.
Z
92 Side windows
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the

start function: if the SmartKey is in close prox- door handle until the side windows and the
imity to the vehicle, the convenience closing panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
function is available. are fully closed.
When you lock the vehicle, you can simultane- Make sure you touch only recessed sensor
ously: surface :.
Rclose the side windows X Make sure that all the side windows and the
Rclose the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
ing panel are closed.
X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller door handle again until the roller sunblinds of
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
Opening and closing
sunblinds.
panel close.
Notes on the automatic reversing feature for:
X To interrupt convenience closing: release
Rthe side window (Y page 90) recessed sensor surface : on the door han-
Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding dle.
panel (Y page 94)
Using the SmartKey Resetting the side windows

X Press and hold the & button until the side If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
windows and the panorama roof with power you must reset it.
tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. X Close all the doors.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ignition lock.
are closed.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
X Press and hold the & button again until the control panel until the side window is com-
roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with pletely closed (Y page 90).
power tilt/sliding panel are closed. X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X To interrupt convenience closing: release If the side window opens again slightly:
the & button.
X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on
the door control panel until the side window is
Using KEYLESS-GO completely closed (Y page 90).
The driver's door and the door at which the han- X Hold the switch for an additional second.
dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey X If the respective side window remains closed
must be outside the vehicle. The gap between after the button is released, then it has been
the SmartKey and the corresponding door han- set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the
dle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). steps above.
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 93
Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
Opening and closing

A side window cannot be X Remove the objects.
closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
closed and you cannot slightly:
see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side windows are closed without the automatic reversing fea-
ture.
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding If somebody becomes trapped:

panel Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Important safety notes Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
In the following section, the term "sliding sun-
roof" refers to the panorama roof with power The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
tilt/sliding panel. ped.
G WARNING
G WARNING
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof,
If children operate the sliding sunroof they
body parts in close proximity could become
could become trapped, particularly if they are
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the opening and closing pro-
cedures.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Z
94 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
G WARNING Rduring resetting

At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto- Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man-
matically lowers slightly at the rear. This could ually immediately after automatic reversing
trap you or other persons. There is a risk of This means that the reversing feature cannot
injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the uations. There is a risk of injury.
vehicle is in motion. Make sure that no body parts are in close
If somebody becomes trapped, immediately proximity during the closing procedure.
pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The slid- If somebody becomes trapped:
ing sunroof lifts during opening.
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Opening and closing
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of Rpress the switch in any direction during the
snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may automatic closing process
occur.
The closing process is stopped.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be
damaged.
Operating the panorama roof with
! The weather can change abruptly. It could
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid- power tilt/sliding panel
ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi- Opening and closing
cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if
water enters the vehicle interior.
Resonance noises can occur in addition to the
usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is
open. They are caused by minor pressure fluc-
tuations in the vehicle interior. Change the posi-
tion of the sliding sunroof or open a side window
slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises.
Sliding sunroof reversing feature

In the following section, the term "sliding sun-
roof" refers to the panorama roof with power : To raise
tilt/sliding panel. ; To open
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto- = To close/lower
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
process, the sliding sunroof opens again auto- can only be operated when the roller sunblind is
matically. The automatic reversing feature is open.
only an aid and is no substitute for your attention X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
when closing the sliding roof. ignition lock.
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
G WARNING sponding direction.
The reversing feature does not react:
If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond the
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- pressure point, automatic operation is started in
gers the corresponding direction. You can stop auto-
matic operation by pressing or pulling again.
Rover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
movement panel is raised at the rear, it automatically low-
ers slightly at higher speeds. The noise level in
the vehicle interior is reduced as a result. At low Operating the roller sunblinds for the
speeds it raises again automatically. panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
You can also temporarily deactivate automatic panel
lowering. To do so, press the 3 switch. The
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel rai- Important safety notes
ses again automatically.
You can continue to operate the panorama roof G WARNING
with power tilt/sliding panel after you switch off Parts of the body could become trapped
the engine or remove the SmartKey. This func-
tion remains active for five minutes or until you between the roller sunblind and frame or slid-
open a front door. ing sunroof during automatic opening or clos-
When a roof carrier is mounted the panorama ing. There is a risk of injury.
Opening and closing

roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be When opening or closing, make sure that no
opened. The panorama roof with power tilt/slid- body parts are in the sweep of the roller sun-
ing panel can still be raised to allow ventilation blind.
of the vehicle interior. If the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel makes contact with a If somebody becomes trapped:
roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the Rrelease the switch immediately, or
sunroof will lower slightly but remain raised at
Rduring automatic operation, push the
the rear.
switch briefly in any direction
Rain-closing feature The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
ped.
The raised panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel automatically lowers when driving if it The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior
starts to rain. The sliding sunroof is lowered from sunlight. The roller sunblinds can only be
depending on: opened and closed when the panorama roof
Rthe road speed with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.
Rthe intensity of the rain
You can manually cancel the automatic closing Roller sunblind reversing feature
procedure. Press or pull the 3 switch in any
direction. The roller sunblinds are equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
To raise the panorama roof with power tilt/slid- or restricts a roller sunblind during the closing
ing panel again, press the 3 switch in direc- process, the roller sunblind opens again auto-
tion :. matically. However, the automatic reversing
The rain-closing feature is then deactivated until feature is only an aid and is not a substitute of
you: your attentiveness when closing the roller sun-
Rpress or pull the 3 switch in any direction blind.
or G WARNING
Rturn the SmartKey to another position in the
The reversing feature does not react in par-
ignition lock (Y page 132)
ticular to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers. This means that the reversing feature
cannot prevent someone being trapped in
these situations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
that no body parts are in the sweep area.
Z
96 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
If somebody becomes trapped: Resetting the panorama roof with

Rrelease the switch immediately, or power tilt/sliding panel or the front
roller sunblind
Rpress the switch in any direction during the
automatic closing process ! If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
The closing process is stopped. panel and the roller sunblinds cannot be fully
opened or closed after resetting, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
Opening and closing the roller sun-
blinds
Opening and closing
Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding

panel or the roller sunblinds if the panorama
: Opens roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the front
; Opens roller sunblind does not move smoothly.
= Closes X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
You can only close the roller sunblinds when the
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is
closed. resistance in the direction of arrow : until
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the panel is fully closed.
ignition lock. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional
X Press the 3 switch in direction :. second.
Both roller sunblinds open, then the pano- X Pull the 3 switch several times in the
rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is direction of arrow : until the roller sunblinds
raised. are closed.
X Pull the 3 switch in direction ;. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional
The sunblinds open. second.
X Pull the 3 switch in direction =. X Make sure that the panorama roof with power
The roller sunblinds close when the panorama tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds can
roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. be fully opened and closed again.
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above
If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond the
pressure point, automatic operation is started in again.
the corresponding direction. You can stop auto-
matic operation by pressing or pulling again.
Problems with the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel.
G WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding
sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts
of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process
Opening and closing

The closing process is stopped.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a
The panorama roof with If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed during
power tilt/sliding panel closing and reopens again slightly:
cannot be closed and X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
you cannot see the point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
cause. panel is closed.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed with more
force.
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed again
during closing and reopens again slightly:
X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is closed.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed without
the automatic reversing feature.
Z
98 Seats
Correct driver's seat position Ryou should have a good overview of traffic
conditions
Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body
G WARNING and is routed across the center of your shoul-
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do der and across your hips in the pelvic area
the following while driving: Further related subjects:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, RAdjusting the seats electrically (Y page 100).
steering wheel or mirrors RAdjusting the steering wheel mechanically
Rfasten the seat belt (Y page 104).
RAdjusting the steering wheel electrically
There is a risk of an accident. (Y page 105).
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 47).
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior
before starting the engine. mirrors (Y page 107).
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
RStoring the seat, steering wheel, exterior mir-

ror and head-up display settings with the
memory function (Y page 109).
Seats
G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
The seats can still be adjusted when there is no

Observe the following when adjusting steering SmartKey in the ignition lock.
wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =:
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as G WARNING
possible When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
cushion Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
can depress the pedals properly
Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
by the center of the head restraint (Y page 48) and "Children in the Vehicle"
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your (Y page 59).
arms slightly bent
G WARNING
Ryou can move your legs freely
Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument
If the head restraints are not installed or not
cluster clearly adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
Seats 99
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the G WARNING

event of an accident or when braking. The seat belt does not offer the intended level
Always drive with the head restraints instal- of protection if you have not moved the back-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
vehicle occupant that the center of the head ing or in the event of an accident, you could
restraint supports the back of the head at slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
about eye level. abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and injury.
rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the
height and angle of the head restraints cor- Adjust the seat properly before beginning
rectly. your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the is in an almost vertical position and that the
head restraint so that it is as close as possible to shoulder section of your seat belt is routed

your head. across the center of your shoulder.
G WARNING ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could heating, observe the following information:
move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
motion. This could cause you to lose control of liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. soon as possible.
Always make sure that the driver's seat is Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
engaged before starting the vehicle. switch on the seat heating. The seat heat-
ing should also not be used to dry the seats.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
G WARNING
see "Interior care".
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.
the following while driving: Do not place sharp objects on the seat
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The
steering wheel or mirrors seats should only be occupied by passen-
gers, if possible.
Rfasten the seat belt
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
There is a risk of an accident. not cover the seats with insulating materi-
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt child seats or booster seats.
before starting the engine. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell under or behind the seats when mov-
G WARNING ing the seats back. There is a risk that the
seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and i The rear-compartment head restraints can
thereby injured. Children in particular could be removed (Y page 102).
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust- For more information, contact a qualified spe-
ment buttons and become trapped. There is a cialist workshop.
risk of injury. i Related topic:
While moving the seats, make sure that your REASY-PACK Quickfold rear bench seat
hands or other body parts do not get under the (Y page 281)
lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-
tem.
Z
100 Seats
Adjusting the seats electrically = Seat cushion angle

? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Electrically adjustable seats with memory

function Electrically adjustable seats without mem-

: Head restraint height ory function
; Backrest angle : Seat cushion length
= Seat height X Lift lever : and slide the seat cushion
? Seat cushion length forward or back.
A Seat cushion angle X Release lever : again.
B Seat fore-and-aft adjustment The seat cushion engages.
i Further related subjects:

RYou can store the seat settings using the Adjusting the head restraints
memory function (Y page 109).
RIf PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front- Important safety notes
passenger seat will be moved to a better
position if it was previously in an unfavora- G WARNING
ble position (Y page 57). You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
RWhen the seat is moved forward or back, the following while driving:
the headrest is moved up or down auto-
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
matically.
steering wheel or mirrors
Vehicles with AMG Performance seat: the height
of the head restraints cannot be adjusted. Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Electrically adjustable seats without mem-
ory function Always drive with the head restraints instal-
: Backrest angle led. Before driving off, make sure for every
; Seat height vehicle occupant that the center of the head
Seats 101
restraint supports the back of the head at X To move forward: pull the head restraint
about eye level. forward in the direction of the arrow until it
engages in the desired position.
X To move back: press and hold the release
General notes catch :.
Pay attention to the important safety notes X Push the head restraint back.
(Y page 98). X Release the release button once the head
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and restraint is in the desired position.
rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the X Ensure that the head restraint has engaged
height and angle of the head restraints to the properly.
correct position. Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the
head restraint so that it is as close as possible to
Adjusting the head restraint height your head.
manually

Adjusting the height of the head
restraints electrically
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for the head restraint adjustment
(Y page 100) up or down in the direction of the
arrow.
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint

height
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the

desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : in the direc-
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
down to the desired position.
Adjusting the head restraint fore-and-

aft position manually
X Once the head restraint is fully lowered, press

release catch :.
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired height.
X To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
With this function you can adjust the distance

between the head restraint and the back of the
seat occupant's head.
Z
102 Seats
Installing and removing rear head

restraints
X Release the rear seat backrest and fold it
slightly forward (Y page 281).
X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the
stop.
X Press release catch : and pull the head
restraint out of the guides.
X To re-install: insert the head restraint so that
the notches on the bar are on the left when
viewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear it Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat cush-
engage in position. ion
To set narrower: press button :.
X Fold back the rear seat backrest until it X

engages. X To set wider: press button ;.
To adjust the side bolsters of the seat back-
rest
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
X To set narrower: press button =.
X To set wider: press button ?.
Adjusting the seat cushion length mechani-
cally
X Lift handle A and slide the seat cushion
forward or back.
X Release lever A again.
The seat cushion engages.
Switching the seat heating on/off

: Raises the backrest contour
Switching on/off
; Softens the backrest contour
= Lowers the backrest contour G WARNING
? Hardens the backrest contour
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
You can adjust the contour of the front seat cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
backrests individually to provide optimum sup- become very hot. The health of persons with
port for your back.
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to excessively high tempera-
tures may be affected or they may even suffer
Adjusting the AMG Performance Seat
burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
To adjust the contour of the seat and for Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
improved lateral support, you can individually
adjust the front seats. repeatedly.
Seats 103
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat

heating may switch off.
i If drive program E is selected, the power of
the seat heating is reduced.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Switching on/off
Front seats

The blue indicator lamps in the button indicate
the ventilation level you have selected.
Rear seats
ignition lock (Y page 132).
The three red indicator lamps in the button indi- X To switch on:press button : repeatedly
cate the heating level you have selected. until the desired ventilation level is set.
The system automatically switches down from X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight until all the indicator lamps go out.
minutes.
The system automatically switches down from i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten ventilation may switch off.
minutes.
i You can open the side windows and the slid-
The system automatically switches off approx- ing sunroof using the "Convenience opening"
imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. feature (Y page 91). The seat ventilation of
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the the driver's seat automatically switches to the
ignition lock (Y page 132). highest level.
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
i When the vehicle is stationary, the fan
until the desired heating level is set. speed can be reduced automatically. This
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly reduces the noises of the seat ventilation.
until all the indicator lamps go out.
Z
104 Steering wheel
Problems with the seat heating / seat ventilation

The seat heating or seat The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
ventilation has switched ers are switched on.
off prematurely or can- X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
not be switched on. rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat
ventilation can be switched back on manually.
Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel man-

ually
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine. : Release lever
; Adjusts the steering wheel height
G WARNING = Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-
and-aft adjustment)
Children could injure themselves if they
X Push release lever : down completely.
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
The steering column is unlocked.
injury.
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi-
When leaving the vehicle, always take the tion.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X Push release lever : up as far as it will go.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The steering column is locked.
X Check if the steering column is locked. When
The electrically adjustable steering wheel can doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or
still be adjusted when there is no key in the igni- down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft
tion lock. direction.
Steering wheel 105
Adjusting the steering wheel electri- Steering wheel heating

cally
Switching on/off

: Adjusts the steering wheel height
; Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
and-aft adjustment) tion lock (Y page 132).
X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc-
i Further related subjects:
tion of arrow : or ;.
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 105) Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
RStoring settings (Y page 109) If you switch off the ignition, the steering wheel
heating is deactivated.
Problems with the steering wheel heating

The steering wheel heat- The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
ing has switched off pre- ers are switched on.
maturely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
switched on. rear window defroster or interior lighting.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature You can stop the adjustment process by press-

ing one of the memory function's position but-
Important safety notes tons. This function is only available on vehicles
with memory function.
G WARNING
G WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
ture, they can become trapped, particularly
occupants – particularly children – could
when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the steering
wheel.
G WARNING
Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
there is a risk of entrapment by the steering
feature is making adjustments, you could lose
wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.
Z
106 Mirrors
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an i The steering wheel only returns to the last
accident. set position if the driving position is stored
after the seat or steering column has been
Always wait until the adjustment process is adjusted (Y page 109).
complete before driving off.
The most recent driving position of the steering
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in wheel is stored if:
and out of your vehicle easier. Rthe ignition is switched off
You can activate and deactivate the EASY- Rthe setting is stored using the memory func-
ENTRY/EXIT feature using the multimedia sys- tion (Y page 109)
tem (see the Digital Operator's Manual)
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
Position of the steering wheel when the
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active gered in an accident, the steering column will
The steering wheel swings up when you: move up when the driver's door is opened or the
SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. This
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the
Rwith KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start occupants.
function: open the driver's door; the voltage The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
supply must be switched on operational only if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-
Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver's door; ture is activated in the multimedia system (see
the SmartKey must be in position g or 1 in Digital Operator's Manual).
the ignition lock (Y page 132)
Ropen the driver's door when the ignition is
switched off Mirrors
i The steering wheel only tilts up if the driving Exterior mirrors
position is stored after the steering column
adjustment has been adjusted (Y page 109). Important safety notes
The most recent driving position of the steering
wheel is stored if: G WARNING
Rthe ignition is switched off You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
Rthe setting is stored using the memory func- the following while driving:
tion (Y page 109) Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
i The steering wheel only moves up if it has steering wheel or mirrors
not already reached the upper steering lim- Rfasten the seat belt
iter.
Position of the steering wheel for driv- Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
The steering wheel is moved to the last selected
position when:
G WARNING
Rthe driver's door is closed and you insert the
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
SmartKey into the ignition lock
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
Ryou close the driver's door when the ignition
is switched on objects are actually closer than they appear.
Ryou press the Start/Stop button once in vehi-
This means that you could misjudge the dis-
cles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
start function when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Mirrors 107
For this reason, always make sure of the Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
actual distance from the road users traveling electrically
behind by glancing over your shoulder.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors

X Briefly press :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
ignition lock (Y page 132). i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
X Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side: could otherwise vibrate.
press button ;.
Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press but- i If you are driving faster than 30 mph
ton =. (47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-
The indicator lamp lights up in the button that rior mirrors.
has been pressed.
The indicator lamp goes out again after some Resetting the exterior mirrors
time. You can adjust the selected exterior
mirror using button : as long as the indicator If the battery has been disconnected or com-
lamp is lit. pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be
reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not
X Press button : up, down, or to the left or
fold in if you have activated the Automatic
right until you have adjusted the exterior mir- Mirror Folding function in the multimedia
ror to the correct position. You should have a system.
good overview of traffic conditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field ignition lock (Y page 132).
of vision. X Briefly press :.
After the engine has been started, the exterior
mirrors are automatically heated if the rear win-
dow defroster is switched on and the outside Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
temperature is low. automatically
When the Automatic Mirror Folding func-
tion is activated in the multimedia system (see
Digital Operator's Manual):
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automati-
cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle.
i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually, they do not fold out.
Z
108 Mirrors
Exterior mirror pushed out of position RImmediately change out of clothing which
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of has come into contact with electrolyte.
position, proceed as follows: RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
X Vehicles without electrically folding exte- attention immediately.
rior mirrors: manually move the exterior mir-
ror into the correct position. The exterior mirror on the driver's side and the
X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior
rear-view mirror automatically go into anti-glare
mirrors: press and hold button : until you mode if:
hear a click and then the mirror engaging in Rthe ignition is switched on
position (Y page 107). Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-
The mirror housing is engaged again and you sor in the rear-view mirror
can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
(Y page 107). reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of is switched on.
position, proceed as follows:

X Press and hold button : until you hear a click
and the mirror engages audibly into position Parking position for the exterior mir-
(Y page 107). ror on the front-passenger side
The mirror housing is engaged again and you
can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual Storing the parking position
(Y page 107).
You can set the front-passenger side exterior
mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on
that side as soon as you engage reverse gear.
Automatic anti-glare mirrors You can store this position.
G WARNING Storing using reverse gear

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-
matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte
is harmful and causes irritation. It must not
come into contact with your skin, eyes, res-
piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
If you come into contact with the electrolyte,
observe the following:
RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin
immediately with water.
RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of
: Memory button M
your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
; Button for the exterior mirror setting
RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately
= Button for the front-passenger side exterior
rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not mirror
induce vomiting. ? Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your X Start the engine.
skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical X Press button =.
attention immediately.
Memory function 109
X Engage reverse gear. Memory function

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the preset parking position. Important safety notes
X Use button ; to adjust the exterior mirror to
a position that allows you to see the rear G WARNING
wheel and the curb. If you use the memory function on the driver's
The parking position is stored. side while driving, you could lose control of
i If you shift the transmission to another posi- the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
tion, the exterior mirror on the front- being made. There is a risk of an accident.
passenger side returns to the driving position.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
Saving using the memory button side when the vehicle is stationary.
You can store the parking position of the exte- G WARNING

rior mirror on the front-passenger side using

memory button M :. The reverse gear must not When the memory function adjusts the seat or
be engaged. steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
pants – particularly children – could become
tion lock (Y page 132). trapped. There is a risk of injury.
X Press button =. While the memory function is making adjust-
X Use button ; to adjust the exterior mirror to ments, make sure that no one has any body
a position that allows you to see the rear parts in the sweep of the seat or steering
wheel and the curb. wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-
X Press memory button M : and one of the diately release the memory function position
arrows on button ; within three seconds. button. The adjustment process is stopped.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move. G WARNING
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the
steps. Children could become trapped if they acti-
X After successfully storing, reset the driving
vate the memory function, particularly when
position of the exterior mirror. unattended. There is a risk of injury.
Calling up a stored parking position set- SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
ting leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- The memory function can be used at any time,
tion lock (Y page 132). e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in the igni-
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- tion lock.
passenger side using button =.
X Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger Storing settings
side moves to the stored parking position.
With the memory function, you can store up to
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side three different settings, e.g. for three different
moves back to its original position: people.
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph The following settings are stored as a single
(15 km/h) memory preset:
Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged
Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
reverse gear restraint
Rwhen you use button ? to select the exterior
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors
mirror on the driver's side on the driver's and front-passenger sides
Rposition of the head-up display
Z
110 Memory function
X Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 100).

X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel
(Y page 105) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 107).
X Press memory button M and then press one of
the memory position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected preset
position. A tone sounds when the settings
have been completed.
Calling up a stored setting

XPress and hold the relevant memory position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the following compo-
nents are in the saved position:
RSeat
RSteering wheel
RExterior mirrors
RHead-up display
i If you release the memory position switch,
the seat, steering wheel and mirror setting
functions stop immediately. The head-up dis-
play continues to be adjusted.
Exterior lighting 111
Exterior lighting Automatic headlamp mode
General notes G WARNING

When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
USA only: if you wish to drive during the daytime beam headlamps may not be switched on
without lights, switch off the Daytime Run‐
ning Lights function via the on-board com- automatically if there is fog, snow or other
puter (Y page 223). causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
Setting the exterior lighting In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using the: The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.
The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-
Rlight switch (Y page 111) ing at all times.
Rcombination switch (Y page 112) Ã is the favored light switch setting.
Ron-board computer (Y page 223) The light setting is automatically selected
Lights and windshield wipers

according to the brightness of the ambient light,
Light switch but not in the event of poor visibility due to
weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray.
Operation RWith the SmartKey in position 1 in the igni-
tion lock, the parking lamps are switched on
or off automatically depending on the bright-
ness of the ambient light.
RUSA only: if you have switched on the Day‐
time Running Lights function via the on-
board computer, and the engine is running,
the daytime running lamps or the parking
lamps and low-beam headlamps are switched
on or off automatically depending on the
ambient light.
RCanada only: depending on the ambient light,
the daytime running lamps or the parking and
1 W Left-hand standing lamps low-beam headlamps are switched on/off
2 X Right-hand standing lamps automatically when the engine is running.
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and X To switch on the automatic headlamps:
instrument cluster lighting turn the light switch to the Ã position.
4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled USA only: The daytime running lamps improve
by the light sensor the visibility of your vehicle during the day. Here,
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps the Daytime Running Lights function must
B R Rear fog lamp be switched on via the on-board computer
(Y page 223).
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
If the engine is running and you turn the light
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
switch to the T or L position, the manual
X Turn the light switch to the Ã position. settings take precedence over the daytime run-
The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand- ning lamps.
ing lamps) switches off automatically if you: Canada only: The daytime running lamps
improve the visibility of your vehicle during the
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
day. The daytime running lamps function is
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore
position u be deactivated.
Z
112 Exterior lighting
When the engine is running and the vehicle is X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the
stationary: if you move the selector lever from a SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or
driving position to P, the daytime running lamps start the engine.
and low-beam headlamps go out after three X Turn the light switch to the L or Ã
minutes. position.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta- X Press the R button.
tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the The yellow R indicator lamp on the instru-
light switch to the T position, the daytime ment cluster lights up.
running lamps and parking lamps switch on.
If the engine is running and you turn the light Parking lamps
switch to the L position, the manual settings ! If the battery charge is very low, the parking
take precedence over the daytime running lamps or standing lamps are automatically
lamps. switched off to enable the next engine start.
Low-beam headlamps Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit
area, in accordance with the relevant legal
G WARNING stipulations. Avoid using the T parking
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low- lamps over a period of several hours. If pos-
sible, switch on the right-hand X or left-
beam headlamps may not be switched on

hand W standing lamps.
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather X To switch on the parking lamps: turn the
light switch to the T position.
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
The green T indicator lamp on the instru-
accident. ment cluster lights up.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L. Standing lamps
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head- X To switch on the standing lamps: turn the
lamps switch on when the ignition is switched on
SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock or
and the light switch is set to the L position.
remove the SmartKey.
This is a particularly useful function in the event
of rain and fog. X Turn the light switch to the W (left-hand
side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
the vehicle) position.
turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to the L position.
The green L indicator lamp in the instru- Combination switch
ment cluster lights up.
Rear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick
fog. You must observe the legal requirements
for the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the rear fog lamp.
: High-beam headlamps
; Turn signal, right
Exterior lighting 113
= High-beam flasher switch on a turn signal lamp using the com-

? Turn signal, left bination switch, only the turn signal lamp on
the corresponding side of the vehicle will
X To indicate briefly: press the combination flash.
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?. The hazard warning lamps switch on automati-
The corresponding turn signal flashes three cally if an air bag is deployed.
times. The hazard warning lamps still operate if the
X To indicate: press the combination switch ignition is switched off.
beyond the pressure point in the direction of
arrow ; or ?.
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: Cornering light function
turn the light switch to the L or Ã The cornering light function improves the illu-
position. mination of the road over a wide angle in the
X Press the combination switch beyond the direction you are turning, enabling better visi-
pressure point in the direction of arrow :. bility in tight bends, for example. It can only be
In the Ã position, the high-beam head- activated when the low-beam headlamps are
lamps are switched on only when it is dark and switched on.

the engine is running. Active:
The blue K indicator lamp on the instru-
Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
ment cluster lights up when the high-beam
headlamps are switched on. (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel
X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:
Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph
move the combination switch back to its nor-
mal position. (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn
The blue K indicator lamp on the instru- the steering wheel
ment cluster goes out. The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
time, but is automatically switched off after no
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: more than three minutes.
If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it auto- Cornering light function with traffic circle
matically controls activation and deactivation of function:
the high-beam headlamps (Y page 113).
The cornering light function is activated on both
X High-beam flasher: pull the combination sides before entering a traffic circle through an
switch in the direction of arrow =. evaluation of the current GPS position of the
vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle
has left the traffic circle. In this way, pedestrians
Hazard warning lamps crossing the road, for example, are illuminated
by your vehicle in good time.
Only vehicles with the COMAND multimedia sys-
tem have this function.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notes
You can use this function to set the headlamps
to change between low beam and high beam
automatically. The system recognizes vehicles
with their lights on, either approaching from the
X To switch the hazard warning lamps on or opposite direction or traveling in front of your
off: press button :. vehicle, and consequently switches the head-
lamps from high beam to low beam.
The turn signal lamps flash when the hazard
warning lamps are switched on. If you now
Z
114 Exterior lighting
The system automatically adapts the low-beam If you are driving at speeds above approx-
headlamp range depending on the distance to imately 16 mph (25 km/h):
the other vehicle. Once the system no longer The headlamp range is set automatically
detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the depending on the distance between the vehi-
high-beam headlamps. cle and other road users.
The system's optical sensor is located behind If you are driving at speeds above approx-
the windshield near the overhead control panel. imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road
users are detected:
Important safety notes The high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp on the
G WARNING instrument cluster also lights up.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize If you are driving at speeds below approx-
road users: imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users
are detected or the roads are adequately lit:
Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians The high-beam headlamps are switched off
Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists automatically. The K indicator lamp on the
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier instrument cluster goes out. The _ indi-
cator lamp on the multifunction display

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam remains lit.
Assist may fail to recognize other road users X To switch off: move the combination switch
that have lights, or may recognize them too back to its normal position or move the light
late. In this, or in similar situations, the auto- switch to another position.
matic high-beam headlamps will not be deac- The K indicator lamp on the instrument
tivated or will be activated regardless. There is cluster goes out.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in Headlamps fogged up on the inside
good time. Certain climatic and physical conditions may
cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into moisture does not affect the functionality of the
account road, weather or traffic conditions. headlamp.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting
to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con-
ditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
rain or snow
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist

on/off
X To switch on: turn the light switch to the
Ã position.
X Press the combination switch forwards
beyond the pressure point (Y page 112).
The _ indicator lamp on the multifunction
display lights up when it is dark and the light
sensor switches on the low-beam headlamps.
Replacing bulbs 115
Interior lighting The color and brightness of the ambient lighting

are set using the multimedia system (see Digital
Overview of interior lighting Operator's Manual).
Front overhead control panel Automatic interior lighting control

X To switch on or off: press the | button.
When the automatic interior lighting control is
activated, the button is flush with the over-
head control panel.
The interior lighting automatically switches on if
you:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen a door
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
The interior lighting is switched on for a set time
when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition

: p Left-hand front reading lamp lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted via
; | Automatic interior lighting control the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's
= c Front interior lighting Manual).
? u Rear interior lighting
A p Right-hand front reading lamp
Replacing bulbs
Control panel in the grab handle (rear
compartment) Important safety notes
G WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
Allow these components to cool down before
changing a bulb.
Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its

glass tube has been scratched.
The bulb may explode if:
: Reading lamp Ryou touch it
; p Switches the reading lamp on/off
Rit is hot
Ryou drop it
Ryou scratch it
Interior lighting control
Use bulbs only in closed lamps that have been
General notes designed for this purpose. Only install spare
bulbs of the same type and the specified volt-
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from age.
discharging, the interior lighting functions are Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life
automatically deactivated after some time of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with
except for when the SmartKey is in position 2 your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass
in the ignition lock. tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it
off with a lint-free cloth.
Z
116 Replacing bulbs
Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.

Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with
liquids.
Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 116).
Have the bulbs that you cannot change yourself
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a
Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
Rear lamp cluster
that these function correctly at all times. Have
the headlamp setting checked regularly. : Backup lamp: W 16 W
Vehicles with LED headlamps: the front and
rear light clusters of your vehicle are equipped
with LED bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs your- Replacing front bulbs (vehicles with
halogen headlamps)
self. Contact a qualified specialist workshop

which has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools to carry out the work required. Low-beam headlamps
Overview of bulb types

You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb
type can be found in the legend.
X Switch off the lights.

X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Push bulb holder ; up and pull out.
Halogen headlamps X Pull defective bulb out of bulb holder ;.
: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W X Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;.
; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W X Insert bulb holder ; into groove with lug at
= Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W top.
X Push bulb holder ; down until it engages
audibly.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise.
Replacing bulbs 117
High-beam headlamps X Insert bulb holder :, turn it clockwise and

lock.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing
(Y page 117).
Removing and installing the cover in the

front wheel housing
You must remove the cover of the front wheel
housing before you can change the front turn
signal lamp.

X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.

X Push bulb holder ; upwards and pull out.
X Pull defective bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; into groove with lug at
top.
X Push bulb holder ; down until it engages X To remove: switch off the lights.
audibly. X Turn the front wheels inwards.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it clock- X Turn rotary knob : 180° outwards until it
wise. stops using a suitable object.
Cover ; is released.
Turn signals X Fold cover ; up.
X To install: insert cover ; into the left, right
and two lower catches.
X Turn rotary knob : 180° inwards until it
stops using a suitable object.
Cover ; is locked.
X Remove the cover in the front wheel housing

(Y page 117).
X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise using
the grip under the headlamp casing and
remove it downwards with bulb.
X Turn defective bulb counter-clockwise and
remove it from bulb holder :.
X Insert new bulb into bulb holder :.
Z
118 Replacing bulbs
Replacing rear bulbs (vehicles with handle = with a flat, smooth object, e.g. a
halogen headlamps) screwdriver.
X Pull the lower section of handle : with a
Opening and closing the side trim pan- strong tug to remove it from the trim and then
els place it to one side.
Example: right-hand side paneling X Reach under the right-hand side of trim B
and lightly tug along the entire length of the
You must open the side trim panel in the cargo trim in order to unclip it.
compartment before you can replace the bulbs
X Pull out connector C of the surround lighting
in the tail lamps.
by releasing the latches.
X To open: release right or left side trim
X Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate: pull out the
panel : at the top and fold it down in the plug connector for the switch at the top right
direction of the arrow. of the trim.
X To close: insert side trim panel :. X Vehicles with electric fold-out trailer tow
hitch: unlock and pull out the plug connector
Rear lamp cluster for the switch at the top left of the trim.
X Place trim B to one side.
Changing the backup lamp
Due to their location, have the bulbs in the
backup lamp in the tailgate replaced at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
X Unclip the remaining part of trim D from the

assembly on the corresponding side using a
sudden, sharp movement, until bulb holder
E is accessible.
Example: right-hand side handle

X In recess ? on the inside of the closing han-
dle, pry off and remove the upper section of
Windshield wipers 119
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield

wipers in dry weather conditions, always use
washer fluid when operating the windshield
wipers.
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the
windshield after the vehicle has been washed
in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-
dues may be the reason for this. Clean the
windshield using washer fluid after washing
the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to
X Pull the defective bulb out of bulb holder E. optical influences and the windshield becom-
ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder E.
shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.
X Position trim D and engage it in place by This could then damage the windshield wiper
tapping it with your hand. blades or scratch the windshield.
X Check that all the metal clips are inserted in For this reason, you should always switch off

the parts that were placed to one side: two the windshield wipers in dry weather.
clips ; in the upper section of handle = and
four clips A in trim B.
X If not, remove the missing metal clips from
the metal openings in the tailgate and insert
them in the appropriate places.
X Grasp trim B and connect plug connector C
to the surround lighting.
i The surround lighting only illuminates when
the tailgate has been shut and reopened.
X Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate: insert the
plug connector for the switch at the top right
of the trim.
X Vehicles with electric fold-out trailer tow 1 $ Windshield wiper off
hitch: insert the plug connector for the switch 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, normal
at the top left of the trim. 3 Å Intermittent wipe, frequent
X Position trim B and engage it in place by 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow
tapping it with your hand, starting from the 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
outside. B í Single wipe
X Clip in the lower section of handle : again. î Wipe with washer fluid
X Insert and engage the upper section of handle X Switch on the ignition.
= into lower section :.
X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
sponding position.
Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Å or
Windshield wipers Ä position, the appropriate wipe frequency
Switching the windshield wipers is automatically set according to the intensity of
the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is
on/off more sensitive than in the Ä position, caus-
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when ing the windshield wiper to wipe more fre-
the windshield is dry, as this could damage quently.
the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col- If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will
lected on the windshield can scratch the glass no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent
if wiping takes place when the windshield is you from observing the traffic conditions.
dry.
Z
120 Windshield wipers
Switching the rear window wiper on/ shield/rear window may be damaged by the
off force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make
sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the
wiper.
Changing the windshield wiper blades

Adjusting the wiper blades so that they
are vertical
On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEY-
: è Switch LESS‑GO start function:
2 b Wipes with washer fluid
3 I Switches on intermittent wiping

4 0 Switches off intermittent wiping X Set the windshield wipers to the ° posi-
5 b Wipes with washer fluid tion on the combination switch.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the X When the wiper arms are vertical to the hood,
ignition lock (Y page 132). turn the SmartKey to position u in the igni-
X Turn switch : on the combination switch to tion lock and remove SmartKey.
the corresponding position. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.
When the rear window wiper is switched on, On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEY-
the è symbol appears in the instrument LESS‑GO start function:
cluster.
X Switch off the engine.
X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
Replacing the wiper blades X Set the windshield wiper to the ° position
on the combination switch.
Important safety notes X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until
the windshield wiper starts.
G WARNING X When the wiper arms are vertical to the hood,
If the windshield wipers begin to move while press the Start/Stop button.
you are changing the wiper blades, you could X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
injury. Removing the wiper blades
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper arm

has been folded away from the windshield/
rear window.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear
window.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release the
wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls
onto the windshield/rear window, the wind-
Windshield wipers 121
X Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand. With X Slide the catch ; in the direction of arrow =
the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the until it engages in the locking position with a
direction of arrow : away from the wiper arm noticeable click.
as far as it will go. X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-
X Slide the catch ; in the direction of arrow = rectly.
until it engages in the removal position with a X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
noticeable click.

X Remove the protective film : from the ser-
X Remove the wiper blade in the direction of vice indicator on the tip of the wiper blade.
arrow ? away from the wiper arm.
If the color of the service indicator changes from
Installing the wiper blades black to yellow, the wiper blades should be
replaced.
i The duration of the color change varies
depending on the usage conditions.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing a wiper blade
X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm

in the direction of arrow :.

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEY-
LESS‑GO start function:
X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
u. This is the same as: "Key removed".
Z
122 Windshield wipers
X Fold wiper arm ? away from the rear window. X Position new wiper blade : with recess B
X Press both release clips ;. on lug A.
X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of arrow
arrow = away from wiper arm ?. = onto the wiper arm until retaining clips ;
X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of
engage in bracket ?.
arrow A. X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated cor-
rectly.
Installing a wiper blade X Fold the wiper arm back onto the rear win-
dow.
Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, are obstructing windshield wiper move-
are jammed. ment. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS‑GO start function:
The vehicle electronics are now in position u. This means: "Key
removed".
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned.
fluid from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.
zles no longer hits the
center of the windshield.
Overview of climate control systems 123
Overview of climate control systems The integrated filter filters out most particles of
dust and soot and completely filters out pollen.
General notes It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A
clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied
Observe the settings recommended on the fol- to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you
lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog should always observe the interval for replacing
up. the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance
To prevent the windows from fogging up: Booklet. As it depends on environmental condi-
tions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may
Climate control
Rswitch off climate control only briefly
be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly
let.
Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion function i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during
Ractivate the "Windshield defrosting" function warm weather, e.g. using the convenience
briefly, if required opening feature (Y page 91). This will speed
up the cooling process and the desired inte-
Climate control regulates the temperature and rior temperature will be reached more
air humidity in the vehicle interior. The interior quickly.
filter cleans the air, thus improving the interior
climate. i It is possible that the blower may be activa-
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function ted automatically 60 minutes after the Smart-
is only available when the engine is running. Key has been removed depending on various
Optimum climate control is only achieved with factors, e.g. the outside temperature. The
the side windows and roof closed. vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry
If you start the engine using your smartphone, the automatic climate control.
the last selected climate control setting is reac-
tivated (Y page 134).
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Example: control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 126)
; Sets the air distribution (Y page 126)
= Sets the airflow (Y page 126)
Switches off climate control (Y page 124)
124 Operating the climate control systems
? Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 125)

A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 126)
B Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 272)
C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 127)
D Activates or deactivates synchronization (Y page 126)
E Switches air-recirculation mode manually on/off (Y page 128)
F Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 125)
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 126)
Climate control
Optimum use of automatic climate ECO start/stop function

control During automatic engine switch-off, the climate
control system only operates at a reduced capa-
Optimum use of the automatic climate city. If you require the full climate control output,
control you can switch off the ECO start/stop function
The following contains notes and recommenda- by pressing the ECO button (Y page 137).
tions on optimum use of dual-zone climate con-
trol.
X Activate climate control using the Ã Operating the climate control sys-
rocker switch. The indicator lamp above the tems
Ã rocker switch lights up. The "Cooling
with dehumidification" function is activated in Activating/deactivating climate con-
automatic mode. trol
X Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
General notes
i Only use the "Windshield defrosting" func- When the climate control is switched off, the air
tion briefly until the windshield is clear again. supply and air circulation are also switched off.
i Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off
if there are unpleasant outside odors or when climate control only briefly
in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog Switch on climate control primarily using the
up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle Ã rocker switch (Y page 125).
in air-recirculation mode.
Activating/deactivating
DYNAMIC SELECT switch
You can choose between various drive programs tion lock (Y page 132).
with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch X To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or
(Y page 139). higher using rocker switch H.
If you have selected drive program E: X To switch off:set the airflow to level 0 using
Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is rocker switch H.
deactivated and heat output is reduced as a
result i 3-zone automatic climate control: when cli-
Rthe rear window defroster running time is
mate control is switched off, "OFF" appears in
the rear-compartment display.
reduced
If you have selected drive program C, S or S+,
the current climate settings are maintained.
Operating the climate control systems 125
Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off

General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not
be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more
quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air
inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.
Climate control
Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal
and not a sign that there is a malfunction.
Activating/deactivating
X Press the ¿ rocker switch up or down.
The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up or goes out.
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

The indicator lamp above Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-
the ¿ rocker switch function.
remains off. The cooling X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
with air dehumidification
function cannot be acti-
vated via the multimedia
system any longer
(Y page 273).
Setting climate control to automatic X To switch to manual operation: press the

H rocker switch up or down.
General notes or
In automatic mode, the set temperature is main- X Press the _ rocker switch up or down.
tained automatically at a constant level. The The indicator lamp above the Ã rocker
system automatically regulates the temperature switch goes out.
of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis- In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow or
tribution. air distribution manually, the indicator lamp
During automatic controlling, the "Cooling with above the Ã rocker switch goes out. The
air dehumidification" function is activated. function which has not been changed manually,
however, continues to be controlled automati-
Automatic control cally. When the manually set function switches
back to automatic mode, the indicator lamp
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- above rocker switch Ã lights up again.
tion lock (Y page 132).
X To activate: press the Ã rocker switch up
or down.
The indicator lamp above the Ã rocker
switch lights up.
X Set the desired temperature using the w
rocker switch on the front control unit.
Adjusting the climate mode settings Setting the airflow

In automatic mode you can select the following X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
airflow settings for the driver's and front- tion lock (Y page 132).
passenger areas: X To increase or reduce: press rocker switch
FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting H up or down.
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draft-
Climate control
free setting Activating or deactivating the syn-

X To set: set the climate mode using the mul- chronization function
timedia system (Y page 272).
General notes
Climate control can be set centrally using the
Setting the temperature synchronization function. The temperature set-
ting is adopted for the front-passenger side.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: different
temperatures can be set for the driver's and Activating/deactivating
front-passenger sides.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- X Press rocker switch 0 up or down.
tion lock (Y page 132). The indicator lamp above rocker switch 0
X To increase or reduce: press rocker switch
lights up or goes out.
w up or down. or
Only change the temperature setting in small X Activate or deactivate the "Synchronization"
increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). function using the multimedia system
(Y page 126).
The synchronization function deactivates if the
Setting the air distribution settings for the front-passenger side are
changed.
Air distribution settings
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents Defrosting the windshield
P Directs air through the center and side air
vents General notes
O Directs air through the footwell air vents
You can use this function to defrost the wind-
S Directs air through the center, side and shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or front
footwell vents side windows on the inside.
a Directs air through the defroster and Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function
footwell vents as soon as the windshield is clear again.
_ Directs air through the defroster, center,
side and footwell vents Switching the "Windshield defrosting"
b Directs air through the defroster, center function on or off
and side air vents
W Sets the air distribution to automatic X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
X To switch on:press rocker switch ¬ on
Setting
the front control unit up or down.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 The indicator lamp above the ¬ rocker
(Y page 132). switch lights up. The current climate control
X Press the _ rocker switch up or down. settings are deactivated.
The various air distribution settings appear in
the multimedia system.
Operating the climate control systems 127
The climate control system switches to the i You should only select this setting until the
following functions: windshield is clear again.
Rhigh airflow
Rhigh temperature Windows fogged up on the outside
Rair distribution to the windshield and front XActivate the windshield wipers.
side windows XSwitch on automatic mode using the Ã
Rair-recirculation mode off rocker switch.
i If necessary, the "Cooling with air dehumid-
Climate control
i If you clean the windows regularly, they do
ification" function is activated. In this case, not fog up so quickly.
the indicator lamp above the ¿ rocker
switch remains switched off.
X To switch off: press rocker switch ¬ up or Rear window defroster
down.
The indicator lamp above the ¬ rocker General notes
switch goes out. The previously selected set-
tings are restored. Air-recirculation mode The rear window defroster has a high current
remains deactivated. draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon
as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear
window defroster switches off automatically
after several minutes.
Defrosting the windows
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window
Windows fogged up on the inside defroster may switch off.
X Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifica- Activating/deactivating

tion" function with the ¿ rocker switch.
X Switch on automatic mode using the Ã tion lock (Y page 132).
rocker switch.
X Press rocker switch ¤ up or down.
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the The indicator lamp above rocker switch ¤
"Windshield defrosting" function using the lights up or goes out.
¬ rocker switch.
Problems with the rear window defroster

The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
defroster has deactiva- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
ted prematurely or can- interior lighting or the seat heating.
not be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster
can be activated again.
Switching air-recirculation mode If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win-

on/off dows can fog up more quickly, in particular at
low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation
General notes mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-
ging up.
You can also temporarily deactivate the flow of
fresh air manually if unpleasant odors are enter-
ing the vehicle from outside. The air already
inside the vehicle will then be recirculated.
Activating/deactivating H Environmental note

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Full vials must not be dis-
tion lock (Y page 132). posed of with household
X To activate: press rocker switch g up or waste. They must be collec-
down. ted separately and recycled
The indicator lamp above rocker switch g to protect the environment.
lights up.
Dispose of full vials in an
Climate control
Air-recirculation mode switches on automati-

cally: environmentally responsible
manner and take them to a
Rat high outside temperatures
harmful substance collec-
Rin a tunnel (vehicles with a navigation system
tion point.
only)
The indicator lamp above the g rocker
switch is not lit when automatic air-recirculation
mode is activated. Outside air is added after
about 30 minutes.
X To deactivate: press the g rocker switch
up or down.
The indicator lamp above the g rocker
switch goes out.
Air-recirculation mode deactivates automati-
cally:
Rafter approximately five minutes at outside
temperatures below approximately 41 ‡
(5 †) : Vial lid
Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling
; Vial
with air dehumidification is deactivated The perfume atomizer helps to improve driving
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside comfort.
temperatures above approximately 41 ‡ Via the multimedia system you can:
(5 †) if the "Cooling with dehumidification" Rswitch the perfume atomizer on/off
function is activated (Y page 272)
Rregulate the perfume intensity (Y page 272)
The following conditions can affect your percep-
Perfume atomizer tion of the perfume intensity:
Operating the perfume atomizer Roperating mode of the climate control system
Rinterior temperature
G WARNING Rtime of year or day
If children open the vial, they could drink the Rair humidity
perfume or it could come into contact with Rphysiological condition of occupants, e.g. fati-
their eyes. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, gue or hunger
do not leave children unsupervised in the vehi- The perfume atomizer is active only when the
cle. glove box is closed.
If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consult The perfume atomizer is provided with a pre-fil-
a doctor. If perfume comes into contact with led vial. You can also choose from a variety of
your eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with clean filled perfume vials and an empty vial which you
can fill yourself.
water. If you continue to experience difficul-
If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe the
ties, consult a doctor. separate information sheet attached to the vial.
Air vents 129
! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz ! Only refill the vial when you are outside the
interior perfumes, observe the manufactur- vehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfume could drip
ers' safety notices on the perfume packaging. into the interior and contaminate it.
Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when it is Always refill the empty refillable vial with the
empty. Dispose of the used vial after use. same perfume. Otherwise, you might not ach-
X To insert the perfume vial: open the glove ieve optimum results from the perfume atom-
box (Y page 279). izer.
X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as
Climate control
it will go.
X To remove the perfume vial: pull out the
perfume vial.
X To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lid of
the empty perfume vial to refill it yourself.
X Fill the perfume vial with a maximum of
0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml) of the desired liquid per-
fume.
X Screw the lid back on to the vial.
Problems with the perfume atomizer

The vehicle interior is not The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as it will
perfumed although the go.
perfume atomizer is acti- X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.
vated.
The perfume vial is not filled sufficiently.
X Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial.
X Use a new pre-filled vial.
X Refillable vials: fill the perfume vial with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz.
(15 ml) of the same perfume.
The perfume atomizer is faulty.

X Have the perfume atomizer checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Ionization Air vents

Ionization is used to purify the air in the vehicle Important safety notes
interior and attain an improved interior climate.
The ionization of the interior air is odorless and G WARNING
cannot be perceived directly in the vehicle inte- Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
rior.
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
You can switch ionization on or off using the the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
multimedia system (Y page 273).
is a risk of injury.
Ionization can only be operated when the auto-
matic climate control is switched on. The side air Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
vent on the driver's side must be open. maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
Z
130 Air vents
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to

another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and
the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow
Climate control
or leaves.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in
the vehicle interior.
Setting the air vents

Air vents are located:
Ron the left and right-hand side of the dash-
board
Rin the middle of the dashboard
Rin the rear center console, depending on the
equipment installed
Side air vent (example)

: Side window defroster vent
; Side air vent, left
= Control for left side air vent
X To open or close: turn control = to the
counter-clockwise or clockwise as far as it will
go.
X To adjust the air direction: hold side air
vent ; by control = and move it up or down
or to the left or right.
Adjusting the rear air vents (see the Digital
Operator's Manual).
Driving 131
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Driving

Important safety notes Important safety notes
The sensor system of some driving and driving G WARNING
safety systems adjusts automatically while a
certain distance is being driven after the vehicle Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict
has been delivered or after repairs. Full system the clearance around the pedals or block a
effectiveness is not reached until the end of this depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the oper-
Driving and parking

teach-in procedure. ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a
New and replaced brake pads and discs only risk of an accident.
reach their optimum braking effect after several Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for
this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. they do not get into the driver's footwell.
When using floormats or carpets, make sure
that they are properly secured so that they do
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) not slip or obstruct the pedals. Do not place
several floormats or carpets on top of one
The more you look after the engine when it is another.
new, the more satisfied you will be with its per-
formance in the future.
G WARNING
RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle
and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
(1500 km). of the pedals, e.g.:
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, Rshoes with thick soles
during this period.
Rshoes with high heels
RWhen changing gears manually, change up in
good time, before the tachometer needle rea- Rslippers
ches Ô of the way to the red area of the tach- There is a risk of an accident.
ometer. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake
usage of the pedals.
the vehicle.
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal
G WARNING
beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), If you switch off the ignition while driving,
drive in program E. safety-relevant functions are only available
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
the engine speed gradually and accelerate the for example, the power steering and the brake
vehicle to full speed. boosting effect. You will require considerably
You should also observe these notes on break- more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train on of an accident.
your vehicle have been replaced.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed.
G WARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake can:
Roverheat and cause a fire
Rlose its hold function.
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
the parking brake fully before driving off.
Z
132 Driving
! Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle If you depress the brake pedal and press the
stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
engine speeds and driving at full throttle until ately.
the engine has reached its operating temper- A check which periodically establishes a radio
ature. connection between the vehicle and the Smart-
Only shift the automatic transmission to the Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in
desired drive position when the vehicle is sta- the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when
tionary. starting the engine.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive To start the vehicle without actively using the
Driving and parking
wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. SmartKey:

You could otherwise damage the drive train. Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock.
Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
Key positions Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. (Y page 78)
SmartKey
Do not keep the SmartKey:
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey.
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
This can affect the functionality of the Smart-
Key.
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey remote
control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time:
Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition
with the Start/Stop button.
Ryou will no longer be able to start the engine
g To remove the SmartKey
with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is
1 Power supply for some consumers, such as unlocked again.
the windshield wipers
If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) on the front door (Y page 83), you can continue
and drive position to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.
3 To start the engine
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle
i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/
lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for Stop button for three seconds. This function
the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. operates independently of the ECO start/stop
The engine cannot be started. automatic engine switch-off function.
Start/Stop button
General notes
When you insert the Start/Stop button into the
ignition lock, the system needs approximately
two seconds recognition time. You can then use
the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in
succession corresponds to the different Smart-
Key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the
case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
Driving 133
Key positions with the Start/Stop button X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
lock ;.
You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock when you leave the
vehicle. You should, however, always take the
SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As
long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/
Driving and parking

Stop button
Rthe electrically powered equipment can be
operated
: Start/Stop button
Starting the engine
; Ignition lock
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the Important safety notes
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. Warning and indicator lamps: see G WARNING
(Y page 256). If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been they could:
pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey
being removed from the ignition. Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
X To switch on the power supply: press
people or road users.
Start/Stop button : once. Rget out and disrupt traffic.
The power supply is switched on. You can now Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
activate the windshield wipers, for example.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
The power supply is switched off again if:
motion if, for example, they:
Rthe driver's door is opened and
Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in
this position Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop park position P

button : twice. RStart the engine.
The ignition is switched on. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
The ignition is switched off again if:
Ryou do not start the engine from this position
within 15 minutes
Ryou press Start/Stop button : once when in
this position
reach of children.
The power supply is switched off again if:
Rthe driver's door is opened and G WARNING
Ryou press Start/Stop button : once when in
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
this position
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
Removing the Start/Stop button these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
You can remove the Start/Stop button from the is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
using the SmartKey. out sufficient ventilation.
It is possible to switch between Start/Stop but-
ton mode and key operation only when the
transmission is in position j.
Z
134 Driving
G WARNING X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

Flammable materials introduced through The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
environmental influence or by animals can light up (Y page 256).
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk tion lock (Y page 132) and release it as soon
of fire. as the engine is running.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
Starting procedure with the Start/Stop
Driving and parking
there are no flammable foreign materials in

the engine compartment or in the exhaust button
system.
The Start/Stop button is only available on vehi-
cles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start
General notes function.
The Start/Stop button can be used to start the
Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the catalytic vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey
converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button
after a cold start. The sound of the engine may must be inserted in the ignition lock and the
change during this time. SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for
starting the engine operates independently of
Automatic transmission the ECO start/stop automatic engine start func-
tion.
X Shift the transmission to position j
You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in
(Y page 141).
the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always
The transmission position indicator on the
take the SmartKey with you when leaving the
multifunction display shows j
vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time.
(Y page 142).
Pay attention to the important safety notes.
i You can start the engine in transmission X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
position j and i. depressed.
X Press the Start/Stop button once
Starting procedure with the SmartKey (Y page 133).
Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the engine
To start the engine using the SmartKey instead starts.
of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow is
button out of the ignition lock.
activated and the engine starts.
X To start a diesel engine: turn the SmartKey
to position 2 in the ignition lock
(Y page 132). Starting procedure via smartphone
The % preglow indicator lamp in the instru- Observe the important safety notes on starting
ment cluster lights up. the engine (Y page 133).
You can also start your engine via your smart-
tion lock (Y page 132) and release it as soon phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the
as the engine is running. previously selected climate control setting is
i Vehicles with a diesel engine: you can activated. In this way you can cool or heat the
start the engine without preglow if the engine interior of the vehicle before starting the jour-
is warm. ney.
If the engine will not start: Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is
safe to start and run the engine where your vehi-
cle is parked.
X Reinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock
Observe the legal stipulations in the area where
after a short waiting period. your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smart-
phone may be limited to certain countries or
regions.
Driving 135
You can execute a maximum of two consecutive Pulling away

starting attempts via your smartphone. If you
press the start/stop button or insert the Smart- General notes
Key into the ignition lock, you can carry out two
more starting attempts with your smartphone. G WARNING
The engine runs for ten minutes when starting If the engine speed is above the idling speed
with the smartphone. and you engage transmission position D or R,
Once you have started the engine, you can the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
switch the engine off via your smartphone at any
Driving and parking

time. a risk of an accident.
You can only start the engine via your smart- When engaging transmission position D or R,
phone if: always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock not simultaneously accelerate.
Rpark position j is selected
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling
Rthe accelerator pedal is not depressed
away.
Rthe anti-theft alarm system is not activated
The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled
Rthe panic alarm is not activated away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.
Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched off You can open the doors from the inside at any
Rthe hood is closed time.
Rthe doors are closed and locked You can also deactivate the automatic locking
Rthe windows and sliding sunroof are closed feature, see the Digital Operator's Manual.
Also make sure that: It is possible to shift the transmission from posi-
tion j to the desired position only if you
Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filled depress the brake pedal. Only then is the park-
Rthe starter battery has been sufficiently ing lock released. If you do not depress the
charged brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still
be moved but the parking lock remains
G WARNING engaged.
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds
engine is started unintentionally during ser- after a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-
vice or maintenance work. There is a risk of verter to reach its operating temperature
injury. more quickly.
Always secure the engine against uninten- Information on the automatic release of the
tional starting before carrying out mainte- electric parking brake (Y page 156).
nance or repair work.
Pulling away with a trailer
Make sure that the engine cannot be started via
your smartphone before carrying out mainte-
nance or repairs. You can prevent an engine
start via your smartphone, for example, if you:
Rswitch on the hazard warning lamps
Rdo not lock the doors
Ropen a side window
Ropen the sliding sunroof
Z
136 Driving
To ensure that you do not roll backwards when ECO start/stop function
pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the elec-
tric parking brake. Introduction
X Press and hold handle :.
The electric parking brake continues to brake The ECO start/stop function switches the
and prevent the vehicle from rolling back- engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped
wards. under certain conditions.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada The engine starts automatically when the driver
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop
Driving and parking
remains on. function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel

consumption and emissions of your vehicle.
X Depress the accelerator pedal.
X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination is
held by the driving force of the engine, release
lever :. G WARNING
The electric parking brake is released.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada If the engine is switched off automatically and
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
goes out. automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
For further information on the electric parking There is a risk of accident and injury.
brake, see (Y page 155). If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the ignition and secure the vehicle against
Hill start assist rolling away.
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
forward or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It General notes
holds the vehicle for a short time after you have
removed your foot from the brake pedal. This
gives you enough time to move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to
depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
G WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away. : ECO start/stop display
The ECO start/stop function is activated when-
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the ever you start the engine using the SmartKey or
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never the Start/Stop button.
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start If the engine has been switched off automati-
assist. cally by the ECO start/stop function, the è
ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis-
Hill start assist is not active if: play.
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop
downhill gradient function is available only in drive programs S, C
Rthe transmission is in position i
and E.
Rthe electric parking brake is applied
RESP® is malfunctioning
Automatic engine switch-off
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill with the
transmission in h or i, the ECO start/stop
function switches off the engine automatically.
Driving 137
The ECO start/stop function is operational Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-
when: shield when the air-conditioning system is
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit switched on
green Rthe condition of charge of the battery is too
Rthe outside temperature and the atmospheric low
air pressure is within the range that is suitable Shifting the transmission to position j does
for the system not start the engine.
Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature
Deactivating or activating the ECO
Driving and parking

Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached start/stop function
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged
Rthe system detects that the windshield is not
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
fogged up when the air-conditioning system is
switched on
Rthe hood is closed
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened
All of the vehicle's systems remain active when
the engine is stopped automatically.
The HOLD function can also be activated if the
engine has been switched off automatically. It is
then not necessary to continue applying the
brakes during the automatic stop phase. When
you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine
starts automatically and the braking effect of X To deactivate: press ECO button :.
the HOLD function is deactivated. Indicator lamp ; goes out.
Automatic engine switch-off can take place a X To activate: press ECO button :.
maximum of four times in a row (initial stop, then Indicator lamp ; lights up.
three subsequent stops). If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been switched off manually or as
Automatic engine start the result of a malfunction. The engine will then
not be switched off automatically when the vehi-
The engine starts automatically if: cle stops.
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by The ECO start/stop function is deactivated, if:
pressing the ECO button Ryou switch to drive program S+
Ryou switch to drive program S+
(Y page 139)
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: you permanently Ryou permanently activate manual gearshifting
activate manual gearshifting (Y page 145) (Y page 145)
Rin transmission position h or i, the brake If you have permanently activated manual gear-
pedal is released and the HOLD function is not shifting and then press ECO button :, the ECO
active start/stop function is switched on.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal
Ryou engage reverse gear k
Ryou move the transmission out of position j
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-
er's door
Rthe vehicle starts to roll
Rthe brake system requires this
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
ates from the set range
Z
138 Driving
All other models X To deactivate: press ECO button :.

Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will then
not be switched off automatically when the vehi-
Driving and parking
cle stops.
Selecting drive program S+ deactivates the ECO
start/stop function. If you press ECO button :,
the ECO start/stop function is activated.
Problems with the engine

The engine does not The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
start. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 172) or DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 169).
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 133).
The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard. Before attempting to start the engine again:
X Turn the SmartKey back to position u in the ignition lock.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 133). Avoid excessively long
and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the
battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine does not The fuel tank is empty.

start. The starter motor X Refuel the vehicle.
can be heard. The
reserve fuel warning
lamp is lit and the fuel
gauge display is at the
reserve level.
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
start. You cannot hear discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 328).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
DYNAMIC SELECT switch 139

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 133).
If the engine still does not start:
Vehicles with a gasoline There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
Driving and parking

engine: component of the engine management system.
The engine is not running X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
smoothly and is misfir- Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
ing. and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no
gauge shows a value longer being cooled sufficiently.
above 248 ‡ (120 †). X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
cool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 309). Observe the warning notes
as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function

Rclimate control
Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC Rthe driver assistance systems
Rthe availability of gliding mode
General information
Further information for automatic drive program
Select the drive program using the DYNAMIC characteristics (Y page 144).
SELECT switch. Additionally, in drive program I you can config-
Available drive programs: ure the respective vehicle characteristics using
the multimedia system. You can find informa-
S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving tion about this in the Digital Operator's Manual.
characteristics
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
S Sport Sporty driving characteris- Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is
tics activated. For further information about starting
the engine, see (Y page 133).
C Comfort Comfortable and economi-
cal driving characteristics
E Economy Particularly economical
driving characteristics
I Individual Individual settings
Depending on the drive program selected the

following vehicle characteristics will change:
Rthe engine management
Rthe transmission management
Rthe suspension
Rthe steering
Z
140 DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Selecting the drive program i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop func-
tion is deactivated at the factory due to the
available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO
start/stop function is not available in any
drive program, regardless of the display in the
multimedia system display.
All other models

Driving and parking
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change the

drive program.
Depending on the drive program selected the
following vehicle characteristics will change:
X Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch : forward or Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-
back until the desired drive program is selec- ment)
ted.
Rthe suspension.
The status icon of the selected drive program
is shown in the multifunction display. Rthe steering.
In addition, the current drive program settings Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function
are displayed briefly in the multimedia system Rthe climate control
display. - the climate control settings
You can also change gear yourself using the - the rear window defroster operation period
steering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor- - the performance of the seat heating
mation on the manual drive program Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
(Y page 145). Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is
activated. For further information about starting
Additional settings the engine, see (Y page 133).
: ECO start/stop function (Y page 136) XPush DYNAMIC SELECT switch : forward or
; ESP® (Y page 70) back until the desired drive program is selec-
= Suspension (Y page 174) ted.
? Permanent activation of manual gearshifting The status icon of the selected drive program
(Y page 145) is shown in the multifunction display.
In addition, the current drive program settings
When you press buttons :–? the correspond- are displayed briefly in the multimedia system
ing setting is selected. The DYNAMIC SELECT display.
switch setting is overwritten.
i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop func-
If you switch to drive program I, all stored char- tion is deactivated at the factory due to the
acteristics will be accepted. This is also the case available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO
if you have previously pressed one of buttons : start/stop function is not available in any
- A.
Automatic transmission 141
drive program, regardless of the display in the DIRECT SELECT lever

multimedia system display.
Available drive programs: Overview of transmission positions
I Individual Individual settings
S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving
characteristics
S Sport Sporty driving characteris-
Driving and parking

tics
C Comfort Comfortable and economi-
cal driving characteristics
E Economy Particularly economical
driving characteristics
j Park position with parking lock
Additional information for drive programs k Reverse gear
(Y page 144). i Neutral
You can also change gear yourself using the h Drive
steering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor-
mation on the manual drive program The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
(Y page 145). steering column.
The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its
original position. The current transmission posi-
tion j, k, i or h is shown in the transmis-
Automatic transmission sion position display on the multifunction dis-
Important safety notes play (Y page 142).
G WARNING Selecting park position

If the engine speed is above the idling speed ! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle
and you engage transmission position D or R, is coasting, do not shift the automatic trans-
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is mission directly from h to k, from k to h
a risk of an accident. or directly to j. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission may be damaged.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
of arrow j.
not simultaneously accelerate.
G WARNING Engaging park position automatically

The automatic transmission switches to neu- Park position j is automatically engaged if:
tral position N when you switch off the engine. Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an and remove the SmartKey
accident. Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey
After switching off the engine, always switch or using the Start/Stop button and open the
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- driver's door or front-passenger door
Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
stationary or when driving at a very low speed
brake.
and the transmission is in position h or k
Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-
mission shifts automatically to transmission
position j if the HOLD function or DISTRONIC
Z
142 Automatic transmission
PLUS is activated. Observe the information on With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-
the HOLD function (Y page 172) and on er's door or the front-passenger door or remove
DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 167). the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic
transmission shifts to j automatically.
Engaging reverse gear With the Start/Stop button: if you then open
the driver's door or the front-passenger door,
! Only move the automatic transmission to the automatic transmission shifts automatically
k when the vehicle is stationary. to j .
X Depress the brake pedal. If you want the automatic transmission to
Driving and parking
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehi-
first point of resistance. cle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a
towing system:
The ECO start/stop function is not available
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-
when reverse gear is engaged. Further informa-
tion on the ECO start/stop function GO start function: remove the Start/Stop
(Y page 136). button from the ignition lock.
Shifting to neutral X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
G WARNING depressed.
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, X Engage neutral i.
they could: X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the electric parking brake.
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
people or road users.
in the ignition lock.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Engaging drive position
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they: X If the transmission is in position k or i:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the
Rrelease the parking brake. first point of resistance.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of X If the transmission is in position j: depress
park position P the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever down past the first point of resistance.
RStart the engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Transmission position and drive pro-
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never gram display
The current transmission position and drive pro-
gram appear in the multifunction display.
reach of children.
X If the transmission is in position h or k:

push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to
the first point of resistance.
X If the transmission is in position j: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever up or down to the first point of resist-
ance. : Status symbol drive program
If you switch the engine off with the transmis- ; Transmission position
sion in position k or h, the automatic trans- = Gear
mission shifts to i automatically.
The arrows in the transmission position display A Neutral

show how and into which transmission positions
you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever. Do not shift the transmission to i
while driving. Otherwise, the auto-
If the transmission position display in the mul- matic transmission could be dam-
tifunction display is not working, you should pull aged.
away carefully to check whether the desired
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you No power is transmitted from the
should select transmission position h and engine to the drive wheels.
drive program E or S. Releasing the brake pedal will allow
Driving and parking

you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
push it or tow it.
Transmission positions If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift
the transmission to position i if the
B Park position vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.
on icy roads.
This prevents the vehicle from rolling
away when stopped. If you switch the engine off with the
transmission in position k or h,
Only shift the transmission into posi- the automatic transmission shifts to
tion j (Y page 141) when the vehi- i automatically.
cle is stationary. The parking lock
should not be used as a brake when ! Coasting in neutral i may
parking. Always apply the electronic cause damage to the drive train.
parking brake in addition to the park-
ing lock in order to secure the vehi- 7 Drive
cle. The automatic transmission changes
Park position j is automatically gear automatically. All forward gears
engaged if: are available.
Ryou switch off the engine using the
SmartKey and remove the Smart-
Key Driving tips
Ryou switch off the engine using the
SmartKey or using the Start/Stop Changing gear
button and open the driver's door The automatic transmission shifts through the
or front-passenger door individual gears automatically when it is in trans-
Ryou open the driver's door when mission position h. This automatic gear shift-
the vehicle is stationary or when ing behavior is determined by:
driving at a very low speed and the
Rthe selected drive program
transmission is in position h or
k Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
In the event of a malfunction of the Rthe road speed

vehicle's electronics, the transmis-
sion may lock in position j. Have Accelerator pedal position
the vehicle electronics checked
immediately at a qualified specialist Your style of driving influences how the auto-
workshop. matic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
C Reverse gear
Rmore throttle: late upshifts
You can only shift the transmission
into position k when the vehicle is
stationary (Y page 142). Double-clutch function
When shifting down, the double-clutch function
is active regardless of the currently selected
drive program. The double-clutch function
Z
reduces load change reactions and is conducive Ryou activate manual gearshifting
to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by (Y page 145).
the double-clutch function depends on the drive Ryou leave the suitable speed range.
program selected.
i If you have selected the "Comfort" setting
Kickdown for the drive (engine management) in drive
program I, you can also activate gliding mode.
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. You can find information about this in the Dig-
ital Operator's Manual.
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
Driving and parking
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower Towing a trailer
gear depending on the engine speed. X Drive in the middle of the engine speed range
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the on uphill gradients.
desired speed is reached. X Manual shifting: depending on the uphill or
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
downhill gradient, shift into a gear
(Y page 145), in which the engine will run the
Gliding mode (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) middle of the engine speed range.
This also applies if cruise control or
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
Drive programs
Drive program I (Individual)
Gliding mode is characterized by the following: In drive program I the following properties of the
drive program can be selected:
RThe combustion engine is disconnected from
Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-
the drive train.
ment)
RThe engine speed corresponds to the idling
Rthe suspension
speed.
Rthe steering
RThe multifunction display shows the status
icon : for the drive program's status icon. Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function
In drive programs E and C, you can deactivate Rthe climate control:
and activate gliding mode using the ECO button Information about configuring drive program I
(Y page 137). with the multimedia system can be found under
Gliding mode can be activated under the follow- "DYNAMIC SELECT" in the vehicle's Digital
ing conditions: Operator's Manual.
Rthe speed is within a suitable range. i To permanently select the gears in drive
Rthe course of the road is suitable, e.g. there program I using the steering wheel paddle
are no steep up or downhill gradients. shifters, select the M (manual) setting for the
Ryou are no longer depressing the accelerator drive.
pedal.
Gliding mode is deactivated under the following Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)
conditions:
Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. lowing:
Ryou depress the brake pedal. Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving
Ryou use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch characteristics.
the transmission position (Y page 141). Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear.
Ryou switch to drive program S+ or S Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.
(Y page 139). the fuel consumption possibly being higher as
a result of the later automatic transmission Drive program E (Economy)

shift points.
Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff
Drive program E is characterized by the follow-
springing and damping settings (vehicles with ing:
AIR BODY CONTROL). Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical
Rgliding mode is not available (Mercedes-AMG handling characteristics.
vehicles). Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward
Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. and reverse gears, unless the accelerator
pedal is depressed fully.
Driving and parking

Drive program S (Sport) Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for
example on slippery road surfaces.
Drive program S is characterized by the follow- Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the
ing: automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving character- The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
istics. range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear. Rduring deceleration, the engine is disconnec-
Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.

ted from the drive train. The vehicle uses
the fuel consumption possibly being higher as kinetic energy and consumes less fuel.
a result of the later automatic transmission Rthe cooling and heating output of the climate
shift points. control system has been reduced.
Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff
springing and damping settings (vehicles with
AIR BODY CONTROL). Manual gear shifting
Rgliding mode is not available (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles). General notes
Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. You can change gear yourself using the steering
wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be
Drive program C (Comfort) in position h to do this.
Depending on which steering wheel paddle
Drive program C is characterized by the follow- shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission
ing: immediately shifts into the next gear down or
Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical up, if permitted.
handling characteristics. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: to use manual shift-
Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward ing, you have two options:
and reverse gears, unless the accelerator Rtemporary setting
pedal is depressed fully. Rpermanent setting
Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for
If you activate manual gearshifting, the multi-
example on slippery road surfaces.
function display will show the current gear
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the instead of transmission position h.
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
If you deactivate manual gearshifting, the gears
The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
will be shifted automatically again.
range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
Rgliding mode is not available (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles).
Z
Temporary setting
Driving and parking
X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to

position h.
X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to X Press button :.
position h. Indicator lamp ; lights up.
X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ;.
X To deactivate: press button :.
Temporary setting will be active for a certain Indicator lamp ; goes out.
amount of time. Under certain conditions the
minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the
case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun Shifting gears
phase or when driving on steep terrain.
X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ; and hold it in place.
or
X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
transmission position.
or
X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change
the drive program.
Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG

vehicles) X To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ;.
! In manual mode, the automatic transmis- The automatic transmission shifts up to the
sion does not shift up automatically even next gear.
when the engine limiting speed for the current
If the maximum engine speed on the currently
gear is reached. When the engine limiting
engaged gear is reached and you continue to
speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
accelerate, the automatic transmission auto-
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
matically shifts up in order to prevent engine
make sure that the engine speed does not
damage.
reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if the permanent
setting is activated, the automatic transmis-
sion does not shift up automatically even
gear is reached. It is essential to ensure pro-
tection against reaching the overrevving
range in the multifunction display. Always
make sure that the engine speed does not gear is reached. When the engine limiting
reach the red area of the tachometer. speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
shifter :. make sure that the engine speed does not
The automatic transmission shifts down to reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
the next gear. otherwise a risk of engine damage.
Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-
ing.
If the engine exceeds the maximum engine
Driving and parking

speed when shifting down, the automatic
transmission protects against engine damage
by not shifting down.
Shift recommendation Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi-
function display.
X When message : appears in the multifunc-
tion display, pull the right-hand steering
wheel paddle shifter.
Kickdown
The gearshift recommendations assist you in X For maximum acceleration, depress the
adopting an economical driving style. The rec- accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
display. gear depending on the engine speed.
X Shift to recommended gear ; according to X Shift back up once the desired speed is
gearshift recommendation : when shown in reached.
the multifunction display of the instrument During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using
cluster. the steering wheel paddle shifters.
If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-
Protection against reaching the over- mission shifts up to the next gear when the
revving range (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) maximum engine speed is reached. This pre-
vents the engine from overrevving.
! In manual mode, the automatic transmis- Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is only
sion does not shift up automatically even possible in the temporary setting.
Z
148 Refueling
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.
Driving and parking
is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no lon- X Stop the vehicle.
ger changes gear.
X Shift the transmission to position j.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position h or k.
If h is selected, the transmission shifts to second gear; if k is
selected, the transmission shifts to reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Transfer case Refueling

This section is only valid for vehicles with 4- Important safety notes
wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-
mitted to both axles. G WARNING
! Performance tests may only be carried out Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
or transfer case could otherwise be damaged. sion.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a
performance test. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
! Since ESP® engages automatically, the igni- and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
tion must be switched off (the SmartKey or refueling.
Start/Stop button must be in position g or
1) if
G WARNING
Rthe electrical parking brake is being tested
using a dynamometer Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
Rthe vehicle is being towed with only one There is a risk of injury.
axle raised (not permitted for vehicles with You must make sure that fuel does not come
4MATIC) into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
Otherwise, the brake system can be dam- and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
aged. vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed If you or others come into contact with fuel,
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as observe the following:
doing so will damage the transmission.
RWash away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
Refueling 149
clean water. Seek medical assistance with- ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
out delay. fuel system.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
ing. paintwork.
RImmediately change out of clothing which ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.
has come into contact with fuel. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system
could otherwise be blocked by particles from
Driving and parking

the fuel can.
G WARNING
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
explosion. (Y page 364).
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is Refueling
thereby discharged.
General information
Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu- Pay attention to the important safety notes
eling process. otherwise electrostatic charge (Y page 148).
could build up again.
If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside,
G WARNING the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed in
the instrument cluster 8. The arrow next to
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
When the engine is running, exhaust system Opening the fuel filler flap
components could overheat without being
noticed. There is a risk of fire.
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline
with diesel fuel.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
: To open the fuel filler flap
completely.
; To insert the fuel filler cap
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with a = Tire pressure table
diesel engine. Do not switch on the ignition if ? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled
you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a
qualified specialist workshop and have the
fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
Z
150 Refueling
X Switch off the engine. Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function out.
or KEYLESS‑GO Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is
designed for refueling at diesel filling pumps.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
u. This is the same as the key having been Closing the fuel filler flap
removed.
X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
Driving and parking
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of

clockwise until it engages audibly.
arrow :.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-
remove it. cle.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the
inside of fuel filler flap ;. 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
sage appears in the multifunction display
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and (Y page 242).
refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
Refueling 151
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the G WARNING
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
Driving and parking

or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO
The vehicle electronics are now in position u. This is the same as
the key having been removed.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The engine does not The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely
start. dry.
X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 l) of diesel.
X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (Y page 132).
X Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs
smoothly.
If the engine does not start:
X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds
(Y page 132).
X Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds until it
runs smoothly.
If the engine does not start after three attempts:
The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 77).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 79).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.
DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only) When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, the
Check Additive See Owner's Manual mes-
General notes sage is shown in the multifunction display.
If you drive the vehicle faster than 10 mph
To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas after- (16 km/h) after topping up, the Check Addi‐
treatment must be operated with the reducing tive See Owner's Manual message goes out
agent DEF. after approximately one minute.
Z
152 Refueling
When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, the DEF must not come into contact with your skin,
Remaining Starts: 16 message is shown in eyes or clothing and must not be swallowed.
the multifunction display. Keep DEF away from children.
The Remaining Starts: 16 message in the If you or other persons come into contact with
multifunction display indicates how many more DEF, observe the following:
times you can start the vehicle. If DEF is not RRinse DEF from your skin immediately with
refilled, you will subsequently be unable to soap and water.
start the engine.
RIf DEF comes into contact with your eyes,
If the 10 starts display message is shown and a
Driving and parking
immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean

warning tone also sounds, then the DEF system water. Seek medical assistance without
is malfunctioning. Have the DEF system delay.
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. RIf DEF has been swallowed, rinse your mouth
X Add at least 1.3 gal (5.0 l) of DEF. out immediately. Drink plenty of water. Seek
X Switch on the ignition for at least 60 seconds. medical assistance without delay.
X Start the engine. RChange out of clothing contaminated with
DEF immediately.
i Have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. ! Only use DEF in accordance with
ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with
Use the special DEF refill bottle when adding DEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. This
DEF between maintenance intervals. Contact an may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center with any treatment system.
questions or, if necessary, contact Roadside
Assistance (Y page 29). ! The vehicle must be parked on level ground
If the outside temperature is below 12 ‡ (Ò11 †) to fill the DEF tank. The DEF tank can only be
it may be difficult to top up. If DEF is frozen and filled as intended with the vehicle parked on a
there is an active warning indicator, it may not level surface. This avoids false level readings.
be possible to add DEF. Park the vehicle in a Filling the tank is not permitted if the vehicle
warmer place, e.g. in a garage, until DEF has is not parked on a level surface. There is a
become fluid again. It will then be possible to danger of overfilling, which could result in
add DEF again. Alternatively, have the DEF tank damage to components of the BlueTEC
refilled at a qualified specialist workshop. exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Further information about BlueTEC exhaust gas ! Rinse surfaces that have come into contact
aftertreatment and DEF is available at any with DEF immediately with water or remove
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. DEF using a damp cloth and cold water. If the
DEF has already crystallized, use a sponge
Important safety notes and cold water to clean it. DEF residues crys-
tallize after time and contaminate the affec-
DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas ted surfaces.
aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:
! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be
Rnot poisonous
added to the fuel tank. If DEF is added to the
Rcolorless and odorless fuel tank, this can lead to engine damage.
Rnot flammable
Have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified special-
When you open the DEF container, small ist workshop. However, you can also refill the
amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. DEF tank:
Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are Rat a gas station with a DEF filling pump
particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous
Rwith DEF refill bottles
membranes and to the eyes. You may experi-
ence a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and Rwith a DEF refill canister
throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are When the pump nozzle switches off automati-
possible. cally during filling at a filling pump, the DEF tank
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank has been completely filled. Do not fill the DEF
only in well-ventilated areas. tank any further. DEF may leak out.
Refueling 153
To avoid transporting already opened refill con-

tainers in the vehicle, completely empty refill
bottles or canisters when filling the DEF tank, if
possible.
For further information on DEF, see
(Y page 367).
Opening/closing the DEF filler cap
Driving and parking

X Unscrew the cap from the opening on top of
DEF refill canister ;.
X Place disposable hose : on the opening of
DEF refill canister ; and screw it on clock-
wise until hand-tight.
Disposable hose : remains closed until you
fasten disposable hose : to the DEF filler
neck of the vehicle.
X To open:switch the ignition off.
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
X Turn blue DEF filler cap ; counter-clockwise
and remove it.
DEF filler cap ; is secured with a plastic
strip.
X To close: place DEF filler cap ; on the filler
neck and turn it clockwise.
X To close the fuel filler flap, press it in the
direction of arrow :. X Place disposable hose : on the filler neck on
X Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h). the vehicle and screw it on clockwise until
The Refill AdBlue See Operator’s Man‐ hand-tight. When you feel resistance, dispos-
ual message goes out after approximately able hose : is sufficiently secured.
one minute. X Lift up and tip DEF refill canister ;.
If the Refill AdBlue See Operator’s Man‐ Filling stops when the DEF tank is completely
ual message continues to be shown in the mul- filled. Do not fill the DEF tank any further. DEF
tifunction display, you must add more DEF. refill canister ; can be removed when it has
been only partially emptied.
i The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked X Turn disposable hose : on the filler neck of
automatically when you unlock or lock the
the vehicle counter-clockwise and remove it.
vehicle.
X Turn disposable hose : on the opening of
DEF refill canister ; counter-clockwise and
DEF refill canisters remove it.
! Do not screw the disposable hose on too X Reseal DEF refill canister ; with the cap.
tight. The disposable hose could otherwise be DEF refill canisters are available at many gas
damaged and DEF may leak out. stations or at a qualified specialist workshop.
DEF refill canisters are often sold with a filler
hose. A filler hose that does not exactly fit the
vehicle's DEF tank offers no protection against
Z
154 Parking
overfilling. DEF may leak if overfilled. Mercedes- Parking

Benz offers a special disposable hose with over-
fill protection. You can obtain this from any Important safety notes
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. DEF is avail-
able in a variety of containers and receptacles. G WARNING
Only use the disposable hose with the Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
Mercedes-Benz DEF refill canisters.
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
DEF refill bottle
Driving and parking
gas flow. There is a risk of fire.

! Only screw on the DEF refill bottle hand- Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
tight. Otherwise, the thread of the DEF refill rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-
bottle could be damaged and DEF could leak
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to
out.
park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
X Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refill
bottle :. ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
X Place DEF refill bottle : on the filler neck as an accident and injury.
shown and screw it on clockwise until hand- When leaving the vehicle, always take the
tight. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
X Press DEF refill bottle : towards the filler leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
neck.
The DEF tank is filled. This may take up to one ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against
minute. rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-
When DEF refill bottle : is no longer pressed, etrain could be damaged.
filling stops and the bottle may be taken off To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
again after being only partially emptied. rolling away unintentionally:
X Release DEF refill bottle :.
Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.
X Turn DEF refill bottle : counter-clockwise
Rthe transmission must be in position j and
and remove it.
the SmartKey must be removed from the igni-
X Screw the protective cap onto DEF refill bot-
tion lock.
tle : again.
Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the
DEF refill bottles are available at many gas sta- curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.
tions or at a qualified specialist workshop. Refill Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at the
bottles without a threaded cap do not provide front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for
overfill protection. DEF may leak if overfilled. example, on uphill or downhill gradients.
Mercedes Benz offers special refill bottles with a
Ron uphill or downhill gradients the laden vehi-
threaded seal. These are available at any author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center. cle must also be secured at the rear axle, for
example with a wheel chock or similar object.
Parking 155
Switching off the engine X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
Important safety notes X Engage neutral i.
X Release the brake pedal.
G WARNING X Release the electric parking brake.
The automatic transmission switches to neu- X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
tral position N when you switch off the engine. in the ignition lock.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an The engine can be switched off in an emergency
Driving and parking

accident. while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and
After switching off the engine, always switch holding the Start/Stop button for three sec-
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- onds. This function operates independently of
the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
function.
brake.
Vehicles with automatic transmission Electric parking brake

X Apply the electric parking brake. General notes
X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to G WARNING
position u in the ignition lock and remove it. If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
The immobilizer is activated. cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
X With the Start/Stop button: press the
Start/Stop button (Y page 133).
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
the instrument cluster go out. parking position P.
When the driver's door is closed, this corre- Rstart the engine.
sponds to key position 1. When the driver's
door is open, this corresponds to key position In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
u, "Key removed". ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
If you switch the engine off with the transmis- an accident and injury.
sion in position k or h the automatic trans- When leaving the vehicle, always take the
mission shifts to i automatically. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv- leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
er's door or the front-passenger door or remove
the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic The function of the electric parking brake is
transmission shifts to j automatically. dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in
the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the system, it may not be possible to apply the
the automatic transmission shifts to j auto- released parking brake.
matically. X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on
If you want the automatic transmission to level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling
remain in neutral i, for example, when having away.
the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash X Shift the transmission to position j.
with a towing system:
It may not be possible to release an applied
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS- parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or
GO start function: remove the Start/Stop there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a
button from the ignition lock. qualified specialist workshop.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The electric parking brake performs a function
X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. test at regular intervals while the engine is
Z
156 Parking
switched off. The sounds that can be heard while The electric parking brake is also engaged auto-
this is occurring are normal. matically if:
RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a
Applying or releasing manually standstill or
Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
tionary
RActive Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle
stationary
Driving and parking
In addition, at least one of the following condi-

tions must be fulfilled:
Rthe engine is switched off
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened
Rthere is a system malfunction
Rthe power supply is insufficient
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period
X To apply: push handle :.
When the electric parking brake is applied, The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument
the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada cluster lights up.
only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru- The electric parking brake is not automatically
ment cluster. engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO
The electric parking brake can also be applied start/stop function.
when the SmartKey is removed.
X To release: pull handle :. Releasing automatically
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada Your vehicle's electric parking brake is auto-
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster matically released if all of the following condi-
goes out. tions are met:
The electric parking brake can only be released: Rthe seat belt has been fastened.
Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the Rthe engine is running.
ignition lock (Y page 132) or Rthe transmission is in position h or k and
Rif the ignition was switched on using the you accelerate.
Start/Stop button
or
you shift from transmission position j to
Applying automatically position h or k. You will need to accelerate
The electric parking brake is automatically more on steeper gradients.
applied when the transmission is in position j If the transmission is in position k the tailgate
and: must be closed.
Rthe engine is switched off or If your seat belt is not fastened, the following
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
conditions must be fulfilled to automatically
release the electric parking brake:
driver's door is opened
Rthe driver's door is closed.
To prevent the electric parking brake from being
Ryou are shifting out of transmission position
automatically applied, pull handle :.
j or you have previously driven faster than
2 mph (3 km/h).
Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator
pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parking
brake will be released and the vehicle will start
to move.
Driving tips 157
Emergency braking more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk

The vehicle can also be braked during an emer- of an accident.
gency by using the electric parking brake. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
X While driving, push handle : of the electric
parking brake (Y page 156). G WARNING
The vehicle is braked as long as you keep If you operate mobile communication equip-
handle : of the electric parking brake
depressed. The longer electric parking brake ment while driving, you will be distracted from
Driving and parking

handle : is depressed, the greater the brak- traffic conditions. You could also lose control
ing force. of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
During braking: Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
Ra warning tone sounds is stationary.
Rthe Please Release Parking Brake mes-
Observe the legal requirements for the country
sage appears in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-
Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada hibit the driver from using a mobile phone while
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster driving a vehicle.
flashes If you make a call while driving, always use
When the vehicle has been braked to a stand- hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
still, the electric parking brake is engaged. when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
before operating the telephone.
Parking the vehicle for a long period Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by ond.
exhaustive discharging.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six Drive sensibly – save fuel
weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
result of lack of use. Observe the following tips to save fuel:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek X The tires should always be inflated to the rec-
advice. ommended tire pressure.
X Remove unnecessary loads.
i You can obtain information about trickle
X Remove roof racks when they are not needed.
chargers from a qualified specialist work-
shop. X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
X Have all maintenance work carried out as
Driving tips indicated by the service intervals in the Main-
tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-
General driving tips play.
Important safety notes Fuel consumption also increases when driving in
cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-
G WARNING rain.
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
Drinking and driving
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, G WARNING
for example, the power steering and the brake Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
boosting effect. You will require considerably driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
Z
158 Driving tips
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-

ment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
dent is greatly increased when you drink or
take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
Driving and parking
ing drugs.
Emission control
: Acceleration
G WARNING ; Coasting
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust = Constant
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling ? Additional range achieved
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start and
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave represents the additional range achieved since
the engine running in enclosed spaces with- the beginning of the journey as a result of an
out sufficient ventilation. adapted driving style.
If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve
Certain engine systems are designed to keep range, the Reserve Fuel display message is
the level of poisonous components in exhaust shown instead of range ? in the multifunction
fumes within legal limits. display. The 8 warning lamp in the instru-
These systems only work at peak efficiency if ment cluster also lights up (Y page 263).
they are serviced exactly in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications. Always have
work on the engine carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work
relevant to safety or on safety-related systems
must be carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The engine settings must not be changed under
any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific
service work must be carried out at regular
intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-
Benz service requirements. Details can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.
ECO display
The ECO display shows you how economical
your driving style is. The ECO display assists you
in achieving the most economical driving style
for the selected settings and prevailing condi-
tions. Your driving style can significantly influ-
ence the vehicle's consumption.
Driving tips 159
The ECO display consists of three sections, with In addition to driving style, the actual consump-
an inner and outer area. The sections corre- tion is affected by other factors, such as:
spond to the following three categories: Rload
: Acceleration (evaluation of all accel- RTire pressure

eration processes): RCold start
Rthe outer area fills up and the inner RChoice of route

area lights up green: moderate RActive electrical consumers
acceleration, especially at higher These factors are not included in the ECO dis-
Driving and parking

speeds play.
Rthe outer area empties and the An economical driving style specially requires
inner area is gray: sporty acceler- driving at moderate engine speeds.
ation Achieving a higher value in the categories
; Coasting (evaluation of all decelera- "Acceleration" and "Constant":
tion processes): Robserve the gearshift recommendations
Rthe outer area fills up and the inner Rdrive using drive program E
area lights up green: anticipatory On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the
driving, keeping your distance and highway, only the outer area for "constant" will
early release of the accelerator. change.
The vehicle can coast without use The ECO display summarizes the driving style
of the brakes. from the start of the journey to its completion.
Rthe outer area empties and the Therefore, there are more marked changes in
inner area is gray: frequent heavy the outer areas at the start of a journey. On lon-
braking ger journeys, there are fewer changes. For more
marked changes, perform a manual rest
= Constant(continuous evaluation (Y page 214).
over the entire journey):
For further information on the ECO display, see
Rthe outer area fills up and the inner (Y page 213).
area lights up green: constant
speed and avoidance of unneces-
sary acceleration and deceleration
Braking
Rthe outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: fluctuations in Important safety notes
speed
G WARNING
The three inner areas display the current driving If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
style and light up green as a result of a particu- an attempt to increase the engine's braking
larly economical driving style. Depending on the effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
driving situation, up to two areas may light up
simultaneously. There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
At the beginning of the journey, the three outer
areas are empty and fill up as a result of eco- Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
nomical driving. A higher level indicates a more ing on a slippery road surface.
economical driving style. If the three outer areas
are completely filled at the same time, the driver
has adopted the most economical driving style Downhill gradients
for the selected settings and prevailing condi- ! On long and steep gradients, you must
tions. The ECO display border lights up. reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a
The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel lower gear in good time. This allows you to
consumption. The additionally achieved range take advantage of the engine's braking effect.
displayed under Bonus fr. Start does not This helps you to avoid overheating the
indicate a fixed consumption reduction. brakes and wearing them out excessively.
Z
160 Driving tips
When you take advantage of engine braking, a RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the
drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. brakes occasionally while paying attention to
on a slippery road surface. This could cause the traffic conditions.
damage to the drive train. This type of damage RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war- beginning and end of a journey.
ranty. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Heavy and light loads
Servicing the brakes
Driving and parking
G WARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while ! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:
driving, the braking system can overheat. This Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in
increases the stopping distance and can even the instrument cluster and
cause the braking system to fail. There is a Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is
risk of an accident. running
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never Observe additional warning messages in the
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator multifunction display.
pedal at the same time. The brake fluid level may be too low due to
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly Have the brake system checked immediately.
results in excessive and premature wear to Consult a qualified specialist workshop to
the brake pads. arrange this.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive formance tests may only be carried out on a 2-
on for a short while. This allows the airflow to axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate the
cool the brakes more quickly. vehicle on such a dynamometer, please con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop in
Wet roads advance. You could otherwise damage the
drive train or the brake system.
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
without braking, there may be a delayed reac- ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: the ESP® system
tion from the brakes when braking for the first operates automatically. If the electric parking
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has brake is tested on a brake dynamometer, the
been washed or driven through deep water. engine and ignition must be switched off: turn
the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position
You have to depress the brake pedal more u or 1 or press the Start/Stop button
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the repeatedly in accordance with the given
vehicle in front. SmartKey positions.
After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle
Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may
washed, brake firmly while paying attention to
cause severe damage to the brake system.
the traffic conditions. This will warm up the
brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly All checks and maintenance work on the brake
and protecting them against corrosion. system must be carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Limited braking performance on salt- Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
treated roads replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the brake system has only been subject to
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi- moderate loads, you should test the functional-
due may form on the brake discs and brake ity of your brakes at regular intervals.
pads. This can result in a significantly longer Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 65)
braking distance. and BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) (Y page 66).
Driving tips 161
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Ravoid sudden steering movements

mends only installing the following brake disks Rbrake carefully
and brake pads/linings:
Rbrake disks that have been approved by
Driving on flooded roads
Mercedes-Benz
Rbrake pads/linings that have been approved ! Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in front
by Mercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalent or in the opposite direction create waves. This
standard of quality may cause the maximum permissible water
Other brake disks or brake pads/linings can depth to be exceeded.
Driving and parking

compromise the safety of your vehicle. Failure to observe these notes may result in
Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/ damage to the engine, electrical systems and
linings on an axle at the same time. Always transmission.
install new brake pads/linings when replacing If you have to drive on stretches of road on which
brake disks. water has collected, please bear in mind that:
The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brake Rin the case of standing water, the water level
disks to which the wheel assembly with rim and may be no higher than the lower edge of the
threaded connection is matched. vehicle body
The use of brake disks other than those Ryou should drive no faster than walking pace
approved by Mercedes-Benz can change the
track width and is subject to approval, if appli-
cable.
Winter driving
Shock-type loads when handling the brake
discs, such as when changing wheels, can lead G WARNING
to a reduction in comfort when driving with light-
weight brake discs. Avoid shock-type loads on If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
the lightweight brake disks, particularly on the an attempt to increase the engine's braking
brake plate. effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use There is an increased danger of skidding and
brake fluid that has been specially approved for accidents.
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre-
sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
fluid which has not been approved for ing on a slippery road surface.
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an
equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's G DANGER
operating safety. If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
Driving on wet roads
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
Hydroplaning becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
fatal injury.
If water has accumulated to a certain depth on
the road surface, there is a danger of hydro- If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
planing occurring, even if: running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
Ryou drive at low speeds
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth
window on the side of the vehicle that is not
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in
conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, facing into the wind.
you must drive in the following manner:
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
Rlower your speed specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Ravoid ruts Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-
faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and
Z
162 Driving systems
braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise con- gear in good time on long and steep downhill
trol or DISTRONIC PLUS. gradients. This is especially important if the
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing so,
stopped when moving at low speed: you will make use of the braking effect of the
engine. This relieves the load on the brake sys-
X Shift the transmission to position i. tem and prevents the brakes from overheating
The outside temperature indicator is not and wearing too quickly.
designed to serve as an ice-warning device and Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady
Driving and parking
Changes in the outside temperature are dis- speed for a prolonged period. You can store any
played after a short delay. road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing
point do not guarantee that the road surface is Important safety notes
free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in
wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could Cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an
skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor
adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to override the laws of physics. Cruise control can-
suit the prevailing weather conditions. not take into account the road, traffic and
You should pay special attention to road condi- weather conditions. Cruise control is only an
tions when temperatures are around freezing aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe
point. distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
For more information on driving with snow lane.
chains, see (Y page 338).
Do not use cruise control:
For more information on driving with summer
tires, see (Y page 338). Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec- allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
tion (Y page 338). heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
Driving systems
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno- driver of the speed stored.
vative driver assistance and safety systems
which enhance comfort and support the driver in i The speed indicated in the speedometer
critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi- may differ slightly from the speed stored.
nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile-
stone on the path towards autonomous driving. Cruise control lever
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all
elements of active and passive safety in one well
thought out system – for the safety of the vehi-
cle occupants and that of other road users.
Further information on driving safety systems
(Y page 64).
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road speed
for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid : Activates or increases speed
exceeding the set speed. Change into a lower ; Activates or reduces speed
Driving systems 163
= Deactivates cruise control Setting a speed

? Activates at the current speed/last stored
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
speed until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
When you activate cruise control, the stored the speed set.
speed is shown in the multifunction display for X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
five seconds. The é symbol appears on the higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
multifunction display.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
Speedometer with segments: when cruise ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
Driving and parking

control is activated, the segments from the the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
stored speed to the end of the scale light up. the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
Storing and maintaining the current up : or down ; the last speed stored is
speed increased or reduced.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
You can store the current speed if you are driv- ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press
ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). the cruise control lever up : or down ;
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. beyond the pressure point.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
down ;. up : or down ; the last speed stored is
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. increased or reduced.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto- i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
matically maintains the stored speed. depress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-
ate to overtake, cruise control adjusts the
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The you have finished overtaking.
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the Deactivating cruise control
stored speed on downhill gradients by auto-
matically applying the brakes. There are several ways to deactivate cruise con-
trol:
Storing the current speed or calling up X Briefly press the cruise control lever forward
the last stored speed =.
or
G WARNING X Brake.
If you call up the stored speed and it is lower
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
than the current speed, the vehicle deceler-
Ryou engage the electric parking brake
ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h)
vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There
is a risk of an accident. RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Ryou shift the transmission to position i
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
while driving
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
do not know the stored speed, store the If cruise control is deactivated, a warning tone
sounds. You will see the Cruise Control Off
desired speed again. message in the multifunction display for approx-
imately five seconds. The message on the mul-
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards tifunction display disappears and the segments
you ?. on the speedometer go out.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it i When you switch off the engine, the last
stores the current speed or regulates the speed stored is cleared.
speed of the vehicle to the previously stored
speed.
Z
164 Driving systems
DISTRONIC PLUS 2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may
General notes cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and auto- will void any warranties, and is not permitted.
matically helps you maintain the distance from Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detec- approved way.
ted with the aid of the radar sensor system.
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the
Driving and parking
the set speed is not exceeded.

equipment.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially
important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you Important safety notes
will make use of the braking effect of the engine.
This relieves the load on the brake system and G WARNING
prevents the brakes from overheating and wear- DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:
ing too quickly.
Rpeople or animals
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of
a collision, you will be warned visually and Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a ped or parked vehicles
collision without your intervention. An intermit- Roncoming and crossing traffic
tent warning tone will then sound and the dis-
tance warning lamp will light up in the instru- As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give
ment cluster. Brake immediately in order to warnings nor intervene in such situations.
increase the distance to the vehicle in front or There is a risk of an accident.
take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the speed range uation and be ready to brake.
between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph
(200 km/h).
G WARNING
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on
roads with steep gradients. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it tify other road users and complex traffic sit-
can resemble the radar detectors of the respon- uations.
sible authorities. You can refer to the relevant In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions
are asked about this. Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
i USA only: This device has been approved by
the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The Rneither give a warning nor intervene
radar sensor is intended for use in an auto- Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly
motive radar system only. Removal, tamper- There is a risk of an accident.
ing, or altering of the device will void any war-
ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- brake, in particular when warned to do so by
approved way. DISTRONIC PLUS.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the G WARNING
equipment.
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up
i Canada only: This device complies with to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration.
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC
subject to the following two conditions: PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is
1. This device may not cause interference, a risk of an accident.
and
Driving systems 165
In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and This speed may:
try to take evasive action. Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or
an exit lane
! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func- Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-
tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat- cles driving on the left (left-hand drive coun-
ically in certain situations. tries)
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in cles driving on the right (in countries where
Driving and parking

the following or similar situations: they drive on the left)
Rwhen towing the vehicle If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
Rin the car wash driver of the speed stored.
DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of
an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style
Cruise control lever
nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC
PLUS cannot take account of road, weather and
traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an
aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
lane.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose : Activates or increases speed
traction and the vehicle could then skid ; Activates or reduces speed
Rin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or = Deactivates DISTRONIC PLUS
snow ? Activates at the current speed/last stored
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi- speed
cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi- A Sets a specified minimum distance
cles driving on a different line. When you activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the stored
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be speed appears in the multifunction display for
impaired if: five seconds.
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else Speedometer with segments: when
covering the sensors DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the segments
Rthere is snow or heavy rain from the stored speed to the end of the scale or
Rthere is interference by other radar sources to a permanently set speed limit light up.
ple in parking garages Activating DISTRONIC PLUS
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle
in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedly Activation conditions
accelerate the vehicle to the stored speed. To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following con-
ditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to
two minutes of driving before DISTRONIC
PLUS is ready for use.
Rthe electric parking brake must be released.
RESP® must be activated, but not intervening
at present.
Z
166 Driving systems
RActive Parking Assist must not be activated. erwise, it sets the vehicle speed to the previ-
Rthe transmission must be in position h. ously stored value.
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
shift the transmission from position j to h Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
or your seat belt must be fastened.
Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors must Pulling away and driving
be closed. X If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC
Rthe vehicle must not slide. PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal.
Driving and parking
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

Activating
you ?.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards or
you ? or push it up : or down ;.
X Accelerate briefly.
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
The vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to
that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is
The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired the stored speed.
stored speed.
If you do not fully release the accelerator The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing
pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Suspended mes- an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-
sage appears on the multifunction display. ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle then
The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in brakes automatically.
front will then not be maintained. You will be If DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a vehicle in
driving at the speed you determine by the front, the system operates like a cruise control.
position of the accelerator pedal. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in
You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when front is driving slower, your vehicle brakes. In
stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is this way, the specified minimum distance you
20 mph (30 km/h). have selected is maintained.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in
you ? or push it up : or down ;. front is driving faster, your vehicle accelerates
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. to the stored speed.
Selects the drive program
Activating at the current speed/last
DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving style
stored speed when you have selected the S or S+ driving pro-
G WARNING gram (Y page 144). Acceleration behind the
If you call up the stored speed and it differs vehicle in front or to the set speed is then notice-
ably more dynamic. If you have selected the C or
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler- E driving program, the vehicle accelerates more
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the gently. This setting is recommended in stop-
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or and-start traffic.
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Changing lanes
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- DISTRONIC PLUS aids you when switching to
the overtaking lane, if:
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
do not know the stored speed, store the Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h)
desired speed again. Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal

RDISTRONIC PLUS does not currently detect a
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards danger of a collision
you ?. If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it changing lanes takes too long or if the distance
is activated, the current speed is stored. Oth-
Driving systems 167
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the trans-
becomes too small. mission is shifted automatically to position j,
When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS mon- if:
itors the left lane (on left-hand-drive vehicles) or Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
the right lane (on right-hand-drive vehicles). driver's door is open.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
Stopping
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
G WARNING function.
Driving and parking

When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: automatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated
when the vehicle is stationary and:
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
Ra system malfunction occurs.
the voltage supply.
Rthe power supply is insufficient.
RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated
If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may
with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi- also be shifted to position j automatically.
cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.
Rthe electrical system in the engine com- Setting a speed
partment, the battery or the fuses have
X Push the cruise control lever up : for a
been tampered with.
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
Rthe battery is disconnected. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, ments (1 km/h increments): briefly push
e.g. by a vehicle occupant. the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off up : or down ; the last speed stored is
DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle increased or reduced.
against rolling away. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly push
For further information on deactivating the cruise control lever up : or down ;
DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 169). beyond the pressure point.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
front has stopped, it will cause your vehicle to up : or down ;, the last speed stored is
brake and come to a halt. increased or reduced.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta- i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC
tionary and you do not need to depress the PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed back to the
brake. last speed stored after you have finished over-
After a time, the electric parking brake secures taking.
the vehicle and relieves the service brake.
Depending on the specified minimum distance, Setting a specified minimum distance
your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi-
cient distance behind the vehicle in front. The You can set the specified minimum distance for
specified minimum distance is set using the DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
control on the cruise control lever. between one and two seconds. With this func-
tion, you can set the minimum distance that
DISTRONIC PLUS maintains to the vehicle in
front, depending on the driving speed. You can
see this distance in the multifunction display
(Y page 168).
Make sure that you maintain the minimum dis-
tance to the vehicle in front as required by law.
Z
168 Driving systems
Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if nec- Displays in the assistance graphic
essary.
Driving and parking
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deac-

X To increase: turn control ; in direction =. tivated
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater : Vehicle in front, if detected
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ; Distance indicator, current distance to the
in front. vehicle in front
X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :. = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter in front; adjustable
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ? Own vehicle
in front.
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru-

ment cluster
Displays in the speedometer
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-

ted
: DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears
when the cruise control lever is actuated)
; Vehicle in front, if detected
= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, in front; adjustable
the segments between the speed of the vehicle ? Own vehicle
in front : and stored speed ; light up. X To call up the assistance graphic:select the
Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus Assistance Graphic function using the on-
package: the segments likewise light up if a board computer (Y page 219).
vehicle in front is detected in the fast lane. The multifunction display will show the stored
For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speed for about five seconds when you acti-
speedometer may differ slightly from the speed vate DISTRONIC PLUS.
set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
Driving systems 169
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the
ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles
when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may
Driving and parking

brake unexpectedly or late.
RDriving on a different line: DISTRONIC PLUS
may not detect vehicles which are not driving
in the middle of their lane. The distance to the
vehicle in front will be too short.
There are several ways to deactivate ROther vehicles changing lane: DISTRONIC
DISTRONIC PLUS: PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in
X Briefly push the cruise control lever
yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too
short.
forward :.
RNarrow vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS does not
or
detect the vehicle in front on the edge of the
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary road because of its narrow width. The dis-
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, the tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
DISTRONIC PLUS Off message will appear in RObstacles and stationary vehicles:
the multifunction display for approximately five DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-
seconds. cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
The last speed stored remains stored until you detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an
switch off the engine. obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC
DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you PLUS will not brake for these.
depress the accelerator pedal. RCrossing vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS may mis-
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated takenly detect vehicles that are crossing your
if: lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic
lights with crossing traffic, for example, could
Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the cause your vehicle to pull away unintention-
vehicle is automatically secured with the elec- ally.
tric parking brake In such situations, brake if necessary.
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.
Ryou shift the transmission to position j, k
or i DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you and Stop&Go Pilot
in order to pull away and the front-passenger
door or one of the rear doors is open General notes
Rthe vehicle slips
RYou activate Active Parking Assist
If, under these circumstances, DISTRONIC
PLUS is deactivated, a warning tone sounds. The
DISTRONIC PLUS Off message then appears
on the multifunction display for approximately
five seconds.
Z
170 Driving systems
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave
Stop&Go Pilot helps you keep the vehicle in the the lane.
center of the lane by means of moderate steer- The system may be impaired or may not function
ing interventions in a speed range from if:
0–125 mph (0–200 km/h).
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,
means of multifunction camera :, at the top of fog or spray
the windshield.
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h),
Driving and parking
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if

Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front, the road surface is wet)
taking into account lane markings, e.g. when
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
you are following vehicles in a traffic jam.
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-
At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h), ity of the camera
Steering Assist focuses on clear lane markings
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings
(left and right), only focusing on the vehicle in
front if clear lane markings are not present. for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction
work
If these conditions are not present, Steering
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide assis-
tance. ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small
DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for the
function to be available. and the lane markings thus cannot be detec-
ted
Important safety notes Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC branch off, cross one another or merge
PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot Rthe road is narrow and winding
can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on
override the laws of physics. It cannot take the roadway
account of road, weather and traffic conditions. The system is switched to passive and no longer
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and assists you by performing steering interventions
Stop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible if:
for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time Ryou actively change lane
and for staying in lane. Ryou switch on the turn signal
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Ryou take your hands off the steering wheel or
Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traffic do not steer for a prolonged period of time
conditions and does not detect all road users. If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated
you are following a vehicle which is driving again automatically after a lane change is com-
towards the edge of the road, your vehicle could pleted.
come into contact with the curb or other road Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro-
boundaries. Be particularly aware of other road vide any support:
users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly next to your
vehicle. Ron very sharp corners
Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane or Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire
projecting out into the lane are not detected. has been detected and displayed
An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after Pay attention also to the important safety notes
intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 164).
corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the The steering interventions are carried out with a
opposite direction. limited steering moment. The system requires
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and the driver to keep his hands on the steering
Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your wheel and to steer himself.
vehicle in lane. In some cases, steering inter- If you do not steer yourself or if you take your
vention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle back hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged
to the lane. In such cases, you must steer the period of time, the system will first alert you with
Driving systems 171
a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go
appears in the multifunction display. If you have Pilot
still not started to steer and have not taken hold
X Press button ;.
of the steering wheel after five seconds at the
latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you Indicator lamp : goes out. The DTR+:
to take control of the vehicle. Steering Assist Steering Assist. Off message appears in
and Stop&Go Pilot are switched to passive. the multifunction display. Steering Assist and
DISTRONIC PLUS remains active. Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated.
When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or not
Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go
Driving and parking

available, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are
Pilot deactivated automatically.
HOLD function
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
Rwhen waiting in traffic
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver
X Press button ;. having to depress the brake pedal.
Indicator lamp : lights up. The DTR+: The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
Steering Assist. On message appears in function deactivated when you depress the
the multifunction display. Steering Assist and accelerator pedal to pull away.
Stop&Go Pilot are activated.
Information in the multifunction display
G WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activa- been tampered with.
ted but is not ready for a steering intervention, Rthe battery is disconnected
steering wheel symbol : appears in gray. If the
system provides you with support by means of There is a risk of an accident.
steering interventions, symbol : is shown in If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
green. the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-

tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-
ically in certain situations.
Z
172 Driving systems
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Deactivating the HOLD function

DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or similar situations: The HOLD function is deactivated automatically
if:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Ryou depress the accelerator and the trans-
Rin the car wash
mission is in position h or k
Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 172). Rthe transmission is in position j
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer-
Activation conditions tain amount of pressure until display ë
Driving and parking
You can activate the HOLD function if all of the disappears from the multifunction display
following conditions are fulfilled: Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric park-
ing brake
Rthe vehicle is stationary.
Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS
Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop After a time, the electric parking brake secures
function. the vehicle and relieves the service brake.
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is
When the HOLD function is activated, the trans-
fastened. mission is shifted automatically to position j
if:
Rthe electric parking brake is released.
Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
Rthe transmission is in position h, k or i.
driver's door is open.
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
Activating the HOLD function function.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if the HOLD function is activated
when the vehicle is stationary and:
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is insufficient.
If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may
also be shifted to position j automatically.
AIR BODY CONTROL

General notes
X Make sure that the activation conditions are
met. AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system
X Depress the brake pedal. with variable damping for improved driving com-
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
fort. All-round level control ensures the best
possible suspension and constant ground clear-
until : appears in the multifunction display.
ance, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive
The HOLD function is activated. You can
fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to
release the brake pedal.
improve driving safety and to reduce fuel con-
If depressing the brake pedal the first time does sumption. There is also the option to manually
not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and adjust the vehicle level. AIR BODY CONTROL
then try again. consists of level setting, level control and the
ADS Adaptive Damping System.
The vehicle level can be set using the DYNAMIC
SELECT switch (Y page 139) or the level button
(Y page 173). The setting always corresponds
to the last selected function.
Driving systems 173
Important safety notes The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:

Rdrive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h)
G WARNING
Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a
When the vehicle is being lowered, people speed above 50 mph (80 km/h)
could become trapped if their limbs are The "Raised level" remains active when you are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or not driving within these speed ranges.
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury. Setting the normal vehicle level
Driving and parking

Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
X Start the engine.
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches If indicator lamp ; is lit:
when the vehicle is being lowered. X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is
i If one of the doors is open, the vehicle is not adjusted to the height of the currently selec-
lowered. ted drive program (Y page 139).
Vehicle level Suspension tuning

Setting the raised vehicle level General notes
The Adaptive Damping System automatically
controls the calibration of the dampers.
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
and depends on:
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps
Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or com-
fort
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Sports tuning
It is possible to choose between the "Normal"
and "Raised" vehicle levels below a speed of In the "Sport" and "Sport Plus" drive programs,
50 mph (80 km/h). Select the "Normal" setting the firmer suspension setting ensures even bet-
for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving ter contact with the road. Select this mode when
with snow chains or on particularly poor road employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding
surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if country roads.
you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Select the S or S+ drive program with the
X Start the engine. DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 139).
The vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) com-
If indicator lamp ; is not lit: pared to the normal level.
XPress button :. Each time you restart the engine, the vehicle is
Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle is raised to normal level again and drive program C
raised by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the is activated. For further information about start-
normal level. ing the engine, see (Y page 133).
The Vehicle Rising message appears on
the multifunction display. Comfort tuning
i The message disappears after ten seconds, In the "Eco" and "Comfort" drive programs, the
irrespective of the level reached. If necessary, driving characteristics of your vehicle are more
the vehicle is raised further. comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you
favor a more comfortable driving style. Select
Z
174 Driving systems
comfort mode also when driving fast on straight The vehicle is raised by 1.5 in (40 mm).
roads, e.g. on straight stretches of highway. i The vehicle is automatically set to the level
X Select the E or C drive program with the of the most recently selected drive program
DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 139). (Y page 139) if you drive faster than 1 mph
The vehicle is raised to the normal level. (2 km/h).
When driving at speeds above 80 mph X If the vehicle can no longer be raised
(125 km/h), the vehicle is automatically low- when stationary: start the engine.
ered by 0.6 in (15 mm) in the E and C drive pro- The process will then be continued.
Driving and parking
grams. When driving at speeds below 50 mph If you drive off when the rear of the vehicle has
(80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again. been lowered, the Á Vehicle Rising
Please Wait message may appear on the mul-
Lowering the rear of the vehicle tifunction display.
AMG sports suspension based on AIR

BODY CONTROL (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
General notes
The electronically controlled damping system
works continuously. This improves driving
safety and ride comfort.
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
and depends on:
Lowering using the button in the left-hand-
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
side cargo compartment trim
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps
Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport+ or
X Shift the transmission to position j. Comfort
X Pull switch : briefly.
The suspension setting is adjusted using the
Indicator lamp ; flashes until the vehicle has corresponding button in the center console.
been lowered.
The vehicle is lowered by 1.5 in (40 mm). i The mode can also be set using the
When the vehicle has been lowered, indicator DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 139).
lamp ; remains lit. This is possible only if the same mode is
Lowering is interrupted if: selected for the suspension by pressing the
button on the center console for AMG sports
Ra vehicle door is opened suspension based on AIR BODY CONTROL
Rbutton : was briefly pulled again and the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. This is the
Rthe vehicle is moving faster than 1 mph case, for example, when both are set to Com-
(2 km/h) fort mode.
The vehicle is automatically set to the level of Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
the most recently selected drive program Key or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode is
(Y page 139) if you drive faster than 1 mph activated. For further information about starting
(2 km/h). the engine, see (Y page 133).
Raising the rear of the vehicle

Raising using the button in the left-hand-
side cargo compartment trim
X Pull switch : briefly.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
Driving systems 175
Sport mode X Press button : repeatedly until indicator

lamps ; and = go out.
You have selected Comfort mode.
The AMG Suspension System COMFORT mes-
sage appears on the multifunction display.
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)
Driving and parking

4MATIC ensures permanent drive for all four
wheels. Together with ESP®, it improves the
traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel
spins due to insufficient grip.
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in inattentive, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk
Sport mode ensures even better contact with of an accident nor override the laws of physics.
the road. Select this mode when employing a
sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country 4MATIC does not take into account
roads. Rthe road and weather conditions
X Press button :. Rthe traffic situation
Indicator lamp = lights up. You have selected 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for
Sport mode. the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
The AMG Suspension System SPORT mes- speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
sage appears on the multifunction display. your lane.
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
Sport + mode ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
The very firm setting of the suspension setting in RAccelerate less when driving.
Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact
with the road. Select this mode only when driv- ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.
ing on race circuits. This may damage the transfer case. Damage
If indicator lamps ; and = are off: of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must
X Press button : twice. remain either on the ground or be fully raised.
Indicator lamps ; and = light up. You have Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-
selected Sport + mode. cle with all wheels in full contact with the
The AMG Suspension System SPORT + mes- ground.
sage appears on the multifunction display.
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
If indicator lamp = lights up: effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you
X Press button : once. use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains
Second indicator lamp ; lights up. You have if necessary.
selected Sport + mode.
The AMG Suspension System SPORT + mes-
sage appears on the multifunction display. PARKTRONIC
Comfort mode
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around
your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this your vehicle using six sensors in the front
mode if you favor a more comfortable driving bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper.
style, but also when driving fast on straight PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the
roads, e.g. highways. distance between your vehicle and an object.
Z
176 Driving systems
PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-

ment for your attention to your immediate sur-
roundings. You are always responsible for safe
maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking
space. Make sure that there are no persons,
animals or objects in the maneuvering area
while maneuvering and parking in/leaving park-
ing spaces.
! When parking, pay particular attention to
Driving and parking
objects above or below the sensors, such as

flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC
does not detect such objects when they are in
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side
could damage the vehicle or the objects. (example)
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck
or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC
to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
! Remove the detachable ball coupling if the
trailer tow hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC
measures the minimum detection range to an
obstacle from the bumper, not the ball cou-
pling.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
you:
Rswitch on the ignition
Rshift the transmission to position h, k or
i
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area
when you establish an electrical connection : Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) (corners)
between your vehicle and a trailer.
; Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) (corners)
= Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) (center)
Range of the sensors ? Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) (center)
PARKTRONIC does not take objects into con- The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.
sideration that are: They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean
Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani- the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch
mals or objects. or damage them (Y page 315).
Rabove the detection range, for example over- Minimum distance
hanging loads, truck overhangs or loading
ramps. Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)
Driving systems 177
If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel- One or more segments light up as the vehicle
evant warning displays light up and a warning approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-
tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min- cle's distance from the obstacle:
imum, the distance may no longer be shown. RFrom the sixth segment, you will hear an inter-
mittent warning tone for approximately two
Warning displays seconds.
RFrom the seventh segment, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two seconds.
This indicates that you have now reached the
Driving and parking

minimum distance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-

cle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-
cle
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is in the instru-
ment cluster. The warning display for the rear
area is located on the headliner in the rear com-
partment.
The warning display for each side of the vehicle
is divided into five yellow and two red segments. d Switch on the dashboard
PARKTRONIC is operational if operational read- e Switch in the center console
iness indicator = lights up. : Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC
The selected transmission position and the ; Indicator lamp
direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter- If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is
mine which warning display is active when the deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also
engine is running. deactivated.
Transmission posi- Warning display i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
tion when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
h Front area activated the ignition lock.
k, i or the vehicle Rear and front areas

is rolling back activated
j No areas activated
Z
178 Driving systems
Problems with PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments in PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
the PARKTRONIC warn- X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-
ing displays are lit. You cialist workshop.
also hear a warning tone
for approximately two
Driving and parking
seconds.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the indi-
cator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments in The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
the PARKTRONIC warn- X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 315).
ing displays are lit.
X Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-
sound waves.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist your vehicle and the trailer, Active Parking
Assist is no longer available. PARKTRONIC is
General notes deactivated for the rear area.
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid G WARNING
with ultrasound. It measures the road on both While parking or pulling out of a parking
sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
a suitable parking space. Active steering inter-
vention and brake application can assist you onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
during parking and when exiting a parking result in a collision with another road user.
space. You may also use PARKTRONIC There is a risk of an accident.
(Y page 175). Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-
Important safety notes ing Assist parking procedure.
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi- ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp
for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a angle. Otherwise, you may damage the
parking space. Make sure that no persons, ani- wheels or tires.
mals or objects are in the maneuvering range. Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate
When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Park- parking spaces which are not suitable for park-
ing Assist is also unavailable. ing, for example:
For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch installed, the Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited
minimum length for parking spaces is slightly Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
longer. Ron unsuitable surfaces
If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you
should not use Active Parking Assist. Once the
electrical connection is established between
Driving systems 179
Parking tips: If objects are located above the detection

ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking range, stop and deactivate Active Parking
space as possible. Assist.
RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown
might be identified or measured incorrectly. For further information on the detection range
RParking spaces that are partially occupied by (Y page 176).
trailer drawbars might not be identified as Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-
such or be measured incorrectly. ing in spaces at right angles to the direction of
Driving and parking

RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking travel if:
space being measured inaccurately. Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next
RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC to one another
(Y page 177) warning messages during the Rthe parking space is directly next to a low
parking procedure. obstacle such as a low curb
RYou can intervene in the steering procedure Ryou forward-park
to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-
is then deactivated. ing in spaces that are parallel or at right angles
RWhen transporting a load which protrudes to the direction of travel if:
from your vehicle, you should not use Active
Rthe parking space is on a curb
Parking Assist.
Rthe system reads the parking space as being
RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are installed. blocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-
ing blocks
RAlways pay attention to the specified tire
Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-
pressure for your vehicle. This has a direct
influence on the parking characteristics of the ver into
vehicle. Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
Ron straight roads, not bends
Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the
pavement
Detecting parking spaces

Objects located above the height range of Active
Parking Assist will not be detected when the
parking space is measured. These are not taken
into account when the parking procedure is cal-
: Detected parking space on the left
culated, e.g. overhanging loads, truck over-
hangs or loading ramps. ; Parking symbol
= Detected parking space on the right
G WARNING
Active Parking Assist is switched on automati-
If there are objects above the detection range: cally when driving forwards. The system is
RActive Park Assist may steer too early operational at speeds of up to approximately
22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the sys-
Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these tem independently locates and measures park-
objects ing spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
You may cause a collision as a result. There is
Z
180 Driving systems
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking Rthe battery is disconnected.
spaces:
Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,
Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of
e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
travel
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and
at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and against rolling away.
at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi-
Driving and parking
cle i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,

Rat right angles to the direction of travel and at Active Parking Assist brakes automatically
least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehicle during the parking process. You are respon-
sible for braking in good time.
i Note that Active Parking Assist cannot
X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym-
measure the size of a parking space if it is at
right angles to the direction of travel. You will bol shows the desired parking space in the
need to judge whether your vehicle will fit into instrument cluster.
the parking space. X Shift the transmission to position k.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%
When driving at speeds below 19 mph message appears in the multifunction display.
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as a
X To cancel the procedure:press the %
status indicator in the instrument cluster. When
a parking space has been detected, an arrow button on the multifunction steering wheel or
towards the right or the left also appears. By pull away.
default, Active Parking Assist only displays park- or
ing spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking X To park using Active Parking Assist: press
spaces on the driver's side are displayed as the a button on the multifunction steering
soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is wheel.
activated. When parking on the driver's side, The Park Assist Active Accelerate
this must remain switched on until you acknowl- and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
edge the use of Active Parking Assist by press- sage appears in the multifunction display.
ing the a button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel. The system automatically determines X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
whether the parking space is parallel or at right X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all
angles to the direction of travel. times. When backing up, drive at a speed
A parking space is displayed while you are driv- below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-
ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft erwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled.
(15 m) away from it. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a
standstill when the vehicle approaches the
rear border of the parking space.
Parking
Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
G WARNING spaces.
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being The Park Assist Active Select D Observe
Surroundings message appears in the multi-
braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll function display.
away if:
X While the vehicle is stationary, shift the trans-
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in mission to position h.
the voltage supply. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
the other direction.
been tampered with.
Driving systems 181
The Park Assist Active Accelerate Exiting a parking space

and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display. In order that Active Parking Assist can support
you when you exit the parking space:
i You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete before Rthe border of the parking space must be high
pulling away. enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too
small, for example.
X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
Rthe border of the parking space must not be
times.
too wide. Your vehicle can be maneuvered
Driving and parking

Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a
standstill when the vehicle approaches the into a position at a maximum of 45° to the
rear border of the parking space. starting position in the parking space.
Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft
Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
spaces. (1.0 m) must be available.
Active Parking Assist can only assist you with
The Park Assist Active Select R Observe exiting a parking space if you have parked the
Surroundings message appears in the multi- vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using
function display. Active Parking Assist.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete,
the Park Assist Switched Off message i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active
appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst the
is now parked. vehicle exits the parking space. You are
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver responsible for braking in good time.
having to depress the brake pedal. The braking X Start the engine.
effect is canceled when you depress the accel- X Release the electric parking brake.
erator pedal. X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you
Active Parking Assist no longer supports you are pulling away.
with steering interventions and brake applica- X Shift the transmission to position h or k.
tions. When Active Parking Assist is finished, The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%
you must steer and brake again yourself. message appears on the multifunction dis-
PARKTRONIC is still available. play.
Parking tips: X To cancel the procedure:press the %
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park- button on the multifunction steering wheel or
ing space after parking is dependent on vari- pull away.
ous factors. These include the position and or
shape of the vehicles parked in front and
X To exit a parking space using Active Park-
behind it and the conditions of the location. It
ing Assist: press the a button on the mul-
may be the case that Active Parking Assist
guides you too far into a parking space, or not tifunction steering wheel.
far enough into it. In some cases, it may also The Park Assist Active Accelerate
lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
you should cancel the parking procedure with sage appears on the multifunction display.
Active Parking Assist. X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
RYou can also preselect transmission position X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do
h. The vehicle redirects and does not drive not exceed a maximum speed of approx-
as far into the parking space. Should the imately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park-
transmission change take place too early, the ing space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist
parking procedure will be canceled. A sensi- will be canceled.
ble parking position can no longer be ach- X Depending on the message or as required,
ieved from this position. shift the transmission to position h or k.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction. The Park Assist
Active Accelerate and Brake Observe
Z
182 Driving systems
Surroundings message appears on the mul- If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is
tifunction display. braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the
i You will achieve the best results by waiting accelerator again.
for the steering procedure to complete before
pulling away.
If you back up after activation, the steering Rear view camera
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
tion. General notes
Driving and parking
X Drive forward and back up as prompted by the

PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times
if necessary.
Once you have exited the parking space com-
pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the
Park Assist Switched Off message appears
on the multifunction display. You will then have
to steer and merge into traffic on your own.
PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over
the steering before the vehicle has exited the
parking space completely. This is useful if you
recognize that it is already possible to pull out of Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
the parking space. maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind the
vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-
Canceling Active Parking Assist tem.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
X Stop the movement of the multifunction mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once. i The text shown in the multimedia system
The Park Assist Canceled message depends on the language setting. The follow-
appears in the multifunction display. ing are examples of rear view camera displays
or in the multimedia system.
X Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 177).
PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Park- Important safety notes
ing Assist is immediately canceled. The Park
Assist Canceled message appears in the The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
multifunction display. replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure
if: that there are no persons, animals or objects in
Rthe electric parking brake is engaged the maneuvering area while maneuvering and
Rtransmission position j is selected
parking in parking spaces.
Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no lon-
Under the following circumstances, the rear
ger possible view camera will not function, or will function in
a limited manner:
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
Rif the tailgate is open
Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. In
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
such cases the ÷ warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster Rat night or in very dark places
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis- Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
appears and the multifunction display shows the Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
Park Assist Canceled message. lighting (the display may flicker)
When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you
must steer and brake again yourself.
Driving systems 183
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, X To switch the function mode for vehicles
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win- with trailer tow hitch:using the controller,
ter select symbol : for the "Reverse parking"
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed function or symbol ; for "Coupling up a
Observe the notes on cleaning trailer".
(Y page 316) The symbol of the selected function is high-
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this lighted.
case, have the camera position and setting X To deactivate: shift the transmission to posi-
checked at a qualified specialist workshop tion j.
Driving and parking

The field of vision and other functions of the rear or
view camera may be restricted due to additional X Drive forwards at a speed greater than 7 mph
accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. (12 km/h).
license plate holder, rear bicycle rack).
The rear view camera is protected from rain-
drops and dust by means of a flap. When the rear Multimedia display
view camera is activated, this flap opens. The rear view camera may show a distorted view
The flap closes again when: of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
Ryou have finished the maneuvering process The rear view camera does not show objects in
Ryou switch off the engine the following positions:
Ryou open the cargo compartment Rvery close to the rear bumper
Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 316). Runder the rear bumper
For technical reasons, the flap may remain open Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
briefly after the rear view camera has been handle
deactivated. ! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Activating/deactivating the rear view Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
camera
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear section of an HGV
Ra slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom-
most guideline.
X To activate: make sure that the Activa‐

tion by R gear function is selected in the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
X Engage reverse gear.
The rear view camera flap opens. The multi-
media system shows the area behind the vehi-
cle with guide lines.
The image from the rear view camera is avail-
able throughout the maneuvering process.
Z
184
Driving and parking Driving systems
: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- E Front warning display

imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the F Rear warning display
vehicle G Additional vehicle icon: PARKTRONIC meas-
; White guide lines without steering input, urement operational readiness indicator
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
(static) Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: when
PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 177), vehi-
= Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including
cle symbol G appears in the multimedia system
the exterior mirrors, for current steering
display. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are
input (dynamic)
active or light up, warning displays E and F
? Yellow lanes marking the course the tires are also active or light up correspondingly in the
will take at the current steering wheel angle multimedia system display.
(dynamic)
"Reverse parking" function
Backing up straight into a parking space
without steering input
A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C Bumper
: White guide line without steering input –
D Red guide line at a distance of approximately
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
(static)
If the transmission is shifted to position k, ; Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including
guide lines appear in the camera image. the exterior mirrors – dynamic for current
The distance specifications only apply to steering input
objects that are at ground level. = Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
? Red guide line at a distance of approximately
Driving systems 185
X Make sure that the rear view camera is X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
switched on (Y page 183). front of the parking space.
The lane and the guide lines appear.
X With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully
back up until you reach the end position.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
Driving and parking

parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel
in the parking space.
Reverse perpendicular parking with steer-

ing input
: Parking space markings
= White guide lines – for current steering input
White guide lines = should be as close to par-
allel with parking space markings : as possi-
ble.
X Turn the steering wheel to the center position
while the vehicle is stationary.
X After driving past the parking space, stop the

vehicle safely.
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 183).
The lane and the guide lines appear in the
camera image.
X While the vehicle is stationary, turn the steer-
ing wheel in the direction of the parking space
until yellow guide lines ; reach parking ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately
space marking :. 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
Yellow guide lines ; dynamically adapt to the A White guide lines – no steering input
current steering input. B End of parking space
X Maintain the steering input and reverse care- X Back up carefully until you have reached the
fully. final position.
The red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space B. The vehicle is almost par-
allel in the parking space.
Z
186 Driving systems
"Coupling up a trailer" function X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar ; rea-

ches red guide line B.
The distance between trailer drawbar ; and
red guide line B is now approximately 12 in
(0.30 m).
X Couple up the trailer (Y page 204).
"Wide-angle" function
Driving and parking
: Vehicle center point on the yellow guide line

at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m)
from the rear of the vehicle
; Trailer drawbar
This function is only available on vehicles with a
trailer tow hitch.
X Before coupling up a trailer, set the height of
trailer drawbar ; so that it is slightly higher : Symbol for the wide-angle view function
than the ball coupling. ; Own vehicle
X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer = PARKTRONIC warning displays
drawbar ;. You can also use the rear view camera to select
a wide-angle view.
When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 177),
a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the
display of the multimedia system. If the
PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warn-
ing displays = light up in the multimedia system
display in yellow or red respectively.
Object detection
The rear view camera helps detect moving and
stationary objects. If an object (person, vehicle
= Trailer drawbar marker assistant or other obstacle) is detected, this object is
marked with a bar. Objects located some dis-
? Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" func- tance from the vehicle away are marked with a
tion yellow bar. If the distance to the object is very
A Ball coupling small, the bar is displayed in red.
B Red guide line at a distance of approximately Object detection only works in wide-angle view.
12 in (0.30 m) from the ball coupling
To ensure that you can use the function, it must
X Select symbol ? using the multimedia sys- be switched on in the multimedia system (see
tem controller. the Digital Operator's Manual).
The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec-
ted. The distance specifications now only
apply to objects that are at the same level as
the ball coupling.
X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer
drawbar locating aid = points approximately
in the direction of trailer drawbar ;.
Driving systems 187
360° camera Ryellow brackets with thin lines: PARKTRONIC

is active
General notes Ryellow brackets with normal lines: an object is
present in close range of the vehicle
The 360° camera is a system consisting of four
Rred line: an object is present in the immediate
cameras.
close range of the vehicle
The system processes images from the follow-
ing cameras:
RRear view camera
Driving and parking

RFront camera The 360°camera is only an aid and may show a
RTwo side cameras in the exterior mirrors
distorted view of obstacles, show them incor-
rectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not a
The cameras cover the immediate surroundings substitute for attentive driving.
of the vehicle. The system supports you, for
example when parking or if vision is restricted at You are always responsible for safe maneuver-
an exit. ing and parking. Make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering
You can show images from the 360° camera in area while maneuvering and parking in parking
full-screen mode or in seven different split- spaces.
screen views on the multimedia system. A split-
screen view also includes a top view of the vehi- You are always responsible for safety, and must
cle. This view is calculated from the data sup- always pay attention to your surroundings when
plied by the installed cameras (virtual camera). parking and maneuvering. This applies to the
areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle.
The seven split-screen views are: You could otherwise endanger yourself and oth-
RTop view and picture from the rear view cam- ers.
era (130° viewing angle) The 360° camera will not function or will func-
RTop view and image from the front camera tion in a limited manner:
(130° viewing angle without displaying the Rif the doors are open
maximum steering wheel angle)
Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in
RTop view and enlarged rear view
Rif the tailgate is open
RTop view and enlarged front view
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
RTop view and trailer view (vehicles with trailer
tow hitch) Rat night or in very dark places
RTop view and images from the rear-facing side Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright light
cameras (rear wheel view) Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
RTop view and images from the forward-facing lighting (the display may flicker)
side cameras (front wheel view) Rif the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when driving
When the function is active and you shift the into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapid
transmission from h or k to i, the guide change in temperature
lines are hidden in the multimedia system. Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered
When you change between transmission posi- Rif the vehicle components in which the cam-
tions h and k, you see the previously selec- eras are installed are damaged. In this case,
ted front or rear view. have the camera position and setting checked
Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will also at a qualified specialist workshop
be optically displayed: Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You
Rin split screen view as red or yellow brackets
can otherwise injure others or cause damage to
objects or the vehicle.
around the vehicle icon in the top view, or
Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brackets
The guide lines in the multimedia system display
show the distances to your vehicle. The distan-
around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode
ces only apply to road level.
The line thickness and color of the brackets
In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the
show how far the vehicle is from an object.
level of the trailer tow hitch.
Z
188 Driving systems
The camera in the rear area is protected by Rasplit screen with top view and the image
means of a flap. This flap opens when the 360° from the front camera or
camera is activated. Observe the notes on Ra split screen with top view and the image
cleaning (Y page 316). For technical reasons, from the rear view camera
the flap may remain open briefly after the 360° X To switch off: press button :.
camera has been deactivated.
The field of vision and other functions of the
camera system may be restricted due to addi- Activating the 360° camera using
tional attachments (e.g. license plate holder, reverse gear
Driving and parking
rear bicycle carrier).

The 360° camera images can be automatically
On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis, displayed by engaging reverse gear.
depending on technical conditions, leaving the
standard height can result in: X Make sure that the Activation by R gear
function is selected in the multimedia system
Rinaccuracies in the guide lines
(see the Digital Operator's Manual).
Rinaccuracies in the display of generated X To show the 360° camera image: engage
images (top view) reverse gear.
The multimedia system shows the area
Activation conditions behind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You
see the top view of the vehicle and the image
The image from the 360° camera appears if: from the rear view camera.
Rthe multimedia system is switched on You cannot stop the 360° camera display if
Rthe 360° Camera function is switched on reverse gear is engaged.
If you are driving faster than at a moderate
speed and you turn on the 360° camera, a warn- Selecting the split-screen view or full
ing message appears. screen mode
The warning message disappears if:
Ryou are again driving at a moderate speed The
Switching between split screen views:
360° camera is then activated X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:
Rthe message is confirmed with the % but- slide 5 the controller.
ton X To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller.
Switching to full screen mode:

Switching the 360° camera on and off
X Turn and press 180° View with the controller.
using the button
The full screen option is only available in the fol-
lowing views:
RTop view with picture from the rear view cam-
era
RTop view with picture from the front camera
Multimedia display
The camera system may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
Obstacles are not shown by the system in the
X To switch on: press button :. following locations:
The following appears depending on whether Runder the front and rear bumpers
gear h or k is selected: Rvery close to the front and rear bumpers
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
handle
Driving systems 189
Rvery close to the exterior mirrors

Rin the transitional areas between the various
cameras in the virtual top view
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Driving and parking

Rthe rear section of an HGV
Ra slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation. B Vehicle center axis (locating aids)
Approach objects no further than the bottom- C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
most guideline. imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
Top view with picture from the rear view
D Bumper
camera
E Red guide line at a distance of approximately
If the transmission is shifted to position k,
guide lines appear in the camera image.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Top view with picture from the front cam-
era
: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
; Symbol for the split screen setting with top
view and rear view camera image
= Guide lines for the maximum steering input
? Yellow lanes marking the course the tires
will take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
: Symbol for the split screen setting with top
A Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including
view and front camera image
the exterior mirrors – dynamic for current
steering input ; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the
vehicle
= Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including
the exterior mirrors, for current steering
input (dynamic)
? Yellow lanes marking the course the tires
will take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
Z
190 Driving systems
A Red guide line at a distance of approximately i You can also select the side camera setting
12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle for the rear-facing view.
B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the "Coupling up a trailer" function
vehicle
Top view and enlarged rear view
Driving and parking
: Vehicle center point on the yellow guide line

at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m)
from the rear of the vehicle
: Symbol for the split screen setting with top
view and rear view camera image enlarged ; Trailer drawbar
; Red guide line at a distance of approximately = Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
X Set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that it
This view assists you in estimating the distance
to the vehicle behind you. is slightly higher than the ball coupling.
X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer
i This setting can also be selected as an drawbar ;.
enlarged front view.
Top view with image from the side cam-
eras
For technical reasons, the ball coupling B of

the trailer tow hitch on the multimedia system
display is either only partially visible or not visi-
: Symbol for the top view and forward-facing ble at all.
side camera setting X Select symbol ? using the controller.
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec-
including the exterior mirrors (right side of ted. The distance specifications now only
vehicle) apply to objects that are at the same level as
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width the ball coupling.
including the exterior mirrors (left side of X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer
vehicle) drawbar locating aid A points approximately
in the direction of the trailer drawbar.
Driving systems 191
X Reverse carefully until the trailer drawbar rea- ATTENTION ASSIST

ches red guide line C.
The distance between the trailer drawbar and General notes
red guide line C is now approximately 12 in
(0.30 m). ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
X Couple up the trailer (Y page 204). monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is
active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph
The lines are shown at the level of the trailer tow (200 km/h) speed range. If ATTENTION ASSIST
hitch. detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-
Driving and parking

ing lapses in concentration on the part of the
180° view driver, it suggests taking a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It
might not always recognize fatigue or increasing
inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them
at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-
rested and attentive driver.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or not
occur at all:
Rif the length of the journey is less than approx-
: Symbol for the full screen setting with rear

imately 30 minutes
view camera image Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface
; Own vehicle is uneven or if there are potholes

Rif there is a strong side wind
= PARKTRONIC warning displays
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with
i 180° view can also be selected as front high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-
view. eration
Select this view when you are driving out of an Rif you are predominantly driving at a speed
exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted, below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph
for example. (200 km/h)
If you select the % symbol in the display and Rif you are driving with DISTRONIC PLUS Steer-
confirm with the controller, the split-screen view ing Assist activated
appears. Rif the time has been set incorrectly
Rin active driving situations, such as when you
Exiting 360° camera display mode change lanes or change your speed
X Shift the transmission to position j. The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness assessment
is deleted and restarted when continuing the
or journey, if:
X Drive forwards at a speed greater than 6 mph
Ryou switch off the engine
(10 km/h).
The 360° camera display is stopped. Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driv-
The view that was active before the 360° er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to
camera was displayed appears in the multi- take a break
media system display. You can also stop the
360° camera display split-screen view by
selecting the % symbol in the display and
then confirming with the COMAND controller.
You cannot stop the 360° camera display if
the transmission position k is selected.
Z
192 Driving systems
Displaying the attention level responds to the last selection activated (stand-
ard/sensitive).
Warning in the multifunction display

If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration
are detected, a warning appears in the multi-
function display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take a
Break!.
Driving and parking
In addition to the message shown in the multi-

function display, you will then hear a warning
tone.
X If necessary, take a break.
X Confirm the message by pressing the a
In the Assistance menu (Y page 220) of the on- button on the steering wheel.
board computer, you can call up the current sta-
tus information. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
X Select the Assistance display for ATTENTION
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do
not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST con-
ASSIST using the on-board computer
tinues to detect increasing lapses in concentra-
(Y page 219).
tion, you will be warned again after 15 minutes
The following information appears: at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTEN-
Rthe length of the journey since the last break. TION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of
fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.
Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST (Attention Level), displayed in a Vehicles with COMAND multimedia system:
bar display in five levels from high to low. if a warning appears in the multifunction display,
a service station search is performed in the mul-
Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
timedia system. You can select a service station
the attention level and cannot issue a warn- and navigation to this service station will then
ing, the System Suspended message begin. This function can be activated and deac-
appears. The bar display then changes the tivated in the COMAND multimedia system (see
display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below the Digital Operator's Manual).
37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph
(200 km/h).
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST Traffic Sign Assist
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- General notes

board computer (Y page 221). Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed
The system determines the attention level of permitted to the driver in the instrument cluster.
the driver depending on the setting selected: The data and general traffic regulations stored in
Selection Standard: the sensitivity with which the navigation system are used to determine the
the system determines the attention level is set current speed limit.
to normal. Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, and
Selection Sensitive: the sensitivity is set for this reason, traffic signs put up temporarily
higher. The attention level detected by Attention (e.g. near roadworks) are not detected. There is
Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is also no display for changing traffic signs.
warned earlier. Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also
é symbol appears in the multifunction dis- shown.
play in the assistance graphic display.
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated,
it is automatically reactivated after the engine
has been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-
Driving systems 193
The sign indicating the end of a restriction only Speed limit with unknown restriction
appears with the restriction in the instrument
cluster when:
RThe regulation must be observed with the
restriction, or
RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine
whether the restriction applies
If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a
Driving and parking

maximum permitted speed from any of the avail-
able sources, no speed limit appears in the
instrument cluster either.
: Maximum permitted speed

; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for
which the restriction in the additional sign is
relevant
= Additional sign for unknown restriction
A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph
(80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 mph
(60 km/h) with an unknown restriction apply.
The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph)
depends on the country in which you are driving.
Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun- It is generally neither shown on the traffic sign
tries. In this case, display : appears in the nor on the instrument cluster but must be taken
assistance graphic (Y page 219). into account when observing the maximum per-
mitted speed.
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always Lane Tracking package
able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic
signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign General notes
Assist display.
The system may be either functionally impaired The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
or temporarily unavailable if the information in Spot Assist (Y page 193) and Lane Keeping
the digital street map of the navigation system is Assist (Y page 195).
incorrect or out of date.
Blind Spot Assist
Instrument cluster display
General notes
Displaying the assistance graphic Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either
X Call up the assistance graphic display func- side of the vehicle that are not visible to the
tion using the on-board computer driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-
(Y page 219). sors. A warning lamp lights up in the exterior
Detected traffic signs appear in the instru- mirrors and draws your attention to vehicles
ment cluster. detected in the monitored area. If you then
switch on the corresponding turn signal to
change lane, you will also receive an optical and
audible warning.
Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Z
194 Driving systems
Important safety notes Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or

bicycles
G WARNING Rthe road has very wide lanes
Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rthe road has narrow lanes
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane
placing them in the blind spot area Rthere are barriers or other road boundaries
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
differential and overtake your vehicle indicated.
Driving and parking
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give

warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to

detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
sufficient distance to the side for other road
users and obstacles.
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as
a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
is intended for use in an automotive radar
system only. Removing, tampering with, or
altering the device will void any warranties,
and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam- At a distance of around 1.6 ft (0.5 m) ; from the
per with, alter, or use in any non-approved vehicle, Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up
way. to 10 ft (3 m) next to = and behind : your
vehicle, as shown in the picture.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
equipment. lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-
Radar sensors ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the
The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte- case if there are vehicles driving at the inner
grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the edge of their lanes.
bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The Due to the nature of the system:
sensors must not be covered, for example by Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving
cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a close to crash barriers or similar solid lane
severe impact or in the event of damage to the borders
bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. alongside long vehicles, such as trucks, for a
Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly. prolonged time
Monitoring area
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
rain, snow or spray
Driving systems 195
Warning lamp Display in the assistance graphic
Driving and parking

: Warning lamp When Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radar
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below waves propagating backwards appear next to
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the vehicle in the assistance display in the mul-
the monitoring range are then not indicated. tifunction display (Y page 219). Above a speed
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph waves in the assistance graphic changes to
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond- green :. Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use.
ing side lights up red. This warning is always Towing a trailer
emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot
monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only correctly established the electrical connection.
occurs if the difference in speed is less than This can be accomplished by checking the trailer
7 mph (12 km/h). lighting. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is deac-
If you select the reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist tivated. The Blind Spot Assist Not Avail‐
is not operational. able When Towing a Trailer See Opera‐
tor's Manual message appears in the multi-
The brightness of the warning lamps is auto- function display.
matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-
roundings.
Lane Keeping Assist
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of General notes
Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-
sponding turn signal, a double warning tone
sounds. The red warning lamp flashes on the
relevant exterior mirror. If the turn signal
remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by
the flashing of the red warning lamp on the exte-
rior mirror. There are no further warning tones.
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated
in the on-board computer (Y page 221).
tion lock. Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of
The red warning lamps on the exterior mirrors your vehicle by means of multifunction cam-
light up until the engine is started. era : which is attached behind the top of the
windshield. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects
lane markings on the road and can warn you
before you leave your lane unintentionally.
Z
196 Driving systems
This function is available in the range between Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes work
over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
up to 1.5 seconds. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small
and the lane markings thus cannot be detec-
Important safety notes ted
G WARNING Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
Driving and parking
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly branch off, cross one another or merge
recognize lane markings. Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on
In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
the roadway
Rgive an unnecessary warning
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Rnot give a warning
Assist
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and stay in lane, in particular if
warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
G WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is
You should always steer, brake or accelerate
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-
ing Assist. X To activate: press button ;.
Indicator lamp : lights up. The Lane Keep‐
Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ing Assist On message appears in the mul-
of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving tifunction display. If all conditions have been
style nor override the laws of physics. Lane satisfied, there may be a warning.
Keeping Assist cannot take into account the If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep- (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible the lines in the assistance graphics display
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi- (Y page 219) are shown in green. Lane Keep-
cle speed, for braking in good time and for staying Assist is ready for use.
ing in your lane. X To deactivate: press button ;.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi- Indicator lamp : goes out. Lane Keeping
cle in the lane. Assist is deactivated. The Lane Keeping
The system may be impaired or may not function Assist Off message appears in the multi-
if: function display.
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting
fog or spray X In the DriveAssist menu on the on-board
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the computer, select the Lane Keeping Assist
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if function (Y page 221).
the road surface is wet) X Select Standard or Adaptive.
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or Standard
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-
ity of the camera
Driving systems 197
When Standard is selected, no warning vibra- lights up in the exterior mirrors and draws your
tion occurs if: attention to vehicles detected in the monitored
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, area. If you then switch on the corresponding
the warnings are suppressed for a certain turn signal to change lane, you will also receive
period of time. an optical and audible warning. If a risk of lateral
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, collision is detected, corrective braking may
help you avoid a collision. Before a course-cor-
BAS or ESP®.
recting brake application, Active Blind Spot
Adaptive Assist evaluates the space in the direction of
Driving and parking

When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra- travel and at the sides of the vehicle. For this,
tion occurs if: Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forward-facing
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, radar sensors.
the warnings are suppressed for a certain Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
period of time. speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
BAS or ESP®.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not
a substitute for attentive driving.
Ryou brake hard.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an G WARNING
obstacle or change lanes quickly. Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
In order that you are warned only when neces-
sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark- placing them in the blind spot area
ing, the system recognizes certain conditions Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
and warns you accordingly. differential and overtake your vehicle
The warning vibration occurs earlier if: As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-
bend. uations. There is a risk of an accident.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
Rthe system detects solid lane markings. fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe road has narrow lanes. i USA only: This device has been approved by
Ryou cut the corner on a bend. the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The
radar sensor is intended for use in an auto-
motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-
ing, or altering of the device will void any war-
Driving Assistance PLUS package ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do
not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
General notes approved way.
The Driving Assistance PLUS package consists Any unauthorized modification to this device
of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 164), Active Blind could void the user's authority to operate the
Spot Assist (Y page 197) and Active Lane Keep- equipment.
ing Assist (Y page 200). i Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
Active Blind Spot Assist subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
General notes and
Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor 2. This device must accept any interference
system, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle, received, including interference that may
to monitor the area to the sides of the vehicle cause undesired operation of the device.
which the driver is unable to see. A warning lamp
Z
198 Driving systems
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device The detection of obstacles can be impaired in
will void any warranties, and is not permitted. the case of:
Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
approved way. covering the sensors
Any unauthorized modification to this device Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
Radar sensors Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow
Driving and parking
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or
integrated into the front and rear bumpers and may only detect them too late.
behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-
must not be covered, for example by cycle racks ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the
or overhanging cargo. Following a severe impact case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of
or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have your lane.
the function of the radar sensors checked at a Due to the nature of the system:
qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving
Assist may otherwise no longer work properly.
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane
Monitoring area borders.
Rwarnings may be interrupted when you are
G WARNING driving alongside particularly long vehicles,
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all such as trucks, for a prolonged time.
traffic situations and road users. There is a
Warning lamp
risk of an accident.
Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-
tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.
: Warning lamp
Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at
speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond-
ing side lights up red. This warning is always
At a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m) ; emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot
from the vehicle, Active Blind Spot Assist mon- monitoring range from behind or from the side.
itors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) next to = and When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only
behind : your vehicle, as shown in the picture. occurs if the difference in speed is less than
7 mph (12 km/h).
Driving systems 199
If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind Spot If a course-correcting brake application occurs,
Assist is not operational. red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mir-
The brightness of the warning lamps is auto- ror and a double warning tone sounds. In addi-
matically adapted to the brightness of the sur- tion, a display underlining the danger of a side
roundings. collision appears in the multifunction display.
In very rare cases, the system may make an
inappropriate brake application. A course-cor-
recting brake application may be interrupted at
any time by countersteering slightly or acceler-
Driving and parking

ating.
The course-correcting brake application is avail-
able in the speed range between 20 mph
(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
Either no braking application, or a course-cor-
recting brake application adapted to the driving
situation occurs if:
Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.
radar waves propagating backward appear next Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the
to the vehicle in the assistance display in the side.
multifunction display. Above a speed of 20 mph Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
(30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in the high cornering speeds.
assistance display changes to green ;. Active Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.
Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®
Visual and acoustic collision warning or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes RESP® is switched off.
and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision detected.
warning. You will then hear a double warning
tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
signal remains on, detected vehicles are indica- X Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is
ted by the flashing of red warning lamp :. activated in the on-board computer
There are no further warning tones. (Y page 221).
Course-correcting brake application X Switch on the ignition.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lat- up red for approximately 1.5 seconds.
eral collision in the monitoring range, a course-
correcting brake application is carried out. This Gray radar waves propagating backwards
is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision. appear next to the vehicle in the assistance
graphic in the multifunction display ;.
G WARNING Above a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color
A course-correcting brake application cannot of the radar waves in the assistance display
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an changes to green ;. Active Blind Spot Assist
is then ready for use.
accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
you or makes a course-correcting brake appli-
cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the
sides.
Z
200 Driving systems
Active Lane Keeping Assist In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
can:
General notes
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
make a course-correcting brake application
to the vehicle
Rnot give a warning or intervene
Driving and parking
Always pay particular attention to the traffic

situation and keep within the lane, especially
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-
minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-
ing situation.
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in The system may be impaired or may not function
front of your vehicle by means of multifunction if:
camera : at the top of the windshield. Various Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
different areas to the front, rear and side of your illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,
vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the fog or spray
radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
Assist detects lane markings on the road and sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if
can warn you before you leave your lane unin- the road surface is wet)
tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
lane-correcting application of the brakes can
bring the vehicle back into the original lane. covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-
ity of the camera
This function is available in the range between
Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpers
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).
or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured by
Important safety notes snow
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction
accident nor override the laws of physics. Active work
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account of Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
road and weather conditions. It may not recog- ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
nize traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small
Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the and the lane markings thus cannot be detec-
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle ted
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
your lane. branch off, cross one another or merge
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously Rthe road is narrow and winding
keep your vehicle in its lane.
Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on
G WARNING the roadway
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and
clearly detect lane markings. broken lane markings are detected, no lane-cor-
recting brake application is made.
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
up to 1.5 seconds.
Driving systems 201
Lane-correcting brake application Ryou have switched on the turn signal.

If you leave your lane, under certain circumstan- Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,
ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.
This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
back to the original lane. high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-
G WARNING eration.
RESP® is switched off.
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
Rthe transmission is not in position h.
always bring the vehicle back into the original
Driving and parking

Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the elec-
lane. There is a risk of an accident.
trical connection to the trailer has been cor-
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, rectly established.
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has
you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli- been detected and displayed.
cation. Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane in
which you are driving.
Active Lane Keeping Assist may not detect other
road users or traffic situations. An inappropriate
brake application may be interrupted at any time
if you:
Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction.
Rswitch on the turn signal.
Ryou brake or accelerate significantly.
A lane-correcting brake application is interrup-
ted automatically if:
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,
PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
Rlane markings are no longer detected.
display : appears in the multifunction display.
The brake application also slightly reduces vehi- Activating/deactivating Active Lane
cle speed.
Keeping Assist
A lane-correcting brake application can be made
after driving over a lane marking detected as
being solid or broken. Before this, a warning
must be given by means of intermittent vibration
in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with
lane markings on both sides must be recog-
nized.
In the case of a broken lane marking being
detected, a lane-correcting brake application
can only be made if a vehicle has been detected
in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, over-
taking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes
can be detected.
A further lane-correcting brake application can X To activate: press button ;.
only occur after your vehicle has returned to the Indicator lamp : lights up. The Lane Keep‐
original lane. ing Assist On message appears on the
No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: multifunction display. If all conditions have
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-
been satisfied, a warning or steering inter-
vention may be made.
erate.
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
Z
202 Towing a trailer
the lines in the assistance graphic This can be accomplished by checking the trailer
(Y page 219) appear in green. Active Lane lighting.
Keeping Assist is ready for use.
X To deactivate: press button ;.
Indicator lamp : goes out. The Active Lane Towing a trailer
Keeping Assist is deactivated. The Lane
Keeping Assist Off message appears on Important safety notes
the multifunction display.
G WARNING
Driving and parking
Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting Installing an unsuitable ball coupling may

X In the DriveAssist menu on the on-board result in overloading of the trailer tow hitch
computer, select the Active Lane Keep‐ and the rear axle. This applies especially if the
ing Assist function (Y page 221). ball coupling in question is longer or angled
X Select setting Standard or Adaptive.
differently. This could seriously impair the
When Standard is selected, no warning vibra-
driving characteristics and the trailer can
tion occurs if:
come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain You should only ever install a ball coupling
period of time. that has the permissible dimensions and that
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as is designed to meet your trailer-towing
ABS, BAS or ESP®. requirements. Do not modify the ball coupling
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra- or the trailer tow hitch.
tion occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, You will find the values approved by the manu-
the warnings are suppressed for a certain facturer on the vehicle identification plates and
period of time. those for the towing vehicle under "Technical
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
data" (Y page 371).
ABS, BAS or ESP®. G WARNING
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
When the vehicle/trailer combination begins
Ryou brake hard. to lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehi-
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an cle/trailer combination could even rollover.
obstacle or change lanes quickly. There is a risk of an accident.
On no account should you attempt to
In order that you are warned only when neces- straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination
sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark- by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle
ing, the system recognizes certain conditions
and warns you accordingly. speed and do not countersteer. Apply the
brake as necessary.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a ! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
bend. changes to the engine cooling system may be
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. necessary, depending on the vehicle type.
Rthe system detects solid lane markings. If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
The warning vibration occurs later if: observe the anchorage points on the chassis
frame.
Rthe road has narrow lanes.
Ryou cut the corner on a bend. The installation of a trailer tow hitch is only per-
missible if a towing weight is specified in your
Towing a trailer vehicle documents. If this is not the case, then
the vehicle is not approved for the towing of a
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
trailer.
correctly established the electrical connection.
Towing a trailer 203
For more information, please contact a qualified This lowers the risk of an accident.
specialist workshop. ROnly install an approved trailer coupling on
Please observe the manufacturer's operating your vehicle.
instructions for the trailer coupling if a detach- Further information on availability and on
able trailer coupling is used. installation is available from any authorized
Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you Mercedes-Benz Center.
do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suitable
correctly, the trailer could become detached. for installing detachable trailer couplings.
Make sure that the following values are not
Driving and parking

RDo not install hired trailer couplings or other
exceeded: detachable trailer couplings on the bumpers
Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight of your vehicle.
Rthe permissible trailer load RIf you no longer need the ball coupling,
Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing remove it from the ball coupling recess. This
vehicle will reduce the risk of damage to the ball cou-
pling.
Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight of both the towing vehicle and the When towing a trailer, set the tire pressure on
trailer the rear axle of the towing vehicle for a maxi-
mum load; see the tire pressure table in the fuel
The applicable permissible values, which must filler flap (Y page 354).
not be exceeded, can be found:
Please note that when towing a trailer, the fol-
Rin the vehicle documents lowing driving systems have limited availability
Ron the type plate for the trailer or are not available at all:
Ron the vehicle identification plate RPARKTRONIC (Y page 175)
If the values differ, the lowest value applies. RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 193)
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling RActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 200)
characteristics will be different in comparison On vehicles without level control, the height of
with when driving without a trailer. the ball coupling will alter according to the load
The vehicle/trailer combination: placed on the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer
Ris heavier with a height-adjustable drawbar.
Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradient- You will find permissible trailer loads under
climbing capability "Technical data" (Y page 371).
Rhas an increased braking distance
Ris affected more by strong crosswinds Driving tips
Rdemands more sensitive steering Observe the information on ESP® trailer stabili-
Rhas a larger turning circle zation (Y page 73) and on pulling away with a
This could impair the handling characteristics. trailer (Y page 135).
When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/
to the current road and weather conditions. Do trailer combinations depends on the type of
not exceed the maximum permissible speed for trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the
your vehicle/trailer combination. trailer's documents to see what the maximum
permitted speed is. Observe the maximum per-
missible speed in the relevant country.
Notes on towing a trailer For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maxi-
mum permissible rear axle load is increased
General notes when towing a trailer. See the "Technical data"
section to find out whether this applies to your
RDo not exceed the maximum permissible vehicle (Y page 371). In the event of increased
speed for vehicle/trailer combinations in the rear axle load, the vehicle/trailer combination
relevant country. may not exceed a maximum speed of 60 mph
(100 km/h) for reasons concerning the operat-
ing permit. This also applies in countries in
Z
which the maximum permissible speed for vehi- coupling is correctly installed and secured
cle/trailer combinations is above 60 mph before every journey.
(100 km/h).
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
characteristics will be different in comparison to
G WARNING
when driving without a trailer and it will con- If the ball coupling is not installed and secured
sume more fuel. correctly the trailer may come loose. There is
Shift to a lower gear on long and steep downhill a risk of an accident.
gradients.
Driving and parking
Install and secure the ball coupling as descri-

This also applies to: bed in the ball coupling installation instruc-
Ractivated DISTRONIC PLUS tions. Make sure that the ball coupling is
Ractivated cruise control installed and secured correctly before every
This will use the braking effect of the engine, so journey.
that less braking will be required to maintain the
speed. This relieves the load on the brake sys-
tem and prevents the brakes from overheating
and wearing too quickly. If you need additional
braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly
rather than continuously.
Driving tips
If the trailer swings from side to side:
X Do not accelerate.
X Do not counter-steer.
X Brake if necessary.
X Pull protective cap : in the direction of the
RMaintain a greater distance from the vehicle
arrow, out of the ball coupling recess.
in front than when driving without a trailer.
X Stow protective cap : so that it cannot be
RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gen-
thrown around.
tly at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then,
X Observe the manufacturer's installation
increase the braking force rapidly.
instructions.
RThe values given for gradient-climbing capa-
bilities from a standstill refer to sea level. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278)
When driving in mountainous areas, note that and the safety notes regarding stowage
the power output of the engine and, conse- spaces (Y page 278).
quently, the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa-
bility, decreases with increasing altitude.
Coupling up a trailer
Installing the ball coupling ! Do not connect the trailer's brake system (if
featured) to the hydraulic brake system of the
G WARNING towing vehicle, as the latter is equipped with
an anti-lock brake system. Doing so will result
If the ball coupling is not correctly installed in a loss of function of the brake systems of
and secured, it could come loose while driving both the vehicle and the trailer.
and endanger other road users. There is a risk X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake
of an accident and injury. manually.
Install and secure the ball coupling as descri- X Start the engine.
bed in the ball coupling manufacturer's instal- X Shift the transmission to position j.
lation instructions. Make sure that the ball X Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: select
the Comfort drive program.
X Switch off the engine. Towing a trailer

X Close the doors and tailgate.
There are several legal requirements for towing
X Couple up the trailer.
a trailer, e.g. the maximum permissible speed.
X Establish the electrical connection between Make sure that your car/trailer combination
the vehicle and the trailer. complies with the local regulations:
X Check that the trailer lighting system is work-
Rin your place of residence
ing.
Rat your destination
X Push the combination switch upwards/down-
The police and local authorities can provide reli-
Driving and parking

wards and check whether the corresponding
turn signal on the trailer flashes. able information.
A trailer that is connected is recognized only To accumulate driving experience and accustom
when the electrical connection is established yourself to the new handling characteristics,
correctly and when the lighting system is work- practice the following at a location where there
ing properly. The function of other systems also is no traffic:
depends on this, for example: RCornering
RESP® RStopping
RPARKTRONIC RBacking up
RActive Parking Assist Check the following before the journey:
RActive Blind Spot Assist RTrailer tow hitch
RActive Lane Keeping Assist RSafety switch for braked trailers
Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: if you couple RSafety chains
up a trailer, the vehicle always remains at high- RElectrical connections
way level. Observe the following note when cou- RLighting system
pling up a trailer:
RWheels and tires
RUnless highway level has been set manually,
RLoad securing
the vehicle is automatically lowered to high-
way level. If a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) has Adjust the exterior mirrors so that you have a
been reached, this may be the case. clear view of the rear section of the trailer.
These restrictions apply to accessories that are If the trailer is equipped with electronically con-
supplied with power via the trailer socket in your trolled brakes, pull away carefully in the car/
vehicle, e.g. a rear bicycle rack. trailer combination. Brake manually using the
Observe the maximum permissible trailer brake controller and check whether the brakes
dimensions (width and length). function correctly.
Most U.S. states and all Canadian provinces Regularly check that the load is secure.
require by law: When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
characteristics will be different in comparison
RSafety chains between the towing vehicle and
with when driving without a trailer.
the trailer. The chains should be cross-wound
under the trailer drawbar. They must be fas- The vehicle/trailer combination:
tened to the vehicle's trailer coupling, not to Ris heavier
the bumper or the axle. Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradient-
Leave enough play in the chains to make tight climbing capability
cornering possible. Rhas an increased braking distance
RA separate brake system for certain types of Ris affected more by strong crosswinds
trailer. Rdemands more sensitive steering
RSafety switch for braked trailers. Check the
Rhas a larger turning circle
specific legal requirements applicable to your
state. Avoid sudden steering movements.
If the trailer becomes detached from the tow- Avoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently
ing vehicle, the safety feature applies the at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then,
trailer brakes. increase the braking force rapidly.
Z
When overtaking, pay particular attention to the X Close all doors and the tailgate.
extended length of your vehicle/trailer combi- X Switch off the engine.
nation. X Secure the vehicle and trailer against rolling
Due to the length of the vehicle/trailer combi- away.
nation, you require additional road space when X Remove the trailer cable.
overtaking before you can change back to the
X Remove the safety chains, if there are any.
original lane.
X Uncouple the trailer.
If the automatic transmission repeatedly shifts
between gears on uphill or downhill gradients,
Driving and parking
shift to a lower gear.

Driving in a lower gear and at a reduced speed Removing the ball coupling
decreases the risk of engine damage.
If the coolant temperature increases signifi- instructions.
cantly when climate control is switched on,
X Press the protective cap into the ball coupling
switch climate control off.
recess.
Coolant heat can also be dissipated by opening
X Make sure that the protective cap is firmly in
the windows and switching the ventilation
blower and the interior temperature to the high- place.
est level. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(Y page 278).
Decoupling a trailer Information on cleaning and care of the trailer
tow hitch (Y page 316).
G WARNING
If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun
brake engaged, you could trap your hand Trailer power supply
between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. ! Accessories with a maximum power con-
There is a risk of injury. sumption of 180 W can be connected to the
Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brake permanent power supply.
is engaged. You must not charge a trailer battery using the
power supply.
G WARNING The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped at
Vehicles with level control: the factory with a permanent power supply.
The permanent power supply is supplied via
The vehicle is lowered as soon as you discon-
trailer socket pin 4.
nect the trailer cable. This could result in your
The trailer's permanent power supply is
limbs or those of other people that are switched off in the event of low vehicle supply
between the vehicle body and tires or undervoltage and after six hours at the latest.
neath the vehicle being trapped. There is a A qualified specialist workshop can provide
risk of injury. more information about installing the trailer
Make sure that nobody is in the immediate electrics.
vicinity of the wheel housings or under the
vehicle when you disconnect the trailer cable.
Permissible trailer loads and trailer
! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged drawbar noseweights
overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could
be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun Weight specifications
brake. The gross trailer weight is calculated as the
X Apply the vehicle's parking brake manually. weight of the trailer plus the weight of the load
X Shift the transmission to position j. and the trailer's equipment.
You will find permissible trailer loads under

"Technical data" (Y page 371).
Loading a trailer
RWhen loading the trailer, make sure that nei-
ther the permissible gross trailer weight nor
the permissible gross vehicle weight are
exceeded. The permissible gross vehicle
Driving and parking

weight is indicated on the identification plate
on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehi-
cle.
You can find the maximum permissible values
on the type plates of your vehicle and the
trailer. When calculating how much weight
the vehicle and trailer may carry, pay atten-
tion to the respective lowest values.
RThe trailer drawbar load on the ball coupling
must be added to the rear axle load to avoid
exceeding the permissible gross axle weight.
The permissible gross vehicle weight is indi-
cated on the identification plate on the B-pil-
lar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a trailer load
where the trailer drawbar noseweight accounts
for 8% to 15% of the permissible gross trailer
weight.
Additional accessories, passengers and load
reduce the permissible trailer load and nose-
weight that your vehicle can tow.
Checking the vehicle and trailer weight

RHave the towing vehicle, including the driver,
passengers and load, and completely loaded
trailer weighed on a suitable weighing
machine. This will allow you to ensure that the
weights of the towing vehicle and trailer com-
ply with the maximum permissible values.
RCheck the gross axle weight rating of the front
and rear axles, the gross weight of the trailer
and trailer drawbar load.
Z
208 Displays and operation
Important safety notes Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lighting
G WARNING
On-board computer and displays
If you operate information systems and com-

munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis-
country in which you are currently driving when plays and the controls in the vehicle interior can
operating the on-board computer. be adjusted using brightness control knob :.
X Turn brightness control knob : up or down.
G WARNING If you turn the light switch (Y page 111) to the
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- T, Ã or L position, the brightness
functioned, you may not recognize function will depend upon the brightness of the ambi-
ent light.
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The
operating safety of your vehicle may be i The light sensor in the instrument cluster
impaired. There is a risk of an accident. automatically controls the brightness of the
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked multifunction display.
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- In daylight, the displays in the instrument
ately. cluster are illuminated. A dimming function is
not possible in daylight.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is
impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Speedometer with segments
The on-board computer only shows messages or The speedometer is divided into segments
warnings from certain systems in the multifunc- depending on the equipment.
tion display. You should therefore make sure
The segments in the speedometer indicate
your vehicle is operating safely at all times.
which speed range is available.
For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-
tration (Y page 36). RCruise control activated (Y page 162):
The segments light up from the stored speed
to the end of the scale.
RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 164):
One or two segments in the set speed range
light up.
RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front
moving more slowly than the stored speed:
The segments between the speed of the vehi-
cle in front and the stored speed light up.
Displays and operation 209
Tachometer Operating the on-board computer

! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this
could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display

You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-
play indicates the temperature measured and
does not record the road temperature.
The outside temperature display is in the multi-
function display (Y page 210). : Multifunction display
Changes in the outside temperature are dis- ; Right control panel
played after a short delay. = Left control panel
X To activate the on-board computer: switch
on the power supply.
Coolant temperature gauge
You can control the multifunction display and
G WARNING the settings in the on-board computer using the
buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
Left control panel
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases ò ROpens a menu list
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury. 9 Press briefly:
: RScrolls in lists
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the RSelects a menu or function
engine compartment, keep the hood closed RIn the Radio or Media menu:
and contact the fire department. opens a track or station list and
selects a station, an audio track or
! A display message is shown if the coolant a video scene.
temperature is too high. RIn the Telephone menu: switches
If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡ to the phone book and selects a
(120 †), do not continue driving. The engine name or a telephone number
will otherwise be damaged. 9 Press and hold:
The coolant temperature gauge is in the lower : RScrolls quickly through all lists
section of the tachometer (Y page 36). RIn the Radio or Media menu:
Under normal operating conditions and with the selects a station, audio track or
specified coolant level, the coolant temperature video scene using rapid scrolling
may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). RIn the Telephone menu: starts
rapid scrolling if the phone book is
open
Z
210 Displays and operation
a RIn all menus: confirms the selected 8 RMute

entry in the list
RIn the Radio or Media menu:
ó RVehicles with multimedia system
Audio 20:
opens the list of available radio
sources or media Switches on voice-operated con-

trol for navigation (see the manu-
RIn the Telephone menu: switches
facturer's operating instructions)
to the phone book and starts dial-
RVehicles with multimedia system
ing the selected number
COMAND:
ñ RVehicles with multimedia system Switches on the Voice Control Sys-
Audio 20: tem (see the separate operating
Switches off voice-operated con- instructions)
trol for navigation (see the manu-
facturer's operating instructions)
RVehicles with multimedia system
Multifunction display
COMAND:
Switches off the Voice Control
System (see the separate operat-
ing instructions)
% Press briefly:
RBack
RIn the Radio or Media menu: exits
the track or station list or list of
available radio sources or media
RHides display messages
RExits the phone book/redial mem-
ory
% Press and hold:
RCalls up the standard display in the
Trip menu
Right control panel : Drive program (Y page 142)

; Transmission position (Y page 143)
~ RRejects or ends a call = Additional speedometer
RExits the phone book/redial mem- ? Display
ory A Time
6 RMakes or accepts a call B Outside temperature (Y page 209)
RSwitches to the redial memory Display panel ? shows the selected menu or
submenu and display messages.
W RAdjusts the volume
X To open the menu list: press the ò but-
X
ton on the steering wheel.
Display panel ? appears in the menu list.
Possible displays in the multifunction dis-
play:
RZGearshift recommendation, when shifting
manually (Y page 147)
Rj Active Parking Assist (Y page 178)
R¯ Cruise control (Y page 162)
Displays and operation 211
Ra DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Displays and operation

Stop&Go Pilot (Y page 169)
R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Switching the head-up display on/off
(Y page 113)

Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 136)
Rë HOLD function (Y page 171)
Head-up display
General notes
The head-up display projects information from
the navigation system and the driver assistance
system above the dashboard into the driver's
field of vision. The head-up display allows the
driver to see all of the information without hav- X Press button :.
ing to take their eyes off the road. When the head-up display is switched on, the
display appears in the driver's field of vision.
A requirement for the display of the contents is
that the following functions are available in the Standard displays in the head-up display
vehicle and are switched on:
RCruise control
RDISTRONIC PLUS
RTraffic Sign Assist
RNavigation

The head-up display is only an aid and is not a
substitute for attentive driving.
The visibility of the head-up display is influenced
by the following conditions:
Rthe driver's seat position : Navigation messages
Rthe positioning of the display image
; Current speed
Rthe general ambient light
= Detected traffic signs
? Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS set
Rsunglasses with polarization filters
speed
Rwet roads
Rblocking of sunlight by objects on the display
cover
In the event of extreme sunlight, sections of the
display may fade. This can be reversed by
switching the head-up display off and on again.
i Vehicles with the head-up display are equip-
ped with a special windshield. Should repairs
be necessary, have the windshield replaced at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
212 Menus and submenus
AMG displays in the head-up display Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
select the following menu:
RTrip menu (Y page 212)
RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 214)
RRadio menu (Y page 216)
RMedia menu (Y page 216)
RTelephone menu (Y page 218)
RAssistance Graphic menu (Y page 219)
RService menu (Y page 219)
RSettings menu (Y page 220)
RAMG menu in Mercedes-AMG vehicles
: Protection against reaching the overrevving (Y page 224)
range
; RACETIMER lap
= RACETIMER lap time Trip menu
? Current speed
A Currently selected gear, gearshift options Standard display
when shifting manually
B Current engine speed
Setting options
You can adjust the following settings in the
head-up display submenu:
Radjust the position of the head-up display on
the windshield (Y page 222)
Radjust the brightness of the displays in the
head-up display (Y page 222)
Rselect desired displays in the head-up display
(Y page 222)
Using the Display Content function, you X Press and hold the % button on the steer-
can, depending on your vehicle's equipment, ing wheel until the Trip menu with trip odom-
choose between four standard displays. The eter : and odometer ; appears.
selected contents then appear in the head-up
display.
In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can choose
between further AMG displays in addition to
the standard displays, depending on your
vehicle's equipment.
If you select a display with traffic signs, detec-
ted traffic signs from Traffic Sign Assist
appear in the head-up display.
Menus and submenus

Menu overview
Press the ò button on the steering wheel to
open the menu list.
Operating the on-board computer (Y page 209).
Menus and submenus 213
Displaying the range and current fuel For further information on the ECO display, see
consumption (Y page 158).
Trip computer "From Start" or "From

Reset"
: Range of the fuel supply

; Current fuel consumption
= Recuperation display
: Distance
X Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list. ; Driving time
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to = Average speed
select the Trip menu. ? Average fuel consumption
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering X Press the ò button on the steering wheel
wheel. to open the menu list.
X Press 9 or : to select the display. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
Approximate range : that can be covered is select the Trip menu.
calculated according to your current driving X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If wheel.
there is only a small amount of fuel left in the X Press : or 9 to select From Start or
fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled C From Reset.
appears instead of approximate range :. The values in the From Start submenu are
Recuperation display = shows you if energy calculated from the start of a journey, while
has been recuperated from the kinetic energy the values in the From Reset submenu are
in overrun mode and saved in the battery. calculated from the last time the submenu
Recuperation display = depends on the was reset (Y page 214).
engine installed and is therefore not available In the following cases, the trip computer is
in all vehicles. automatically reset From Start:
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
ECO display than four hours.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the
menu list. R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been
select the Trip menu. exceeded, the trip computer is automatically
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering reset From Reset.
wheel.
X Press the : or 9 button to select ECO Digital speedometer
display.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer menu list.
than four hours, the ECO display will be auto- X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
matically reset. select the Trip menu.
Z
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering Route guidance not active

wheel.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
digital speedometer.
Resetting values
to open the menu list.
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
select the Trip menu.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the : Direction of travel
function that you wish to reset. ; Current road
X Press a briefly.
X Press : to select Yes and press a to Route guidance active
confirm.
You can reset the values of the following func- No change of direction announced
tions:
RTrip odometer
R"From Start" trip computer
R"From Reset" trip computer
RECO display
If you reset the values in the ECO display, the
values in the "From Start" trip computer are
also reset. If you reset the values in the "From
Start" trip computer, the values in the ECO
display are also reset.
: Distance to the next destination

Navigation system menu
; Estimated arrival time
Displaying navigation instructions = Distance to the next change of direction
? Current road
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions. You can find fur-
ther information on navigation instructions in
the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's
Manual.
X Switch on the multimedia system.
select the Navi menu.
wheel.
Change of direction announced with a Change of direction without lane recom-

lane recommendation mendation

: Target of the change of direction : Road into which the change of direction
; Distance to the change of direction leads
= Change-of-direction symbol ; Distance to change of direction and visual
? Recommended lane and new lane during a distance display
change of direction (white) = Change-of-direction symbol
A Possible lane When a change of direction is to be made, you
B Lane not recommended (dark gray) will see symbol = for the change of direction
and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator
On multilane roads, new lane recommendations
shortens towards the top of the display as you
can be displayed for the next change of direction
approach the point of the announced change of
if the digital map supports this data. During the
direction. The change of direction starts once
change of direction, new lanes may be added.
the distance display reaches zero.
Lane not recommended B: you will not be able
to complete the next change of direction if you Change of direction with lane recommen-
stay in this lane. dation
Possible lane A: you will only be able to com-
plete the next change of direction in this lane.
Recommended lane ?: in this lane you will be
able to complete the next change of direction
and the one after that.
: Road into which the change of direction

leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
= Change-of-direction symbol
? Lane recommendation
Z
Other status indicators of the naviga- = Name of artist

tion system ? Name of track
The multifunction display shows station ; with
station frequency or station name. The preset
position is only displayed along with station ; if

this has been stored. You can store radio sta-
tions in the multimedia system.
select the Radio menu.
wheel.
: Additional information
Currently set station ; appears in the multi-
Other possible additional information: function display.
RNew Route... orCalculating Route... X To open the station list: press : or 9
A new route is calculated. briefly.
RRoad Not Mapped X To select a station in the station list:
press : or 9 briefly.
The vehicle position is inside the area of the
X To select a station in the station list using
digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g.
newly built streets, car parks or private land. rapid scrolling: press and hold : or
RNo Route
9.
X To select the waveband or station mem-
No route could be calculated to the selected
ory: press a briefly.
destination.
X Press : or 9 to select the waveband or
ROff Map
station memory.
The map for the current vehicle position is not
X Press a to confirm the selection.
available.
RO i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
You have reached the destination or an inter- normal radio.
mediate destination. Further information about radio operation can
be found in the multimedia system in the Dig-
ital Operator's Manual.
Radio menu
Media menu
Changing the media source
You can change the media source and playback
mode (audio or video) at any time in the Media
menu.
: Frequency band
select the Media menu.
; Station frequency with memory position
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering X To select an audio player or media:press

wheel. a briefly. The list containing the media
X To open the media sources list: press a sources appears.
briefly. X Press : or 9 to select the correspond-

The list shows the following media sources, ing audio player or media.
for example: X Press a to confirm.
RCD or DVD (DVD only in the COMAND mul- X To open the track list:press the : or
timedia system) 9 button briefly.
RSD card X To select the next or previous track from
RMedia Register (only in the COMAND mul- the track list:press the : or 9 button
timedia system) briefly.
RUSB storage device X To select a track from the track list using
RBluetooth® capable audio device rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9
until the desired track is reached.
Please observe further information on media
support and media operation in the multimedia If you press and hold the button, the speed of
system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). rapid scroll increases after a short time. Not
all audio drives or data carriers support this
function.
Operating an audio player or audio
media If the corresponding track information is stored
on the audio player or media, the multifunction
display shows the following:
Rtrack number
Rthe name of the track
Rthe name of the artist
Ralbum
The track information does not appear in audio
AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
audio source connected).
Video DVD operation

: Media source, e.g. name of USB memory
stick
; Current title
= Name of artist
? Name of album
A Folder name
Audio data from various audio devices or media
can be played, depending on the equipment
installed in the vehicle.
to open the menu list. X Switch on the multimedia system.
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to X Press the ò button on the steering wheel
select the Media menu. to open the menu list.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to
wheel. select the Media menu.
wheel.
Z
X To select a DVD single drive or disc: press You will see one of the following display mes-
a briefly. The list containing the media sages in the multifunction display:
sources appears. RPhone READY or the name of the network
X Press : or 9 to select the correspond- provider: the mobile phone has found a net-
ing DVD single drive or disc. work and is ready to receive.

X Press a to confirm. RPhone No Service: there is no network
X To open the scene list: press the : or available or the mobile phone is searching for
9 button briefly. a network.
X To select the next or previous scene in the
scene list: press the : or 9 button Accepting a call
briefly.
If someone calls you when you are in the Tele‐
X To select a scene from the scene list using
phone menu, a display message appears in the
rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9 multifunction display.
until desired scene : is reached.
You can accept a call at any time regardless of
X Press a to confirm your selection.
the menu selected.
X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel
to accept an incoming call.
Telephone menu
Introduction Rejecting or ending a call
X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel
G WARNING to reject or end a call.
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
Selecting an entry in the phone book
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control X Press the ò button on the steering wheel
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. to open the menu list.
X Press the : or 9 button on the steering
wheel to select the Telephone menu.
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention wheel.
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
X Press the :, 9 or a button to
ment when the vehicle is stationary. switch to the phone book.
X Using : or 9, select the names one
When telephoning, you must observe the legal
requirements for the country in which you are after the other.
currently driving. or
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu- X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold :
facturer’s operating instructions). or 9 for longer than one second.
The names are displayed quickly one after the
other in the phone book.
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the mul-
If you press and hold the : or 9 button
timedia system (see the Digital Operator's for longer than five seconds, the name with
Manual). the next or previous initial letter in the alpha-
X Press the ò button on the steering wheel bet appears.
to open the menu list. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to button or reach the end of the list.
select the Telephone menu. X If only one telephone number is stored for
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering a name: press the 6 or a button to
wheel. start dialing.
or
X If there is more than one number for a X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
particular name: press the 6 or a wheel.
button to display the numbers. The assistance graphic displays the status of
X Press the : or 9 button to select the and information from the following driving
systems or driving safety systems:

number you want to dial.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. RDistance display of DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 168)
or
RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 193)
X To exit the telephone book: press the ~
RDistance warning and the autonomous
or % button briefly.
braking function COLLISION PREVENTION
ASSIST PLUS (Y page 67)
Redialing RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 73)
The on-board computer saves the last names or RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 193) or Active
numbers dialed in the redial memory. Blind Spot Assist (Y page 197)
X Press the ò button on the steering wheel RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 192)
to open the menu list. RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 195) or Active
X Press the : or 9 button on the steering Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 200)
wheel to select the Telephone menu. RRear window wiper (Y page 120)
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST
wheel. assessment.
X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial
memory.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Service menu
desired name or number.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. Introduction
or Depending on the equipment installed in the
X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ vehicle, you have the following options in the
or % button briefly. Service menu:
Rcalling up display messages in message mem-
ory (Y page 227)
Assistance graphic menu Rrestarting the tire pressure loss warning sys-
tem (Canada only) (Y page 343).
Rchecking the tire pressure electronically
(Y page 345).
Rcalling up the service due date (Y page 310).
Rdisplaying the DEF level and range
(Y page 219).
Displaying the DEF level and range

X Press the ò button on the steering wheel select the Service menu.
to open the menu list. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel.
wheel to select the Assistance Graphic
menu.
Z
X Press : or 9 to select the AdBlue X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

submenu. select the Settings menu.
X Press a to confirm your selection. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
The range and DEF level appear in a bar graph wheel.
in the multifunction display. X Press : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐

Observe the information and notes on "Refuel- sist submenu.
ing" (Y page 151). X Press a to confirm.
X Press : or 9 to select ESP.
X Press a to confirm.
Settings menu The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
Introduction ton again.
Depending on the equipment installed in the If the å warning lamp in the instrument
vehicle, you have the following options in the cluster lights up when the vehicle is ready to
Settings menu: drive, ESP® is deactivated.
RChanging assistance settings (Y page 220). If the ÷ and å warning lamps light up
RChanging head-up display settings continuously, ESP® is not available due to a mal-
(Y page 222). function.
RChanging the light settings (Y page 223). Observe the information on warning lamps
RChanging the instrument cluster settings (Y page 259).
(Y page 223). Observe the information on display messages
RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 223). (Y page 228).
Activating/deactivating COLLISION PRE-
Assistance submenu VENTION ASSIST PLUS
Deactivating/activating ESP® to open the menu list.
Observe the "Important safety notes" section in X Press the : or 9 button on the steering
the description of ESP® (Y page 70). wheel to select the Settings menu.
G WARNING X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAssist
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk submenu.
of skidding and an accident. X Press a to confirm.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- X Press 9 or : to select Collision
bed in the following. Prevention.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow- The current selection appears.
ing situations: X To activate/deactivate: press a again.
Rwhen using snow chains When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
Rin deep snow is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in
the multifunction display in the Assistance
Ron sand or gravel
Graphic menu.
Deactivating/activating ESP® in Mercedes-
AMG vehicles (Y page 71). For further information about COLLISION PRE-
VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 67).
For further information about ESP®, see
(Y page 70).
X Start the engine.
Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Setting ATTENTION ASSIST

Brake X Press the ò button on the steering wheel
PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehicles to open the menu list.
with the Driving Assistance package. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering

wheel to select the Settings menu.
wheel.
X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAssist
submenu.
wheel.
X Press : or 9 to select ATTENTION
X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAssist
submenu. ASSIST.
X Press : or 9 to select Off, Standard
X Press : or 9 to select PRE-SAFE
Brake. or Sensitive.
X Press the a button to confirm the selec-
The current selection appears. tion.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears in the Assistance
ton again. Graphic menu in the multifunction display.
When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the
æ symbol appears in the multifunction dis- For further information about ATTENTION
play in the Assistance Graphic menu. ASSIST, see (Y page 191).
For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake, see Setting Lane Keeping Assist
(Y page 73). X Press the ò button on the steering wheel
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
X Press the ò button on the steering wheel select the Settings menu.
wheel.
select the Settings menu.
X Press : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐
sist submenu.
wheel.
X Press : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐
X Press : or 9 to select Lane Keeping
sist submenu.
Assist.
X Press : or 9 to select Blind Spot
The current selection Standard or Adaptive
Assist. appears.
X To change the setting: press a again.
The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a but- For further information about Lane Keeping
ton again. Assist, see (Y page 195).
For further information about Active Lane Keep-
For further information about Blind Spot Assist, ing Assist, see (Y page 200).
see (Y page 193).
For further information about Active Blind Spot
Assist, see (Y page 197).
Z
Head-up display submenu Information on displays of Traffic Sign Assist

(Y page 192).
Selecting other displays
Setting the position
You can adjust the position of the Head-up Dis-

play on the windshield. You can compensate for
height differences if the seat positions are
changed, for example.
X Switch on the Head-up Display (Y page 211).
wheel.
: Vehicle speed display X Use : or 9 to select the Head-up
; Vehicle speed and navigation instruction Display submenu.
display X Press a to confirm.
= Vehicle speed display and Traffic Sign Assist X Press : or 9 to select the Position
Using the Display Content function, you can function.
choose from up to four display options depend- X Press the a button to save the setting.
ing on the vehicle's equipment. The selected X Press : or 9 to adjust the position to a
contents appear in the Head-up Display. level from Level +5 (up) to Level -5 (down).
In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also choose X Press the a or % button to save the
between two AMG displays. If you select an setting.
AMG display, the head-up display shows AMG-
specific contents. Using the Memory function, you can save and
If you select a display with traffic signs, detected call up the set position of the Head-up Display as
traffic signs from Traffic Sign Assist appear in a single memory preset (Y page 109).
the head-up display. Setting the brightness
The brightness of the Head-up Display is auto-
to open the menu list. matically adjusted to the surrounding ambient
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to light. You can also individually adjust the bright-
select the Settings menu. ness of the Head-up Display.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering X Switch on the Head-up Display (Y page 211).
wheel. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel
X Press : or 9 to select the Head-up to open the menu list.
Display submenu. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering
X Press a to confirm. wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press : or 9 to select Display Con‐ X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
tent. wheel.
X Press a to confirm. X Use : or 9 to select the Head-up
A graphic selection list appears. Display submenu.
X Press : or 9 to select the desired dis- X Press a to confirm.
play. X Press : or 9 to select the Brightness
X Press the a button to confirm the selec- function.
tion. X Press the a button to save the setting.
You can find more information on the navigation
displays in the multimedia system (see Digital
Operator's Manual).
X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the X Press : or 9 to select the Display

brightness to a level from Level +5 (bright) to Unit Speed-/Odometer function.
Level -5 (dark). The current setting km or Miles appears.
X Press the a or % button to save the X Press the a button to save the setting.

setting. The selected unit of measurement for distance
applies to:
Light submenu RDigitalspeedometer in the Trip menu
ROdometer and the trip odometer
Switching the daytime running lamps on/
RTrip computer
off
RCurrent consumption and the range
This function is not available in Canada.
RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu
RCruise control
menu list.
RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot
select the Settings menu.
RASSYST PLUS service interval display
wheel. Switching the additional speedometer
X Press : or 9 to select the Lights on/off
submenu.
If the additional speedometer is switched on,
the speed is shown in the status bar in the mul-
X Using : or 9, select the Daytime tifunction display instead of the outside tem-
Running Lights function. perature.
If the Daytime Running Lights function has The speed display is inverse to the speedome-
been switched on, the multifunction display ter.
shows the cone of light and the W symbol
in yellow.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Further information on daytime running wheel to select the Settings menu.
lampsDaytime Running Lights (Y page 111). X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
Instrument cluster submenu X Use : or 9 to select the Instrument
Cluster submenu.
Selecting the distance unit X Press a to confirm.
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function X Using : or 9, select the Additional
allows you to choose whether certain displays Speedometer [km/h] function.
appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunc- The current selection appears.
tion display.
X Press the ò button on the steering wheel ton again.
wheel to select the Settings menu. Restoring the factory settings
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering X Press the ò button on the steering wheel
wheel. to open the menu list.
X Use : or 9 to select the Instrument X Press the : or 9 button on the steering
Cluster submenu. wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press a to confirm. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X Use : or 9 to select the Factory
Settings submenu.
Z
X Press a to confirm. G-Meter

The Reset All Settings? function
appears.
X Press : or 9 to select No or Yes.
X Press a to confirm the selection.

If you have selected Yes, the multifunction
display shows a confirmation message.
For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
Lights function in the Lights submenu is only
reset when the vehicle is stationary.
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

While the vehicle is in motion, the G-Meter
Warm-up shows the forces that are exerted on the driver
both laterally and in the direction of travel.
The maximum values are indicated in red in the
guideline system.
menu list.
wheel to select the AMG menu.
wheel.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the G-
Meter appears.
: Digital speedometer The maximum values of the G-Meter are
saved.
; Gear indicator
X To reset the G-Meter: press a again.
= Charge-air pressure
X Using : or 9 select Yes on the steer-
? Engine oil temperature
ing wheel.
A Transmission oil temperature
X Press the ò button on the steering wheel The maximum values of the G-Meter are
to open the menu list. deleted.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
wheel to select the AMG menu. than four hours, the G-Meter will be automati-
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering cally reset.
wheel.
Engine and transmission oil tempera-
tures: when the engine and transmission are
at normal operating temperature, oil temper-
atures ? and A are displayed in white in the
multifunction display.
If the multifunction display shows oil temper-
ature ? or A in blue, the engine or the
transmission are not yet at normal operating
temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-
put during this time.
SETUP RACETIMER
Overview Displaying and starting RACETIMER

: Drive Eco/Comfort/Sport/Sport +/Man‐ : Lap
ual ; RACETIMER
; Chassis Comfort/Sport/Sport + The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a
= Steering Comfort/Sport closed race circuit. Do not use the function on
? ECO Start/Stop Active/Inactive/Off public roads.
A ESP® On/Off or SPORT handling mode You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is
Sport running or the ignition is switched on.
SETUP shows the following functions and set- X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the
tings: list of menus.
Rthe gear indicator X Press the : or 9 button on the steering
Rthe digital speedometer wheel to select the AMG menu.
Rthe drive system setting X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
Rthe suspension mode
wheel.
X Press : or 9 repeatedly until the
Rthe steering setting
RACETIMER appears.
Rthe setting of the ECO start/stop function
X To start: press the a button to start the
Rthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) status
RACETIMER.
Select SETUP Starting a new lap
X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the
list of menus.
wheel.
X Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP appears.
: Lap
; RACETIMER
= Quickest lap time
Z
X Press the : or 9 button to select New X Press : or 9 to select Stop.

Lap. The RACETIMER is stopped.
X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select Reset.
A maximum of 32 laps may be stored. X Press a to confirm.
All laps are deleted.

Stopping the RACETIMER
Lap statistics
X Press : or 9 to select Stop.

X Press a to confirm. : Lap
; Lap time
Continuing the RACETIMER
= Average lap speed
? Lap length
This function is only available if you have stored
at least two laps and have stopped the RACE-
TIMER.
X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the
list of menus.
wheel.
X Press the : or 9 button to select Lap
X Press : or 9 to select Continue. List.
X Press a to confirm. X Press a to confirm.
The lap evaluation appears.
Resetting the RACETIMER X Press the 9 or : button to select a dif-
ferent lap evaluation.
The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-
bol :.
Display messages 227
Display messages
Introduction
General notes

Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual
and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone.
You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory.
Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 171)
RParking (Y page 154)
Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display hides the display message.
High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-priority
display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages
have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up
the display messages:
X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the message memory.
If there are no display messages, the No Messages display appears in the multifunction display.
When there are display messages, the number of stored messages appears.
X Press the : or 9 button to scroll through the display messages.
Z
228 Display messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!÷
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-

gram) are temporarily not available.
Currently Unavaila‐ Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
ble See Operator's tion.
Manual
In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-
ment cluster.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
!÷ ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
Inoperative See tion.
Operator's Manual
The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), ÷ and ! warning
lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.
G WARNING
hard, for example.
÷ ESP® is malfunctioning.

Operator's Manual
The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
÷ ESP® is temporarily unavailable.

Currently Unavaila‐ tion.
ble See Operator's
Manual The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G WARNING
hard, for example.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
Z
T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunc-
tioning.
÷
Operator's Manual In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-
ment cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock
if you brake hard, for example.
F(USA The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
only)!(Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition
only) was switched off.
Turn On the Igni‐ X Switch on the ignition.
tion to Release the
Parking Brake
F(USA The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the
only)!(Canada electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 156).
only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
Please Release Park‐ X Release the electric parking brake manually.
ing Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(Y page 157).
F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
only)!(Canada To apply:
only) X Switch the ignition off.
Parking Brake See X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
Operator's Manual

The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.

To release:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 156).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X Do not drive on.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes

and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
To release:
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp con-
tinues to flash:
X Do not drive on.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 357).
X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.
Z

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
goes out or remains lit.
If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or

release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply
the electric parking brake manually.
X Shift the transmission to position j, as the electric parking brake
is not applied automatically.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:

F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
only)!(Canada after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
only) goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-
Parking Brake Inop‐
voltage or undervoltage.
erative
X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.

It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.
$(USA There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamp
only)J(Canada lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
only) G WARNING
Check Brake Fluid
Level The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

USA only: the $ red brake system warning lamp is lit while the
Check Brake Pad Wear engine is running.
G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.

Inoperative
Collision Preven‐ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operational.
tion Assist Plus Possible causes are:
Currently Unavaila‐
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
ble See Operator's
Manual tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range
Rthe on-board voltage is too low
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Restart the engine.
Z

Collision Preven‐ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative due
tion Assist Plus to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.
Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE Inopera‐ Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant
tive See Operator's safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE Functions PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative.

Currently Limited Possible causes are:
See Operator's Man‐
ual Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow
tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range
Rthe on-board voltage is too low
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated
disappears.
PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake are operational again.
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP® on again (Y page 71).
PRE-SAFE Functions PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a mal-

Limited See Opera‐ function. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed.
tor's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Radar Sensors Dirty The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.
See Operator's Man‐ Possible causes are:

ual
RDirt on sensors
RHeavy rain or snow
RWhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,
e.g. in desert-like areas
At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning
or is temporarily unavailable:
RPRE-SAFE® PLUS
RPRE-SAFE® Brake
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
RActive Lane Keeping Assist
RActive Blind Spot Assist
RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will
not perform a course-correcting brake application.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and
drive safety systems will be available again. The display message dis-
appears.
X Clean all sensors (Y page 315).
The display message disappears.
6 The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also

lights up in the instrument cluster.
SRS Malfunction Ser‐
vice Required G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 43).
6 The restraint system is malfunctioning at the front on the left or right.

The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Front Left Malfunc‐
tion Service G WARNING
Required or Front The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
Right Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
Z
6 The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system is malfunctioning.

Rear Left Malfunc‐

Required or Rear The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
Right Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
6 The rear center restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning

lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rear Center Malfunc‐
Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
6 The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.

Left Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction G WARNING
Service Required or The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-
Right Side Curtain tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Airbag Malfunction

Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated during the journey,
bag Disabled See even though:

Operator's Manual Ran adult
or
Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret
the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-
passenger front air bag (Y page 51)
Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled
See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐
abled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi-
function display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see
(Y page 51).
Z

Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger front air bag is enabled during the journey, even
bag Enabled See though:
Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's
weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on
the seat.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag may deploy unintentionally.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-
pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 51)
Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled
See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐
abled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi-
function display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.

For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see
(Y page 51).

Lights
b The bulb in question is malfunctioning.

Check Left Low Beam
(Example) or
X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 116).
i LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding
lamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed.
b The active light function is malfunctioning.

Active Headlamps
Inoperative
b The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.

Malfunction See
Operator’s Manual Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.
X Check the fuses (Y page 333).
X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes.
If the display message remains on show:

b The light sensor is malfunctioning.

Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
b You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tone
also sounds.
Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to the Ã position.
b You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.

X Turn the light switch to the L or Ã position.
Switch On Headlamps
Z

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Assist Currently Possible causes are:
Unavailable See RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty

Operator's Manual
RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.

Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine
+ The coolant level is too low.
Check Coolant Level ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
See Operator's Man‐ cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
ual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 309).
If you have to add coolant frequently:
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling
system checked.
? The fan motor is malfunctioning.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.
? The coolant is too hot.

A warning tone also sounds.

Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch
fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which
can occur just by opening the hood.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,
e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and
the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the
engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.
If the temperature increases again:

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
# The battery is not being charged.

ual
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.

Z
# The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is

too low.
Stop Vehicle See A warning tone also sounds.

Operator's Manual
X Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's Manual
display message.
# The battery condition of charge is too low.

Stop Vehicle Leave attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
Engine Running under any circumstances.
X Leave the engine running.
X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
# The engine is switched off and the condition of charge is too low.
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
Start Engine See rear window defroster and interior lighting.
Operator's Manual
X Leave the engine running for a few minutes or drive a long distance.
The battery is being charged.
4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Check Engine Oil At
Next Refueling ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-
erwise be damaged.
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 308).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 308).
If you have to add engine oil frequently:

X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified
specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low
C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
8 The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

Gas Cap Loose
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine:

The engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.
Replace Air Filter
! Vehicles with a diesel engine:

There is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off.
Check Fuel Filter
Check Additive See The DEF tank is almost empty.

Owner's Manual X Have the DEF tank filled as soon as possible at a qualified specialist
workshop (Y page 151).
The DEF system is malfunctioning.

Remaining Starts: The DEF level has fallen to a minimum. You can start the engine a
16 further 16 times.
X Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop (Y page 151).
i You can start the engine a further 16 times. If DEF is not added, it
will then not be possible to restart the engine. Refill the DEF tank
with approximately 1.3 gal (5.0 l) of DEF (Y page 151).
If the 10 starts display message is shown and a warning tone also
sounds, then the DEF system is malfunctioning.
Z
Driving systems
À
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or

a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also
ATTENTION ASSIST: sounds.
Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

ATTENTION ASSIST
Inoperative
Á The vehicle is rising to the level you have selected.
Vehicle Rising
Á The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning
tone also sounds.
Vehicle Rising X Do not pull away.
Please Wait The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.
Á You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.
AIR BODY CONTROL sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short
Stop Vehicle Vehi‐ period.
cle Too Low Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG sports suspension based on AIR
BODY CONTROL sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short
period.
AIR BODY CONTROL is faulty. A warning tone also sounds.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG sports suspension based on AIR
BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.
X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender
or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement is too large.
X Listen for scraping sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level.
Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehi-
cle.
Á You cannot change the vehicle level. Possible causes are:

RYou are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level

Drive More Slowly
RYou are driving too fast with a trailer or the trailer-coupling socket is
being used, e.g. for a bicycle rack
X Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again
(Y page 173).
X Observe the notes on towing a trailer (Y page 203).
Á You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor first needs
to cool down because of frequent level changes.
Compressor Is Cool‐ X Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level.
ing
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
X Allow the compressor to cool down.
When the compressor has cooled down, the display message dis-
appears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selected level.
Á AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling char-

acteristics may be affected.
Malfunction Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG sports suspension based on AIR
BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling character-
istics may be affected.
X Drive as appropriate for the current vehicle level, but do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and
Currently Unavaila‐ temporarily inoperative.
ble See Operator's Possible causes are:
Manual or Active
RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Lane Keeping Assist
Currently Unavaila‐ RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
ble See Operator's RThere have been no lane markings for an extended period.
Manual RThe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.
Inoperative or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Lane Keeping
Assist Inoperative
Z

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Currently Unavaila‐ Possible causes are:
ble See Operator's

Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
Manual or Active
Blind Spot Assist range.
Currently Unavaila‐ Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
ble See Operator's tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
Manual other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
Inoperative or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot
Assist Inoperative
Park Assist Canceled The driver's door is open.

X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with the
driver's door closed.
You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering inter-

vention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc-
tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.

X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 178).
Park Assist Inoper‐ PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty.

ative X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with
PARKTRONIC" section (Y page 178).
Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty.

X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.
If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (the j symbol

does not appear in the multifunction display):
Park Assist The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.

Switched Off The display message disappears automatically.

Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Currently Unavaila‐ Possible causes are:

ble See Operator's
Manual
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display
message disappears.
Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.
Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.

Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ë The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.

Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 172).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 172).
DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 169).
If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS Now DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily
Available unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 165).
DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.

rently Unavailable Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.
ual
tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
disappears.
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.
Z

DISTRONIC PLUS Inop‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty.
erative The following may have also failed:
RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist

RPRE-SAFE® Brake
RSteering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
pended longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

- - - mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 165).
DTR+: Steering Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.
Assist. Currently Possible causes are:
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
RThere are no lane markings for a longer period.
RThe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
disappears.
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again.
DTR+: Steering Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are defective.

Assist. Inoperative However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.
Cruise Control Inop‐ Cruise control is malfunctioning.

erative A warning tone also sounds.

Cruise Control RA condition for activating cruise control has not been met.
- - - mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for exam-

ple.
RESP® is deactivated. The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store
the speed.
or
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 162).
or
X Reactivate ESP® (Y page 220).
or
X Reactivate ESP® in Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 71).
Cruise Control Off Cruise control has been deactivated.

If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-
matically (Y page 162).
Z
Tires
Check Tire Pressure Canada only:

Soon The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss
in pressure.
Possible causes:
Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed
new wheels and tires
Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly
G WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 321).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-
sure is correct (Y page 343).
Check Tire Pressure Canada only:

Then Restart Run The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message
Flat Indicator and has not been restarted since.
X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 343).
Run Flat Indicator Canada only:

Inoperative The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Please Correct Tire The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 345).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 345).

Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The
wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.

G WARNING
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
tire (Y page 321).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 345).
Warning Tire Mal‐ The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel
function position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire
tire (Y page 321).
Tire Press. Monitor Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no
Currently Unavaila‐ signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure
ble monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been resolved.
TirePress. Sen‐ There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several tires.
sor(s) Missing The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction
display.
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-
ist workshop.
Z

Tire Pressure Moni‐ The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The
tor Inoperative No tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
Wheel Sensors X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.

The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for
a few minutes.
Tire Press. Monitor The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle
Shift to 'P' or 'N' You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-
to Start Engine tion k or h.
X Shift the transmission to position j or i .
Apply Brake to You have attempted to shift the transmission to position h, k or i

Shift from 'P' without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
To Deselect P or N, With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the trans-
Depress Brake and mission out of position j or i into another transmission position.
Start Engine X Depress the brake pedal.
X Start the engine.
Transmission Not in The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in
P Risk of Vehicle position k, i or h.
Rolling Away A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
X Close the driver's door completely.
Only Shift to 'P' The vehicle is moving.

when Vehicle is Sta‐ X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
tionary attention to road and traffic conditions.

Service Required Do You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.

Visit Dealer
If transmission position h is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-
mission from position h.
If transmission position k, i or j is selected:
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Reversing Not Possi‐ You cannot shift into transmission position k due to a malfunction.
ble Service Required The transmission positions j, i or h continue to be available.
Transmission Mal‐ A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-

function Stop nents.
A warning tone also sounds. The transmission automatically shifts to
position i.
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Stop Vehicle Leave The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarily
Engine Running Wait impaired or not possible.
Transmission Cool‐ X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
ing attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Leave the engine running.
A The tailgate is open.

G WARNING
When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle inte-
rior if the tailgate is open.
There is a risk of poisoning.
X Close the tailgate.
Z
? The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
X Close the hood.
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all the doors.
_ Vehicle with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat:

The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right-
Rear Left Backrest hand side.
Not Latched or Rear
X Push the backrest back until it engages.
Right Backrest Not
Latched
_ Vehicle with through-loading facility in the rear compartment:

The center rear seat backrest is not engaged.
Rear Center Back‐
X Push the backrest back until it engages.
rest Not Engaged
Ð The power steering is malfunctioning.

Power Steering Mal‐
function See Opera‐ G WARNING
tor's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
If you are able to steer safely:

If you are unable to steer safely:
X Do not drive on.
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver

range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears
in the multifunction display.
¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below
the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 310).
SmartKey

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.
X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not Belong
to Vehicle
Â The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

A warning tone sounds
Take Your Key from
X Remove the SmartKey.
Ignition
Â The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

Obtain a New Key
Â The SmartKey battery is discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 80).
Replace Key Battery
Â The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's
door with the engine switched off. A warning tone sounds
Don't Forget Your This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 seconds and is
Key simply a reminder.
X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
Â The SmartKey is currently undetected.

X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
Key Not Detected
(white display message) If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
position.
Â The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.

Key Not Detected If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-
(red display message) trally or start the engine.
X Locate the SmartKey.
X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.
Z
256 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the
SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey
mode.
Â The SmartKey is continually undetected.

The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is
Remove 'Start' But‐ faulty. A warning tone also sounds.
ton and Insert Key
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
position.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator
and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator
and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or
whilst driving.
Safety
Seat belts
Warning/ N Signal type
indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp
ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six sec-
onds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their
seat belts.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 47).
ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds for up to six seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
The warning tone ceases.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 257

lamp

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the
driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being
driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
Z
Safety systems
lamp
$J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running.
G WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be
affected.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp lights
up while the engine is running.
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
G WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.
$ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The multifunction display also shows a display message with the # symbol.
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

lamp

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning.
If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such
as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.
$J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow
÷! ESP® and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
G WARNING
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
Z

lamp
÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at
least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
In exceptional cases, it may be better to deactivate ESP®:
Rwhen using snow chains
Rin deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 70).
÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.

lamp

å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECO
start/stop function is activated.
ESP® is deactivated.
G WARNING
If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active
Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform braking actions.
X Reactivate ESP®.
In exceptional cases, it may be better to deactivate ESP®:
Rwhen using snow chains
Rin deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 70).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked.
M N Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.
G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
X Only activate SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions descri-
bed in the "Activating/deactivating ESP®" section (Y page 71).
Z

lamp
F! N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric
parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric
parking brake is lit.
6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 43).
Engine

lamp
; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
Rin the engine management
Rin the fuel injection system
Rin the exhaust system
Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines)
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency
mode.
In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon
as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal require-
ments in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations
apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 151).
X Start the engine three to four times after refueling.
If the yellow Check Engine warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is
canceled. The vehicle need not be checked.
8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine
damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Z

lamp
? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or
the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
to road and traffic conditions.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 309).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡
(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning
tone also sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine
radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
G WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood.
to road and traffic conditions.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 309).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.

lamp
X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified

specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
lamp
· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning
tone also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of
travel at too high a speed.
X Be prepared to brake immediately.
X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 73).
For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION PRE-
VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 67).
Z
Tires
lamp
h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.
G WARNING
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-
tion.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay
attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire
(Y page 321).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 345).
h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)

flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.
Vehicle

lamp
Ð N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The power steering is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
If you are able to steer safely:

If you are unable to steer safely:
X Do not drive on.
Z
268 Function restrictions
General notes Please always use this feature instead of con-

sulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you from
The multimedia system section in this Opera-
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
tor's Manual describes the basic principles for
risk of an accident.
operation. More information can be found in the
Digital Operator's Manual. This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-
ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF energy
that is deemed to comply without maximum
G WARNING permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-
If you operate information systems and com- ever, it is recommended to install it at a distance
of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- radiation source and a person's body (not
Multimedia system
cle while driving, you will be distracted from including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and
traffic conditions. You could also lose control legs).
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
G WARNING
situation permits. If you are not sure that this Modifications to electronic components, their
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention software as well as wiring can impair their
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- function and/or the function of other net-
ment when the vehicle is stationary. worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
You must observe the legal requirements for the result, these may no longer function as inten-
country in which you are currently driving when ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
operating the multimedia system. the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
The multimedia system calculates the route to accident and injury.
the destination without taking the following into Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
account, for example:
tronic components or their software. You
Rtraffic lights should have all work to electrical and elec-
Rstop and yield signs tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
Rparking or stopping restrictions specialist workshop.
Rroad narrowing
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations
The multimedia system may give incorrect nav- Function restrictions
igation recommendations if the actual street/
traffic situation does not correspond with the
For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
digital map's data.
ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.
For example: You will notice this, for example, because either
Ra diverted route you will not be able to select certain menu items
Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way or a message will appear to this effect.
street has been changed
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over multimedia system
driving recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Operating system 269
Operating system i Navigation announcements will be heard

even if the sound is muted.
Overview
Functions
General notes
The multimedia system has the following func-
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your tions:
ability to read the display.
RRadio mode
The display has an automatic temperature-con-
trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is RMedia mode with media search
automatically reduced if the temperature is too RSound systems
high. The display may temporarily switch off RNavigation system
completely. COMAND: navigation via the hard drive
Audio 20: navigation via SD card
Cleaning instructions RCommunication functions
Multimedia system
! Do not touch the display. The display has a RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a RVehicle functions with system settings
risk of scratching. If you have to clean the RFavorites functions
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
Controller
The display must be switched off and have
cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not The controller in the center console lets you:
apply pressure to the display surface when Rselect menu items on the display
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam-
Renter characters
age to the display.
Rselect a destination on the map
Rsave entries
Switching the multimedia system
on/off The controller can be:
Rturned 3
X Press the Ü button on the center console
Rslid left or right 1
to the right of the controller.
Rslid forwards or back 4
Rslid diagonally 2
Adjusting the volume
Rpressed briefly or pressed and held 7
X Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the con-
troller.
Back button
The volume is adjusted:
Rfor the currently selected media source You can use the % button to exit a menu or to
call up the basic display of the current operating
Rduring traffic or navigation announcements
mode.
Rin hands-free mode during a phone call
X To exit the menu: briefly press the %
button.
Switching the sound on or off The multimedia system changes to the next
higher menu level in the current operating
X Press the thumbwheel to the right of the con-
mode.
troller.
X To call up the basic display: press the %
or
button for longer than two seconds.
X Press the 8 button on the multifunction The multimedia system changes to the basic
steering wheel. display of the current operating mode.
If the audio output is switched off, the status
line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch
the media source or change the volume, the
sound is automatically switched on.
Z
270 Operating system
Touchpad Character entry with handwriting rec-

ognition
Switching the touchpad on/off
Entering characters
Multimedia system:
X Use one finger to write characters on the sur-
X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐ face.
tingsQTouchpadQActivate Touch‐ The character is entered in the input line. If
pad. the character that you have entered can be
The touchpad is switched on O or off ª. interpreted in different ways, these character
suggestions are displayed.
Operating the touchpad X If character suggestions are shown, turn and
press the controller.
X Resume the character entry on the touchpad.
Handwriting recognition
Multimedia system
: Touch-sensitive surface
; Favorites button
= Calls up quick access for audio
? Back button
: Active input line
Navigating in menus and lists can be done via ; Inserts a space
touch-sensitive surface : by swiping with = Character entered on the touchpad
your finger.
? Deletes characters (Example: COMAND)
X To select the menu item: swipe up, down, to X To display the menu: press the touchpad.
the left or right.
X Press the touchpad.
X To move the digital map: swipe in all direc-
tions.
Swiping with two fingers, e.g. using this func-
tion:
X To show or hide the audio menu: swipe up
or down with two fingers.
X To increase or reduce the vehicle and
sound settings: turn two fingers to the right
or left.
X To zoom in and out of the map: move two : To exit the menu
fingers together or apart. ; To return to handwriting recognition
= To use the phone book or text templates
(COMAND)
? To select the input line or changes the posi-
tion of the cursor
A To switch the language
B To finish character entry
X To select the input line: select p. X To switch to the controller: press the con-
X Swipe up or down. troller.
Character entry using the controller is active.
X To move the cursor within the input line:
X To switch to the touchpad: press the touch-
select p.
pad with your finger.
X Swipe to the left or right. Handwriting recognition on the touchpad is
X To delete characters: swipe to the left if an active.
input line is selected.
X To confirm the entry: press the touchpad.
Favorites
Switching the text reader function of the
Calling up and exiting favorites
handwriting recognition on/off
Multimedia system: X To call up: press the g button on the con-
troller or on the touchpad.
Multimedia system
X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐
X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle.
tingsQTouchpadQRead Out Hand‐
writing Recognition . The favorites are displayed.
The read-aloud function is switched on O or X To exit: press the g button again.
off ª.
Adding favorites
Quick access for audio
Adding a predefined favorite
Changing the station/music track
: Adds a new favorite

Depending on the audio source that is currently ; Renames a selected favorite
activated, you can use this function to select the = Moves a selected favorite
next station or music track.
? Deletes a selected favorite
X Swipe upwards with two fingers on the touch-
pad. X Press the g button.
The current audio source is displayed. X Slide 6 the controller.
X To select the previous or next station/ The menu bar is shown.
music track: glide to the right or left. X Select Reassign.
The selected station/music track is played. The categories are displayed.
X Select a category.
Switching the character entry between The favorites are displayed.
X Select a favorite.
touchpad and controller
X Add a favorite at the desired position.
Requirement: an input line for text, numbers or If a favorite has already been added at this
characters has been selected. position, it will be overwritten.
Z
Adding your own favorite Calling up the climate control bar

X Select VehicleQClimate Control. Multimedia system:
X Press and hold the g button until the
favorites are displayed. X Select Vehicle.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X Add a favorite at the desired position.
X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten. climate control bar is activated.
Calling up the climate control menu

Climate control settings Multimedia system:
General notes X Select Vehicle.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
You can adjust the climate control settings X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
using the climate control bar or the climate con-
Multimedia system
climate control bar is activated.

trol menu.
X To select from climate control bar ;: turn
Important climate control functions can be set and press the controller.
in the climate control bar: The menu for selecting the climate control
RTemperature function is activated.
RAirflow X To select the climate control function: turn
RAir distribution and press the controller.
The selected climate control function
The climate control bar is visible in most dis-
appears.
plays.
You can find all available climate control func-
tions in the climate control menu. You can use Settings in the climate menu
the climate control bar to switch to the climate
control menu. Adjusting the climate mode settings
The climate mode determines the type of air-
Overview flow. The setting is active when the air-condi-
tioning system is set to Ã (Y page 125).
X Call up the climate control menu
(Y page 272).
X To select Climate Mode: turn and press the
controller.
X To change the setting: turn the controller.
X To exit the menu: press the % button.
The climate mode bar displays the current air-

flow setting: DIFFUSE, MEDIUM or FOCUS.
Starting/stopping the perfume atomizer
Climate control bar (COMAND)
The perfume atomizer makes it possible to scent
: Adjusts temperature, air distribution on the the air in individual compartments in the vehicle
left and airflow, displays the current settings interior. Further information (Y page 128).
; Calls up the climate control menu, displays X Call up the climate control menu
the current cooling and climate mode set- (Y page 272).
tings
X To select Air Freshener: turn and press the
= Adjusts temperature and air distribution on
controller.
the right, displays the current settings
The setting element is active.
There may be fewer settings or none depending X To start/stop the perfume atomizer: press
on your vehicle's equipment. the controller.
X To set the intensity: turn the controller when For further information on synchronizing climate
the atomizer is switched on. control settings, see (Y page 126).
X To exit the menu: press the % button.
Switching the ionization on/off Navigation mode

The ionization has a cleansing effect on the air in
the vehicle interior. Further information Important safety notes
(Y page 129).
G WARNING
(Y page 272). If you operate information systems and com-
X To select Ionization: turn and press the munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
controller. cle while driving, you will be distracted from
The setting element is active. traffic conditions. You could also lose control
X To switch the ionization on or off: turn the of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Multimedia system
controller. Only operate the equipment when the traffic
X To exit the menu: press the % button. situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
Settings in the bottom bar of the cli- to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
mate control menu ment when the vehicle is stationary.
Switching cooling with air dehumidifica- You must observe the legal requirements for the
tion on/off country in which you are currently driving when
operating the navigation system.
(Y page 272).
X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
General notes
bottom bar is activated. Among other things, correct functioning of the
X To select O A/C: turn and press the control- navigation system depends on GPS reception. In
ler. certain situations, GPS reception may be
X Switch cooling with air dehumidification on impaired, there may be interference or there
O or off ª. may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
parking garages.
i The current status of the cooling function is Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT
displayed in the climate control bar: A/C ON (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
– activated, A/C OFF – deactivated. The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions
i Deactivating the cooling with air dehumidi- are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD
fication function reduces fuel consumption. card box contains a quick guide.
The following descriptions apply to navigation
Synchronizing the climate control set- with COMAND. Further information can be
tings found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Use O Sync (synchronization) to select the cli-
mate control setting for all zones together O or Selecting a route type and route options
separately ª.
Multimedia system:
(Y page 272). XSelect NaviQNavigation.
X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the XSelect OptionsQRoute Settings.
bottom bar is activated. i If route guidance is active, first slide 6 the
X To select O Sync: turn and press the con- controller and show the menu.
troller. X Select a route type.
X Switch the synchronization function on O or
off ª.
Z
Notes for route types: X Select the location.

REco Route If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are
different ZIP codes available for the location,
Calculates an economic route. the corresponding digits are displayed with an
RDynamic Traffic Route (only available in X.
the USA) X Enter the street and house number.
Traffic reports on the route for the route guid- The address is in the menu.
ance are taken into account.
Further options for destination entry:
RCalculate Alternative Routes
Rkeyword search
Different routes are being calculated. Instead
of Start, select the Continue menu item. The keyword search finds destinations using
X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid
fragments of words.
Options. Rselect the last destination
X Select a route option. Rselect a contact

Rselect a POI
Multimedia system
Notes for route options:

RUse
You can search for a POI by location, name or
Toll Roads
telephone number.
The route calculation includes roads which Rselect destination on the map
require you to pay a usage fee (toll).
Renter intermediate destination
RUse Carpool Lanes (only available in the
USA) You can map the route to the destination
yourself with up to four intermediate destina-
Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access
tions.
conditions for carpool lanes.
Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz
Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool
Apps
lanes option is activated.
Rselect geo-coordinates
Entering an address
Calculating the route
Multimedia system:
Prerequisite: the address has been entered and
X Select NaviQNavigation. is in the menu.
X Select DestinationQAddress Entry.
X Select Start or Continue.
i If route guidance is active, first slide 6 the The route is calculated with the selected route
controller and show the menu. type and the selected route options.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows: If route guidance has already been activated,
a prompt will appear asking whether you wish
Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number to end the current route guidance.
Rcountry, city or ZIP code X Select Yes or Set as Intermediate Des‐
Rcity or ZIP code, center tination.
Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection Yes cancels the current route guidance and
X Select City. starts route calculation to the new destina-
The city in which the vehicle is currently location.
ted (current vehicle position) is at the top. Set as Intermediate Destination adds
Below this, you will see locations for which the new destination in addition to the existing
route guidance has already been carried out. destination and opens the intermediate des-
X Enter the city. tinations list.
The G symbol: the location is contained on
the digital map multiple times.
X To switch to the list: slide the 5 control-
ler.
Connecting a mobile phone available. The mobile phone is always connec-

ted automatically after authorization. Further
Requirements information on using a mobile phone with the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you Manual).
require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile mobile phone, this may be due to particular
1.0 or above. security settings on your mobile phone (see the
Multimedia system: manufacturer's operating instructions).
X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐ Only one mobile phone can be connected to the
tingsQActivate Bluetooth. multimedia system at any one time.
X Activate Bluetooth® O.
Searching for a mobile phone
Audio 20:
Mobile phone:
X Select Tel/®QConnect
Multimedia system
X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue- DeviceQSearch for PhonesQStart
tooth® visibility for other devices (see the Search.
manufacturer's operating instructions). The available mobile phones are displayed.
The Bluetooth® device names for all of one man- COMAND:
ufacturer's products might be identical. To
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile X Select PhoneQConnect
phone, change the device name (see the man- DeviceQSearch for PhonesQStart
ufacturer's operating instructions). Search.
The available mobile phones are displayed.
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Symbols in the device list
Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow- Sym- Explanation
ing information will be transmitted after you bol
connect:
RPhone book Ï New mobile phone found, not yet
RCall lists
authorized.
RMessages Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but is
not connected.
i Further information on suitable mobile
phones can be obtained on the Internet at: # Mobile phone is authorized and
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ connected.
connect
i In the USA, you can get in touch with the Connecting a mobile phone
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
X Select mobile phone.
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus- A code is displayed in the multimedia system
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. and on the mobile phone.
X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia
Searching for and authorizing a mobile system.
phone X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-
Before using your mobile phone with the multi- ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the
media system for the first time, you will need to connection to the multimedia system and for
search for the phone and then authorize (con- the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author- prompt to confirm may take up to two
ization either takes place by means of Secure
Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The
multimedia system automatically makes the
procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
Z
minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur- Activating media mode

er's operating instructions).
X If the codes are different: select No on the
Multimedia system:
multimedia system. X Select MediaQDevices.
The process is canceled. The available media sources will be shown.
Repeat authorization. X Select the media source.
Playable files are played.
Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode):
X Select Bluetooth® name of the mobile phone. Inserting and removing an SD card
The input menu for the passkey is displayed.
X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi- Important safety notes
nation as a passkey.
X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system. G WARNING
X Press ¬ to confirm. SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-
Multimedia system
X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile lowed and cause choking. This poses an
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys- Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up
tion immediately.
to two minutes to be displayed (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions).
! If you are no longer using the SD card, you
should remove it and store it outside the vehi-
Switching between mobile phones cle. High temperatures can damage the card.
If you have authorized more than one mobile Inserting an SD card
phone, you can switch between the individual
The SD card slot is located in the stowage com-
phones.
partment under the armrest.
Multimedia system:
X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until
X Select Connect Device. the SD card engages. The side with the con-
X Select a mobile phone from the device list. tacts must face down.
X Select the media source (Y page 276).
Media mode Removing an SD card

X Press the SD card.
General notes The SD card is ejected.
X Remove the memory card.
If you wish to play external media sources, the
default display must already be turned on. Fur-
ther information on media mode (see the Digital Connecting USB devices
Operator's Manual).
The following external media sources can be
used:
RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®)
RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)
RCD
RDVD (COMAND)
RSD cards
Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth®
There are two USB ports in the stowage space

under the armrest.
X Connect the USB device to the USB port.
X Select the media source (Y page 276).
Multimedia system
Z
278 Stowage areas
Stowage areas RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-

sible and as low down in the cargo compart-
Loading guidelines ment as possible.
RThe load must not protrude above the upper
G WARNING edge of the seat backrests.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate seats if possible.
is open when the engine is running, particu- RHook in the cargo net when loading.
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
could enter the passenger compartment. wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for
There is a risk of poisoning. protection.
Turn off the engine before opening the tail-
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open. Stowage spaces
G WARNING Important safety notes
Stowage and features
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or

G WARNING
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- and these are not adequately secured, they
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- could slip or be flung around and thereby
den change in direction. strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
Always store objects so that they cannot be
phone brackets may not always be able to
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
hold the objects placed in them in the event of
loads against slipping or tipping before the
an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-
journey.
larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
changes of direction.
G WARNING
RAlways stow objects in such a way that they
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
cannot be tossed about in these or similar
become very hot. If you come into contact
situations.
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury. RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage
Always be particularly careful around the
nets or stowage nets.
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touch- REnsure that closable stowage spaces are
ing them. shut before beginning your journey.

RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in
are dependent on the distribution of the load the cargo compartment.
within the vehicle. For this reason, you should
observe the following notes when transporting a Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278).
load:
RNever exceed the maximum permissible
gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight
rating for the vehicle (including occupants).
The values are specified on the vehicle iden-
tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's
door.
RThe cargo compartment is the preferred place
to carry objects.
Stowage areas 279
Stowage compartments in the front Eyeglasses compartment
Glove box
X To open: press marking :.

The eyeglasses compartment opens down.
To open: pull handle : and open glove box

X
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is
flap ;. always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until
it engages. Stowage compartment in the front center
Objects in A4 format or an iPad®, for example,
console
can be stored in the glove box. For vehicles with
a perfume atomizer (Y page 128) the storage
space of the glove box is restricted.
X Briefly press trim ; in the direction of the

arrow.
Cover : swings up.
The glove box can only be locked and unlocked
using the mechanical key (Y page 79). Stowage compartment under the armrest
X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the
lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2.
X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the
lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise to
position 1.
X To open: press button : at front.

The stowage space opens.
Z
280 Stowage areas
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-

lowing may be in the stowage space:
Ran SD card slot
Ra multimedia connector unit with two USB
ports, e.g. for iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player
(see the Digital Operator's Manual)
Ra mobile phone bracket
Ra small stowage space in the upper front sec-
tion
Stowage compartment in the doors
X To open: fold down the seat armrest.
X Press on the front of release catch : and fold
the cover of the armrest upwards.
Additional stowage space

Depending on the equipment, the following
additional stowage areas are available in the
vehicle:
Rcard and coin holder in the dashboard above
the light switch (not suitable for holding thin
You can store items such as a rolled-up fluores- objects such as shopping tokens)
cent jacket (driver's door) and the vehicle docu-
Rthe open stowage compartment in the center
ment wallet (front-passenger door) in stowage
space : in the doors. console
Rstowage net in the front-passenger footwell
In doors ; you can store bottles with a capacity
of up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter). Rthe map pockets on the back of the driver's
and front-passenger seat
Stowage space in the rear Rparcel net on the left-hand side in the cargo
compartment
Stowage compartment in the rear seat Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278)
armrest and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(Y page 278).
! Do not sit on or support your body weight on
the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
Ski and snowboard bag
! Close the cover of the stowage compart-
ment before folding the rear seat armrest Important safety notes
back into the seat backrest.
G WARNING
The skibag in conjunction with the lashing
straps cannot restrain any objects other than
skis.
Stowage areas 281
Vehicle occupants could be struck in the

event of sudden braking or an accident, for
instance, if you:
Rtransport other heavy or sharp-edged
objects in the skibag
Rdo not secure the skibag with the lashing
straps
There is a risk of accident and injury.
Store only skis in the skibag. Always secure
the skibag with the lashing straps so that it
cannot move around. X Engage tensioning strap = in a diagonal pat-
tern on hooks ? in cargo tie-down rings A as
A maximum of four pairs of skis or two snow- shown.
boards can be transported in the ski and snow-

board bag.
EASY-PACK Quickfold rear bench seat
Securing the ski/snowboard bag in the
cargo compartment Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for-
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
X Fold the middle rear seat backrest forwards
(Y page 281). RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-
X Slide the ski and snowboard bag between the partment cannot be restrained by the seat
two outside rear seat backrests. Ensure that backrest.
the wheels of the ski/snowboard bag are in There is an increased risk of injury.
the cargo compartment.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
X Open the ski/snowboard bag with zip : and
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
place the skis or snowboards inside it.
are engaged.
X Close the ski and snowboard bag.
X Pull tensioning strap ; tight by the loose end
! When folding the rear seat backrest for-
until the skis or snowboards are held firmly wards, ensure that there are no items lying on
inside the ski/snowboard bag. the seat cushions. These items could other-
wise be damaged or could themselves dam-
age the rear seats.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278).
The outside and the middle rear seat backrests
can be folded down separately to increase the
cargo compartment capacity. The division ratio
is 40/20/40.
Z
282 Stowage areas
Both outside seat backrests in the rear com- X Pull the left or right release handle :.
partment are electrically unlocked with the The corresponding backrest folds forward.
release handles either in the cargo compart- X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
ment or beside the seat backrests in the rear back if necessary.
compartment (vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate
only). The corresponding rear seat backrests Release handle next to the seat backrest
then fold forward automatically.
The release handle beside the seat backrest is
only present in vehicles with an EASY-PACK tail-
Folding the rear seat backrests forward gate.
Preparation
X Vehicles without memory function: if neces-
sary, move the driver's or front-passenger
seat forward.
X Vehicles with memory function: when one or
both parts of the rear seat backrest are folded
forward, the respective front seat moves

forward slightly, when necessary, in order to
avoid contact.
When the engine is running, the driver's seat
does not move forward.
X Fully insert the rear seat backrest head X Pull the left or right release handle : beside
restraints. the seat backrests.
The corresponding backrest folds forward.
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Middle rear seat backrest
X Hook seat belt buckle tongue : through seat

belt retainer ;.
Release handle in the cargo compartment
X Pull release lever ; forward.

Rear seat backrest : is released.
X Fold rear seat backrest : forward.
back if necessary.
Folding the rear seat backrest back

! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
aged.
Stowage areas 283
Locking the center rear seat backrest
Left and right seat backrest:

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat In order to prevent the cargo compartment from
forward if necessary. being accessed by unauthorized persons, the
X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it

center seat backrest can be locked using a
engages. catch. The center seat backrest can only be fol-
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and ded forward together with the left seat backrest.
locked, this will be shown in the multifunction X To lock: fold the left and center seat backr-
display in the instrument cluster. A warning
ests forward. Make sure that the center and
tone also sounds.
left seat backrests are engaged and joined
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary together.
(Y page 101). X Slide catch : upwards.
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat The release mechanism of the center seat
back if necessary. backrest is locked.
X To unlock: fold the left and center seat backr-
ests forward.
X Slide catch : downwards.
Adjusting the angle of the rear seat

backrests (cargo position)
Middle rear seat backrest:

forward if necessary.
X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visi-
ble.
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary
(Y page 101).
back if necessary.
Z
284 Stowage areas
Vehicles with the stowage space package: to

enlarge the cargo compartment, you can adjust
the rear seat backrests to a 10 degrees steeper
angle (cargo position).
X Fold the seat backrest forward (Y page 281).
X Move handle : in the direction of the arrow.
X Push back seat backrest ; as far as han-
dle : until the backrest engages.
The cargo position has been reached.
Securing loads : Cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compart-

ment
Cargo tie-down rings
Observe the following notes on securing loads: Bag hook
RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 278). G WARNING

RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
rings.
or items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down
gage could be flung around and thereby hit
rings evenly.
vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a
load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip changing directions. There is a risk of injury.
protection for light loads. Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
corners. objects on the bag hooks.
RPad sharp edges for protection.
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of
6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure
a load.
: Cargo tie-down rings in the rear-compart-

ment footwell (vehicles with cargo net)
: Bag hook
Stowage areas 285
Cargo compartment cover Installing/removing the cargo compart-

ment cover
G WARNING
On its own, the cargo compartment cover
cannot secure or restrain heavy objects,
items of luggage and heavy loads. You could
be hit by an unsecured load during sudden
changes in direction, braking or in the event of
an accident. There is an increased risk of
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
X To remove: make sure that cargo compart-
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by

ment cover : is rolled up.
using tie downs, even if you are using the X Push in the end cap of cargo compartment
cargo compartment cover. cover : in the direction of the arrow on the
right-hand side using the grip =.
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that X Push cargo compartment cover : into oppo-
you do not stack the load in the cargo com- site anchorage ;.
partment higher than the lower edge of the
X Remove cargo compartment cover : up.
side windows. Do not place heavy objects on
top of the cargo compartment cover. X To install: place cargo compartment
cover : into anchorage ; on the left-hand
The cargo compartment cover is secured behind side.
the rear bench seat backrest.
X Push in the opposite end cap of cargo com-
partment cover : in the direction of the
Extending and retracting the cargo arrow and insert the cargo compartment
compartment cover cover : into the right-hand anchorage from
above ;.
Cargo net
G WARNING
On its own, the cargo net cannot secure or
restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and
heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured
load during sudden changes in direction,
X To extend: pull cargo compartment cover braking or in the event of an accident. There is
back by grab handle : and clip it into retain- an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
ers ; on the left and right.
X To retract: unhook the cargo compartment Always store objects so that they cannot be
cover from retainers ; on the left and right flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
and guide it forward by grab handle : until it loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
is fully retracted. using tie downs, even if you are using the
cargo net.
Z
286 Stowage areas
It is important to use a cargo net if you load the Attaching and tightening the cargo net
vehicle with small objects above the seat backr-
ests. For safety reasons, always use a cargo net
when transporting loads.
Damaged cargo nets can no longer fulfill their
protective function and must be replaced. Visit a
Using the cargo net

Preparing the cargo net
Cargo net installed behind the C-pillar

X To attach and tighten: insert guide rod :
into bracket ; and slide forward.

X Attach belt hook ? to the cargo tie-down ring
and pull down on the loose end of the lashing
strap until the cargo net is taut.
X After driving a short distance, check the ten-
sion of the cargo net and retighten it if nec-
essary.
X To release and detach: pull the belt clamp
The cargo net can be used in two different posi- = up.
tions (behind the B-pillar or the C-pillar):
X Unhook belt hook ? from the cargo tie-down
RThe brackets behind B-pillar : are required ring.
for the cargo compartment enlargement X Detach guide rod : from bracket ;.
(Y page 281).
The corresponding cargo tie-down rings to Storing the cargo net
tighten the net are located in the footwell of X Press the red button on the upper and lower
the rear bench seat (Y page 284). guide rods.
RThe brackets behind C‑pillar ; are required
X Fold the cargo net and roll it up.
for the cargo compartment behind the rear
X Close the two Velcro fasteners on the cargo
bench seat.
net holder.
The corresponding cargo tie-down rings to
X Put the cargo net in the stowage space under
tension the net are located in the cargo com-
partment (Y page 284). the cargo compartment floor.
The cargo net is located in the stowage space
under the cargo compartment floor.
X Open both Velcro fasteners and remove the
Parcel net
cargo net. Important safety notes
X Unroll and unfold the cargo net.
The upper and lower guide rods must engage G WARNING
audibly.
If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
and these are not adequately secured, they
could slip or be flung around and thereby
strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets may not always be able to
hold the objects placed in them in the event of
Stowage areas 287
an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-

larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
cannot be tossed about in these or similar
situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
REnsure that closable stowage spaces are
shut before beginning your journey. X Slide cargo compartment floor ; horizon-
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin- tally into the cargo compartment until mount-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in ings ? are positioned in guides E on both
sides.

X Raise cargo compartment floor ; by approx-
Observe the following notes: imately 45° so that mountings ? engage
audibly.
RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 278).
Make sure that:
RTo avoid damaging the side trim panels in the
Rrubber band C is below clasp B. The rubber
cargo compartment, maintain a sufficient dis-
tance from the side trim panels in the cargo band must not block the clasp.
compartment when removing and inserting Rrubber band = is below base D.
the cargo compartment floor. X Fold cargo compartment floor ; down and
press down until it engages.
Installing the parcel net
Coat hooks on the tailgate
X Open cargo compartment floor ;

(Y page 288), raise by approximately 45° and
remove to the rear. : Coat hook
X Place cargo compartment floor ; on a clean
surface.
X Stretch parcel net : over cargo compart- Cargo compartment plug-in module
ment floor ; as shown. (telescope bars)
Make sure that:
General notes
Rparcelnet : is aligned with the center of
cargo compartment floor ; The cargo compartment plug-in module allows
Rrubber band = is below mountings ? you to use your cargo compartment for a variety
Rtab A is facing forward of purposes.
Z
288 Stowage areas
The following accessory parts are located under X Turn mounting elements = to =.
the cargo compartment floor: X Insert mounting elements = into brack-
Ra telescopic rod ets :.
Rtwo mounting elements X Pull telescopic rod ? apart.
Rtwo brackets X Insert telescopic rod ? into mounting ele-
ments =.
Important safety notes X Turn both mounting elements = to & until
you feel them engage.
G WARNING
If you drive when the cargo compartment floor
is open, objects could be flung around, thus Stowage well under the cargo com-
striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of partment floor
injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
G WARNING
Always close the cargo compartment floor

before a journey. If you drive when the cargo compartment floor
is open, objects could be flung around, thus
Installation striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always close the cargo compartment floor
before a journey.
The following items are located beneath the

cargo compartment floor:
Rthe folding box
Rtire-change tool kit
Rthe TIREFIT
Rthe EASY-PACK load-securing kit
X Open cargo compartment floor ;

(Y page 288). Opening/closing the cargo compart-
X Attach brackets : in the desired position on ment floor
the side of cargo compartment floor ;.
X Close cargo compartment floor ;.
X To open: open the tailgate.

X Holding ribbing ;, press handle : down.
Handle : folds up.
Stowage areas 289
Locking/unlocking the cargo compart-

ment floor
X Fold out hook = on the underside of the

cargo compartment floor in the direction of
the arrow.
1 Cargo compartment floor unlocked

2 Cargo compartment floor locked
The cargo compartment floor can be locked and
unlocked using the mechanical key.
Roof carrier
G WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
X Attach hook = to the cargo compartment's of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
upper seal ?. istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
X To close: detach hook = from the cargo load, the driving characteristics, as well as
compartment's upper seal ?. steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
X Fasten hook = to the bracket on the under- There is a risk of an accident.
side of the cargo compartment floor. Never exceed the maximum roof load and
X Fold the cargo compartment floor down. adjust your driving style.
X Press the cargo compartment floor down until
it engages. You will find information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section
(Y page 370).
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use roof carriers that have been tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This
helps to avoid damage to the vehicle.
Position the load on the roof carrier in such a
way that the vehicle will not sustain damage
even when it is in motion.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure
that when the roof carrier is installed you can:
Rfully raise the sliding sunroof/panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Ropen the tailgate fully
Z
290 Features
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load ! Only use the cup holders for containers of
may become detached from the vehicle. You the right size and which have lids. The drinks
must therefore ensure that you observe the roof could otherwise spill.
carrier manufacturer's installation instructions.
Vehicles with a panorama roof with power ! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup
holder in the center console to continuous,
tilt/sliding panel: the panorama roof with
strong and direct sunlight. The passenger
power tilt/sliding panel cannot be opened if a
compartment in the area of the center con-
roof carrier is installed. The panorama roof with
sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-
power tilt/sliding panel can still be raised to
centrated and reflected sunlight.
allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. If the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278).
makes contact with a roof carrier approved by
Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof will lower slightly Cup holder in the front center console
but remain raised at the rear.
Attaching the roof carrier

X Secure the roof carrier to the roof rails.

instructions.
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes X To open: open the stowage compartment
(Y page 279).
G WARNING X To remove: slide catch = forward and pull
If you transport objects in the vehicle interior out cup holder ;.
and these are not adequately secured, they X To insert: insert cup holder ; and slide back
could slip or be flung around and thereby catch =.
strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup X To close: push cover : of the stowage com-
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile partment closed.
phone brackets may not always be able to If you remove the cup holder insert, you can use
hold the objects placed in them in the event of the resulting compartment for stowage.
an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu- You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for
larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
cannot be tossed about in these or similar ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on
situations. the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- as you could otherwise damage it.
trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear
nets or stowage nets. seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder
REnsure that closable stowage spaces are could be damaged.
shut before beginning your journey.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in
Features 291
X Fold down the rear seat armrest. : Mirror light

X To open: press the front of cup holder : ; Bracket
or ;. = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
Cup holder : or ; extends automatically. ? Vanity mirror

X To fold out: place a container in the cup A Mirror cover
holder.
The cup holder : or ; folds down automat- Vanity mirror in the sun visor
ically.
X To fold in: remove the container. Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is
The cup holder : or ; folds in automati- clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has
cally. been folded up.
X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until
it engages. Glare from the side
Sun visors
Overview
G WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down X Fold down the sun visor.
while driving. X Pull sun visor : out of retainer ;.
X Swing sun visor : to the side.
X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required.
Rear side window roller sunblinds

! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Do
not let it snap back suddenly as this would
damage the automatic roller mechanism.
! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sun-
blind hooked in and the side windows opened
simultaneously. The roller sunblind can jump
Z
292 Features
out of the retainers and spring back suddenly X To install the insert: press insert ? into the
when driving at high speeds, e.g. when driving holder until it engages.
on the freeway. This could damage the inertia X To close: close the cover of the ashtray.
reel. Therefore, either close the side window
X Push cover : of the stowage compartment
or retract the roller sunblind before driving at
closed.
high speeds.
i You can remove the ashtray insert and use
the resulting compartment for stowage.
Rear compartment ashtray

X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by

tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the top
of the window.
X To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge.

Ashtray
X To remove the insert: push ribbing = from
Front ashtray the left side and pull insert : upwards.
X To install the insert: install insert : from
! The stowage space under the ashtray is not above into the holder and press down into the
heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in holder until it engages.
the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is
properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage
space could be damaged.
Cigarette lighter
G WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
X To open: open the stowage compartment
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
(Y page 279).
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
X Push the cover of the ashtray upwards at its
right side =. out of reach of children. Never leave children
X To remove the insert: hold the sides of
unsupervised in the vehicle.
insert ?, push it forward and lift it up ; and
out. Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter
when road and traffic conditions permit.
Features 293
Socket in the front center console
Cigarette lighter (example)

12 V socket (example)

(Y page 279). (Y page 279).
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically X To close: push cover : of the stowage com-
when the heating element is red-hot. partment closed.
X To close: push cover : of the stowage com-
partment closed. Socket in the rear compartment center
console
12 V sockets
General notes
The sockets can be used for accessories with a
maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories
include such items as chargers for mobile
phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when the
engine is switched off, the battery may dis-
charge. X Pull cover ; out by its top edge.
An emergency cut-out ensures that the on- X Lift up the cover of socket :.
board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-
board voltage is too low, the power to the sock- Socket in the cargo compartment
ets is automatically cut. This ensures that there
is sufficient power to start the engine.
If you have connected a device to the 12 V
socket, leave the cover of the stowage com-
partment open. This prevents the cover from
being blocked.
Z
294 Features
X Lift up the cover of socket :. can be connected. These devices, such as

games consoles, chargers and laptops, must not
consume more than a maximum of 150 watts
altogether.
115 V socket
Requirements for operation of these devices:
Important safety notes Rthe electronic device that you connect has a
suitable connector and conforms to stand-
G DANGER ards specific to the country you are in.
When a suitable device is connected, the Rthe plug of the electronic device is plugged
115 V power socket will be carrying a high correctly into 115 V power socket.
voltage. You could receive an electric shock if Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be
the connector cable or the 115 V power connected must not exceed 150 watts.
socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged Rthe on-board power supply is within a permis-
or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury. sible voltage range.
Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartment and
RUse only connector cables that are dry and
the cargo compartment are operational.

free of damage.
RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the Using the 115 V power socket
115 V power socket is dry.
RHave the 115 V power socket checked or
replaced immediately at a qualified speci-
alized workshop if it is damaged or has been
pulled out of the trim.
RNever plug the connector cable into a 115 V
power socket that is damaged or has been
pulled out of the trim.
G DANGER
If you reach into the power socket or plug
inappropriate devices into the power socket, X To switch on: switch the ignition on.
you could receive an electric shock. There is a X Open flap =.
risk of fatal injury. X Insert the plug of the electronic device into
Only connect appropriate devices to the 115 V power socket :.
power socket. Indicator lamp ; lights up.
X To switch off: disconnect the plug from
! Note that work and repairs on the 115 V 115 V power socket :.
power socket should only be carried out by Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.
qualified specialist personnel.
General notes
The 115 V power socket provides an alternating
voltage of 115 V so that small electronic devices
Features 295
Problems with the 115 V power socket

The warning lamp on the The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.
115 V power socket is X Start the engine.
not lit.
or
X Charge the battery (Y page 327).
If the indicator lamp still does not light up:

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.

X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.
X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.

If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down the
converter:
You have connected an electronic device that has a constant nominal

power of less than 150 watts, but has a very high switch-on current.
This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 115 V
power socket will not supply it with power.
X Connect a suitable electronic device.
mbrace The system is available if:

Rit has been activated and is operational
General notes Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is
The mbrace system is only available in the USA. available for transmitting data to the Cus-
You must have a license agreement to activate tomer Center
the mbrace service. Make sure that your system Ra service subscription is available
is activated and operational. To register, press Determining the location of the vehicle on a map
the ï Info call button. If any of the steps is only possible if:
mentioned are not carried out, the system may RGPS reception is available
not be activated.
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the
If you have questions about the activation, con- Customer Assistance Center
tact one of the following telephone hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
The mbrace system
1-866-990-9007 To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as
Shortly after successfully registering with the follows:
mbrace service, a user ID and password will be X Press the W or X button on the multi-
sent to you by mail. You can use this password function steering wheel.
to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners
Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. or
X Use the multimedia system volume control.
Z
296 Features
The system offers various services, e.g.: Emergency call

RAutomatic and manual emergency call
RRoadside Assistance call
RInfo call G WARNING
You can find information and a description of all It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
available features under "Owners Online" at even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
http://www.mbusa.com. emergency if:
Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-
System self-test
cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
After you have switched on the ignition, the sys- Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of
tem carries out a self-diagnosis.
road
A malfunction in the system has been detected
if one of the following occurs: Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not

seen by other road users, particularly when
come on during the system self-test. dark or in poor visibility conditions

RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Assistance button does not light up during Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-
self-diagnosis of the system. lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
RThe indicator lamp in the ï Info call button Move to a safe location along with other vehi-
does not light up during the system self-diag- cle occupants. In such situations, secure the
nosis
vehicle in accordance with national regula-
RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-
lowing buttons continues to light up red after tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.
the system self-diagnosis:
General notes
- SOS button
- F Roadside Assistance call button
Observe the notes on system activation
(Y page 295).
- Info call buttonï
An emergency call is dialed automatically if an
Rafter the system self-diagnosis, the Inoper‐ air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-
ative or Service Not Activated message gered. You cannot end an automatically trig-
appears in the multifunction display. gered emergency call yourself.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, An emergency call can also be initiated man-
the system may not operate as expected. In the ually.
event of an emergency, help will have to be
As soon as the emergency call has been initi-
summoned by other means.
ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
Have the system checked at the nearest flashes. The Connecting Call message
Mercedes-Benz Service Center or contact the appears in the multifunction display.
following service hotlines:
The audio output is muted.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at
Once the connection has been made, the Call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Connected message appears in the multifunc-
1-866-990-9007
tion display.
All important information on the emergency is
transmitted, for example:
RCurrent location of the vehicle (as determined
by the GPS system)
RVehicle identification number
RInformation on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been initi-
ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-
Features 297
lished between the Customer Assistance Center Roadside Assistance

and the vehicle occupants.
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
attempts to get more information on the
emergency.
RIf there is no response from the vehicle occu-
pants, an ambulance is immediately sent to
the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
the system has been unable to initiate an emer-
gency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant
X To call: press Roadside Assistance but-
mobile phone network is not available. The indi-
cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu- ton :.

ously. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
tomer Assistance Center.
The Call Failed message appears in the mul-
tifunction display and must be confirmed. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
button : flashes while the call is active. The
In this case, summon assistance by other Connecting Call message appears in the
means. multifunction display. The audio output is
Making an emergency call muted.
If a connection can be made, theCall Connec‐
ted message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
for example:
Rcurrent location of the vehicle
Rvehicle identification number
The multimedia system display indicates that a
call is active. During the call, you can change to
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-
X To initiate an emergency call manually: ton on the multimedia system, for example.
press cover : briefly to open. Voice output is not available in this case.
X Press and hold the SOS button for at least one A voice connection is established between the
second ;. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes and the vehicle occupants.
until the emergency call is concluded. From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the
X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
Benz Customer Assistance Center. can ascertain the nature of the problem
X After the emergency call, close cover :. (Y page 300).
If the mobile phone network is unavailable, The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
mbrace will not be able to make the emergency ter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz tech-
call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after nician or makes arrangements for your vehicle
pressing SOS button ;, you do not know if to be transported to the nearest Mercedes-Benz
mbrace has successfully made the emergency Service Center.
call. In this case, always summon assistance by You may be charged for services such as repair
other means. work and/or towing.
Z
298 Features
You can find more information in the separate The multimedia system display indicates that a
mbrace manual. call is active. During the call, you can change to
The system has not been able to initiate a Road- the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-
side Assistance call, if: ton on COMAND, for example.
Rthe F indicator lamp for the Roadside Voice output is not available in this case.
Assistance call button is flashing continu- A voice connection is established between the
ously. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz and the vehicle occupants.
Customer Assistance Center was estab- You receive information about operating your
lished. vehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Ser-
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net- vice Center and about other products and serv-
work is not available, for example. ices from Mercedes-Benz.
The Call Failed message appears in the mul- You can find further information on the mbrace
tifunction display. system under "Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
The system has not been able to initiate an MB
multifunction steering wheel. Info call, if:

or
Rthe indicator lamp in the ï Info call button
X Press the corresponding multimedia system
is flashing continuously.
button for ending a phone call.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was estab-
Info call button lished.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-
work is not available, for example.
The Call Failed message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending a phone call.
Call priority
X To call: press Info call button :. When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus- Assistance or Info calls, an emergency call can
tomer Assistance Center. still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call
The indicator lamp in Info call button : will take priority and override all other active
flashes while the connection is being made. calls.
The Connecting Call message appears in The indicator lamp of the respective button
the multifunction display. The audio output is flashes until the call is ended.
muted. An emergency call can only be terminated by the
If a connection can be made, theCall Connec‐ Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
ted message appears in the multifunction dis- All other calls can be ended by pressing:
play.
Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steering
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception wheel
are available, the system transfers data to the
Rthe corresponding button in the multimedia
for example: system to end the voice call
When a call is initiated, the audio system is
Rcurrent location of the vehicle
muted.
Rvehicle identification number
Features 299
The mobile phone is no longer connected to the Search & Send

multimedia system.
However, if you want to use your mobile phone, General notes
do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be
a safe location. equipped with mbrace and a navigation system.
Additionally, an mbrace service subscription
Downloading destinations must be completed.
"Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A
Downloading destinations destination address which is found on Google
Downloading destinations gives you access to a Maps® can be transferred via mbrace directly to
database with over 15 million points of interest your vehicle's navigation system.
(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-
gation system in your vehicle. If you know the Specifying and sending the destination
destination, the address can be downloaded. address
Alternatively, you can obtain the location of X Go to the website http://maps.google.com
Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations and enter a destination address into the entry

in the vicinity. field.
Furthermore, you can download routes with up X To send the destination address to the e-
to four way points. mail address of your mbrace account:
You are prompted to confirm route guidance to click on the corresponding button on the web-
the address entered. site.
X SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1 Example:
the controller and confirm with 7. If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
The system calculates the route and subse- 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will
quently starts the route guidance with the be sent to your vehicle.
address entered. X When the "Send" dialog window appears:
If you select No the address can be stored in Enter the e-mail address you specified when
the address book. setting up your mbrace account into the cor-
responding field.
The destination download function is available
if: X Click "Send".
Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys- Information on specific commands such as
tem. "Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the
Rthe relevant mobile phone network is availa-
website.
ble and data transfer is possible. Calling up a transmitted destination
Route Assistance address
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
and cannot be purchased separately. lock (Y page 132).
The transmitted destination address is loaded
You can use the Route Assistance function even
into the vehicle's navigation system.
if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation
system. A display message appears, asking whether
navigation should be started.
Within the framework of this service, you receive
a professional and reliable form of navigation X SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1
support without having to leave your vehicle. the controller and confirm with 7.
The customer service representative finds a The system calculates the route and subse-
suitable route depending on your vehicle's cur- quently starts the route guidance with the
rent position and the desired destination. You address entered.
will then be guided live through the current route If you select No the address can be stored in
section. the address book.
Z
300 Features
If you have sent more than one destination The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked
address, each individual destination must be within four days of the ignition being turned off.
confirmed separately. After this time, remote closing may be delayed
Destination addresses are loaded in the same by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle
order as the order in which they were sent. can no longer be valet locked remotely.
If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with The vehicle remote closing feature is available if
mbrace and activated mbrace accounts: the relevant mobile phone network is available
and a data connection is possible.
If multiple vehicles are registered under the
same e-mail address, the destination will be X Contact the following service hotlines:
sent to all the vehicles. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
Vehicle remote opening or 1-866-990-9007
You will be asked for your password.
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you The next time you are inside the vehicle and you
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked
replacement SmartKey is not available. Remotely message appears in the multifunction
The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes- display.

Benz Customer Assistance Center. Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:
The vehicle can be immediately opened Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-
remotely within four days of the ignition being
tion
turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking
may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,
30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened Android™)
remotely. To do this, you will need your identification num-
The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa- ber and password.
ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail-
able and a data connection is possible. Stolen vehicle recovery service
X Contact the following service hotlines:
If your vehicle has been stolen:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) X Notify the police.
or 1-866-990-9007 The police will issue a numbered incident
You will be asked for your password. report.
X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon X This number will be forwarded to the
with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
tance Center. together with your PIN.
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via: Center then tries to locate the system. The
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
tion contacts you and the local law enforcement
Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®, agency if the vehicle is located.
Android™) However, only the law enforcement agency is
To do this, you will need your identification num- informed of the location of the vehicle.
ber and password. If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for
longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz
Vehicle remote closing Customer Assistance Center is automatically
notified.
The vehicle remote-closing feature can be used
when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and Vehicle Health Check
you are no longer nearby.
The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes- With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer
Benz Customer Assistance Center. Assistance Center can provide improved sup-
port for problems with your vehicle. During an
Features 301
existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is
Customer Assistance Center. the transfer of service data to the Customer
The customer service representative can use Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display
the received data to decide what kind of assis- shows a message to this effect together with
tance is required. You are then, for example, information about any special offers at your
guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service workshop.
Center or a recovery vehicle is called. This information can also be called up under
If vehicle data need to be transferred during an "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is Information on the data stored in the vehicle
initiated by the Customer Assistance Center. (Y page 32).
You will see the Roadside Assistance Con‐ Information on Roadside Assistance
nected message in the display. If the Vehicle (Y page 29).
Health Check can be started, the Request for
Vehicle Diagnostics Received Start Downloading routes
vehicle diagnostics? message appears in
the display. Downloading routes allows you to transfer and

X Press the Yes button to confirm the message. save predefined routes in the navigation sys-
tem.
X If the Vehicle Diagnostics Please
Start Ignition message appears: turn the A route can be prepared and sent by either a
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock customer service representative or under "Own-
(Y page 132). ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
X If the Please follow the instructions Each route can include up to four way points.
received by phone and move your vehi‐ Once a route has been received by the naviga-
cle to a safe position. message tion system, you will see the Do you want to
appears: please follow the instructions start route guidance? Destination
received by phone and move your vehicle to a Received destination has been saved
safe position. in "Previous destinations". message on
The message in the display disappears. the multimedia system display.
The vehicle operating state check begins. You The route is saved.
will see the Vehicle Diagnostics Active X To start route guidance: select Yes.
message. An overview of the route is shown in the dis-
If you select Cancel, the Vehicle Health play.
Check is canceled completely. If you select No, the saved route can be called
When the check is complete, the Sending up later in the navigation menu.
vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐ X Select Start.
nection may be interrupted during Route guidance starts.
data transfer) message appears. The vehicle Downloaded and saved routes can be called up
data can now be sent. again.
X Press the OK button to confirm the message.
The voice connection with the Customer Speed alert
Assistance Center is terminated.
You will see the Vehicle Diagnostics: You can define the upper speed limit, which
Transferring Data... message. must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle,
Assistance Center. a message will be sent to the Customer Assis-
tance Center. The Customer Assistance Center
Depending on what the customer service rep-
then forwards this information to you.
resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-
tion is re-established after the transfer is com- You can select the way in which you receive this
plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a information beforehand. Possible options
later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or include text message, e-mail or an automated
phone. call.
Z
302 Features
The data you receive contains the following control. Please also read the operating instruc-
information: tions for the garage door system.
Rthe location where the speed limit was excee- When programming a garage door opener, park
ded the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the
Rthe time at which the speed limit was excee- engine while programming.
ded Certain garage door drives are incompatible
Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded with the integrated garage door opener. If you
have difficulty programing the integrated garage
door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Geo fencing Benz Center.
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be phone assistance services:
informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
of the selected areas. You can select the way in Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
which you receive this information beforehand. RCanada: Customer Service at
Possible options include text message, e-mail or
1-800-387-0100
an automated call.
RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of
The area can be determined as either a circle or
a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You charge)
can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif- More information on HomeLink® and/or com-
ferent settings are possible for each area. patible products is also available online at
These settings can be called up under "Owners http://www.homelink.com.
Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Notes on the declaration of conformity
Alternatively, you can trigger an Info call and (Y page 278).
notify the customer service representative that USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
you wish to activate geo-fencing. Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Currently inactive areas can be activated by text
message. Important safety notes
Triggering the vehicle alarm G WARNING
With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's When you operate or program the garage door
panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds with the integrated garage door opener, per-
and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on sons in the range of movement of the garage
the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec- door can become trapped or struck by the
onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off. garage door. There is a risk of injury.
When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody is
Garage door opener
within the range of movement of the garage
General notes door.
The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated G WARNING

in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up
to three different door and gate systems. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
Use the integrated garage door opener only on gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
garage doors that: these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
Rhave safety stop and reverse features and
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards
out sufficient ventilation.
Once programed, the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
function of the garage door system's remote
Features 303
Programming so, vary the distance between remote control

A and the rear-view mirror.
Programming buttons The required distance between remote con-
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" trol A and the integrated garage door opener
(Y page 302). depends on the garage door drive system.
Several attempts might be necessary. You
should test every position for at least
25 seconds before trying another position.
Synchronizing the rolling code

Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 302).
If the garage door system uses a rolling code,
you will also have to synchronize the garage
door system with the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will

need to use the programming button on the door
drive control panel. The programming button
Garage door remote control A is not included may be located in different places depending on
with the integrated garage door opener. the manufacturer. It is usually located on the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- door drive unit on the garage ceiling.
tion lock (Y page 132). Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive
X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to con- operating instructions, for example under "Pro-
trol the garage door drive. gramming additional remote controls", before
X To start programming mode: press and carrying out the following steps.
hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage
garage door opener. door or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-
The garage door opener is in programming ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects are
mode. After a short time, indicator lamp : present within the sweep of the door or gate.
lights up yellow. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as tion lock (Y page 132).
button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time. X Get out of the vehicle.
If the selected button has already been pro- X Press the programming button on the door
grammed, indicator lamp : will only light up drive unit.
yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.
Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate
X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
the next step.
lamp : flashes yellow.
X Get into the vehicle.
X To program the remote control: point
X Press previously programmed button ;, =
garage door remote control A towards but-
tons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a dis- or ? on the integrated garage door opener
tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm). repeatedly and in quick succession until the
door closes.
X Press and hold button B on remote control
The rolling code synchronization is then com-
A until indicator lamp : lights up green. plete.
When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-
gramming is finished. Notes on programming the remote con-
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro- trol
gramming was successful. The rolling code
must be synchronized (Y page 303). Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break"
(or interruption) of the transmission signals
X Release button B on remote control A for
after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,
the garage door drive system. these signals may not last long enough for the
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not
programing procedure for the corresponding recognized during programming. Comparable
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
Z
304 Features
with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door open- The garage door opener is compatible with
ers also feature a "break". devices which operate in the frequency range
Proceed as follows: of 280 to 433 MHz.
RReplace the batteries in garage door remote
Rif you live in Canada.
control A. This increases the likelihood that
Rif you have difficulties programming the
garage door remote control A will transmit a
garage door opener (regardless of where you strong and precise signal to the integrated
live) when using the programming steps. garage door opener.
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the RWhen programming, hold remote control A
integrated garage door opener. at varying distances and angles and from but-
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up tons ; to ? which you are programming. Try
yellow. various angles at a distance between 2and
X Release the button. 8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. at varying distances.
X Press button B of garage door remote con- RIf another remote control A is available for
trol A for two seconds, then release it for two the same garage door drive, repeat the same
seconds. programming steps with this remote control

X Press button B of the remote control A A. Before performing these steps, make sure
again and hold for two seconds. that new batteries have been installed in
X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote garage door drive remote control A.
control A until indicator lamp : lights up RNote that some remote controls only transmit
green. for a limited amount of time (the indicator
When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro- lamp on the remote control goes out). Press
gramming is finished. button B on remote control A again before
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro- transmission ends.
gramming was successful. The next step is to RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
synchronize the rolling code. opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
X Release button B of remote control A of the tion/transmission.
garage door drive.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the Opening/closing the garage door
programming process for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing After it has been programmed, the integrated
so, vary the distance between remote control garage door opener performs the function of the
A and the rear-view mirror. garage door system remote control. Please also
read the operating instructions for the garage
The required distance between remote con- door system.
trol A and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
Several attempts might be necessary. You tion lock (Y page 132).
should test every position for at least X Press button ;, = or ? which you pro-
25 seconds before trying another position. grammed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
Problems when programming cator lamp : lights up green.
If you are experiencing problems programing Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-
the integrated garage door opener on the rear- cator lamp : flashes green.
view mirror, take note of the following instruc- The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
tions: as the button is pressed. The transmission is
RCheck the transmitter frequency used by halted after a maximum of ten seconds and
garage door drive remote control A and indicator lamp : lights up yellow.
whether it is supported. The transmitter fre- X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary.
quency can usually be found on the back of
remote control A for the garage door drive.
Features 305
Clearing the memory

Make sure that you clear the memory of the
integrated garage door opener before selling the
vehicle.
X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
and then green.
X Release buttons ; and ?.
The memory of the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
Floormats

G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
X Slide the relevant seat back.

X To install: place the floormat in the footwell.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
Z
306 Engine compartment
Engine compartment Rremove jewelry and watches

Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
Hood
ple, away from moving parts
Opening the hood
G WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when G WARNING
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. Certain components in the engine compart-
There is a risk of an accident. ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
G WARNING Where possible, let the engine cool down and
When opening and closing the hood, it may touch only the components described in the
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is following.
a risk of injury to persons within range of
Maintenance and care
movement of the hood. G WARNING

Open and close the hood only when no one is When the hood is open and the windshield
within its range of movement. wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
G WARNING Always switch off the windshield wipers and
Opening the hood when the engine is over- the ignition before opening the hood.
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
or other service products. There is a risk of not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield wip-
injury.
ers or the hood.
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
G WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
If you need to do any work inside the engine X Make sure that the windshield wipers are
compartment: turned off.
X Pull release lever : on the hood.
Rswitch off the ignition
The hood is released.
Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
Engine compartment 307
G WARNING
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
Rswitch off the ignition
X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ; risk of danger from moving components,
up and lift the hood. such as the fan rotation area
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in
Rremove jewelry and watches
(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open
automatically by the gas-filled strut. Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
ple, away from moving parts

Closing the hood
G WARNING
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of
approximately 8 in (20 cm). If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
properly engaged. Open it again and close it Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to
with a little more force. the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-
ponents before starting the engine.
Radiator
Do not cover up the radiator, such as with a G WARNING
thermal mat or insect protection cover. Other- Opening the hood when the engine is over-
wise, the values of the European on-board diag- heated or when there is a fire in the engine
nostics may be affected. Some of these read- compartment could expose you to hot gases
ings are required by law and must be accurate at
or other service products. There is a risk of
all times.
injury.
Engine oil opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
Important safety notes and contact the fire department.
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
General notes
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
of the exhaust system, can become very hot. consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) of oil per
Working in the engine compartment poses a 600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption may
risk of injury. be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if
you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
touch only the components described in the in a different location.
following.
Z
308 Engine compartment
When checking the oil level: The following cause engine failure or damage
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface to the exhaust system:
Rthe engine should be switched off for approx- RUse of engine oils and oil filters that have
imately five minutes if the engine is at normal not been expressly approved for the service
operating temperature system
Rif the engine is not at normal operating tem- RReplacement of engine oil and oil filter after
perature, e.g. if the engine was only started the replacement interval specified by the
briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes before service system has expired
carrying out the measurement RUse of engine oil additives
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much

Checking the oil level using the oil dip- engine oil can result in damage to the engine
stick or to the catalytic converter. Have excess
engine oil siphoned off.
Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (exam-

ple) Add engine oil (example)
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it.
tube. X Add engine oil.
X Wipe off oil dipstick :. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
X Slowly slide dipstick : into the guide tube to the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine
the stop, and take it out again after approx- oil.
imately three seconds. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and tighten
If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX clockwise.
mark ;, the oil level is correct. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick
below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil. (Y page 308).
Further information on engine oil (Y page 367).
Adding engine oil
H Environmental note Additional service products
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
the environment. G WARNING
! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are Certain components in the engine compart-
approved for vehicles with a service system. A ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
list of the engine oils and oil filters that have of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
been tested and approved in accordance with Working in the engine compartment poses a
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service risk of injury.
Products is available at any authorized
Engine compartment 309
Where possible, let the engine cool down and Checking coolant level
touch only the components described in the
following.
G WARNING
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
Checking the coolant level (example)
Rswitch off the ignition X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
risk of danger from moving components, is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
such as the fan rotation area down.

Rremove jewelry and watches X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-

ple, away from moving parts or
X Press the Start/Stop button twice on vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start
G WARNING function (Y page 133).
The cooling system is pressurized, particularly X Check the coolant temperature display in the
when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, instrument cluster (Y page 36).
you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. The coolant temperature must be below
There is a risk of injury. 158 ‡ (70 †).
X Turn the SmartKey to position g in the igni-
Let the engine cool down before you open the
cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly
open the cap to relieve pressure. or
X Press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start
G WARNING function (Y page 133).
Opening the hood when the engine is over- X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clock-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine wise and allow excess pressure to escape.
compartment could expose you to hot gases X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
or other service products. There is a risk of remove it.
injury. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
engine compartment, keep the hood closed (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler neck
and contact the fire department. when warm, there is enough coolant in expan-
sion tank ;.
X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as
it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 368).
Z
310 ASSYST PLUS
Adding washer fluid to the windshield i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
washer system does not show any information on the engine
oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil
G WARNING level (Y page 307).
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if The multifunction display shows a service mes-
it comes into contact with hot engine compo- sage for several seconds, for example:
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of RService A in XX Days
fire and injury. RService A Due
Make sure that no windshield washer con- RService A Overdue by XX Days
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the
next service due date is displayed.
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a
number or another letter, indicates the type of
service. A stands for a minor service and B for a
major service.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does

not take into account any periods of time during
which the battery is disconnected.
Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-
Example: adding liquid to the windshield ule:
washer system X Note down the service due date displayed in
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab and the multifunction display before disconnect-
open. ing the battery.
X Add the premixed washer fluid.
or
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
battery disconnection periods from the ser-
until it engages.
vice date shown on the display.
If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-
mended minimum fluid level of 1.1 US qt (1.0 l),
a message appears in the multifunction display
prompting you to add washer fluid (Y page 254). Hiding a service message
Further information on washer fluid X Press the a or % button on the steering
(Y page 369). wheel.
ASSYST PLUS Displaying service messages

Service message X Switch on the ignition.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the
informs you of the next service due date. list of menus.
X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to
Information on the type of service and service
intervals (see the separate Maintenance Book- select the Service menu and confirm with
let). a.
Further information can be obtained at a quali-
fied specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and con-
Mercedes-Benz Center, or at firm with a.
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). The service due date appears in the multi-
function display.
Care 311
Information about Service Care

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service General notes
interval display
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display the following:
has been inadvertently reset, this setting can Rdry, rough or hard cloths
be corrected at a qualified specialist work- Rabrasive cleaning agents
shop.
Rsolvents
Have service work carried out as described in
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise
lead to increased wear and damage to the Do not scrub.
major assemblies or the vehicle. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author- with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.
ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the You could otherwise scratch or damage the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the surfaces and protective film.
service work has been carried out. You can also ! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of
obtain further information on maintenance time directly after cleaning, particularly after
work, for example. cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.

Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-
Special service requirements rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By
The specified maintenance interval takes only heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
the normal operation of the vehicle into pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a
account. Under arduous operating conditions or long period of time.
increased load on the vehicle, maintenance
work must be carried out more frequently, for H Environmental note
example: Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
RRegular city driving with frequent intermedi- cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
ate stops ner.
RIf the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
distances Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
RUse in mountainous terrain or on poor road retaining the quality in the long term.
surfaces Use care products and cleaning agents recom-
Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Under these or similar conditions, have, for
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
replaced or changed more frequently. Under Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
arduous operating conditions, the tires must be paintwork
checked more often. Further information can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. Automatic car wash
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G WARNING
Driving abroad Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is
also available in other countries. You can obtain After the vehicle has been washed, brake
further information from any authorized carefully while paying attention to the traffic
Mercedes-Benz Center. conditions until full braking power is restored.
! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-

tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-
ically in certain situations.
Z
312 Care
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission

DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in position h or k, the automatic transmis-
the following or similar situations: sion will automatically switch to park posi-
Rwhen towing the vehicle tion j and block the wheels.
Rin the car wash Observe the following to make sure that the
automatic transmission stays in neutral position
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless i:
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
Operating with the SmartKey and Start/Stop
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
button:
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
X Make sure that the ignition is switched on.
! Make sure that: X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
closed completely
Rthe blower is switched off Operating with the Start/Stop button only:
Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position 0 X Engage park position j.
Rthe 360° camera or the rear view camera is X Release the brake pedal.
deactivated X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock
(Y page 133).
The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection X Switch on the ignition.
range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-
tions, for example, could lead to the uninten- X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
tional opening of the tailgate: Operating with the SmartKey and Start/Stop
Rusing a car wash button:
Rusing a power washer X Shift to neutral i.
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 3 m X Release the brake pedal.
away from the vehicle. X Release the electric parking brake, if neces-
! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection sary.
range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa- X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
tions, for example, could lead to the uninten- in the ignition lock.
tional opening of the tailgate: You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
Rusing a car wash wash from the very start.
Rusing a power washer If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
(3 m) away from the vehicle. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax
from the windshield and the wiper blades. This
! Make sure that the automatic transmission will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises
is in neutral position i when washing your caused by residue on the windshield.
vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle
may otherwise be damaged.
Washing by hand
ROperating with the SmartKey:
Do not remove the SmartKey from the igni- In some countries, washing by hand is only
tion lock. Do not open the driver's door allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
when the engine is switched off or at very Observe the legal requirements in each country.
low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmis- X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
sion position h or k, the automatic vehicle in direct sunlight.
transmission will automatically switch to X Use a soft sponge to clean.
park position j and block the wheels.
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
ROperating with the Start/Stop button:
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not open the driver's door when the
engine is switched off or at very low
Care 313
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen- between the parts of the vehicle covered with
tle jet of water. the film and the nozzle of the high pressure
X Do not point the water jet directly towards the cleaner.
air inlet. Information about the correct distance is
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge available from the equipment manufacturer.
frequently. Move the power washer nozzle around when
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry cleaning your vehicle.
thoroughly with a chamois. ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint- range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-
work. tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-
Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as tional opening of the tailgate:
soon as possible when driving in winter. Rusing a car wash
Rusing a power washer
Power washers Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 3 m
away from the vehicle.
G WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection
range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage

tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-
to the tires or chassis components. Compo- tional opening of the tailgate:
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
Rusing a car wash
edly. There is a risk of an accident.
Rusing a power washer
Do not use power washers with circular jet Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged (3 m) away from the vehicle.
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately. Cleaning the paintwork
! Always maintain a distance of at least ! Do not affix:
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the Rstickers
power washer nozzle. Information about the
Rfilms
correct distance is available from the equip-
ment manufacturer. Rmagnetic plates or similar items
Move the power washer nozzle around when to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
cleaning your vehicle. damage the paintwork.
Do not aim directly at any of the following: Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by
RTires corrosion and damage caused by inadequate
care cannot always be completely repaired. In
RDoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
RElectrical components
X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
RBattery while avoiding rubbing too hard.
RConnectors X Soak insect remains with insect remover and
RLamps rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
RSeals X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
RTrim the treated areas afterwards.
RVentilation slots X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,
Damaged seals or electrical components can fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a
lead to leaks or failures. cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter
fluid.
! Vehicles with decorative film: parts of your X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
vehicle are covered with a decorative film. X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm)
Z
314 Care
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint Use only insect remover and car shampoo from
surface, use the paint care products recommen- the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care
ded and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the products.
case approximately every three to five months,
depending on the climate conditions and the
care product used. Cleaning the vehicle parts
The cleaning product Paint Cleaner, which has
been recommended and approved by Cleaning the wheels
Mercedes-Benz, should be used when dirt has
penetrated the paint surface. G WARNING
Also use Paint Cleaner on paint that has become The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
dull. blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
Do not use these care products in the sun or on to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
the hood while the hood is hot. nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch- edly. There is a risk of an accident.
Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-
work quickly and provisionally. Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
Matte finish care

diately.
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine. ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage
! The following may cause the paint to wheel bolts and brake components.
become shiny and thus reduce the matte
effect: ! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of
Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork with
time directly after cleaning, particularly after
unsuitable materials cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-
Rfrequent use of automatic car washes
rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By
heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a
products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the
long period of time.
purpose of paintwork care. These products
are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their
use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to Cleaning the windows
considerable surface damage or, more spe-
cifically, to shiny, spotted areas. G WARNING
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a You could become trapped by the windshield
qualified specialist workshop. wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
treatment under any circumstances. injury.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear Always switch off the windshield wipers and
matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. wiper blades.
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with
a clear matte finish. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
The vehicle should preferably be washed by solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
plenty of water. not touch the insides of the windows with
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There
is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.
Care 315
! Clean the water drainage channels of the Cleaning the mirror turn signals
windshield and the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
pollen may under certain circumstances pre- that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable
vent water from draining away. This can lead cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
to corrosion damage and damage to elec- scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the
tronic components. mirror turn signals.
X Clean the inside and outside of the windows X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-
with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet
is recommended and approved by Mercedes- sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Benz. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.
Cleaning wiper blades
Cleaning the side running board
G WARNING
! Do not clean the aluminum inserts of the
You could become trapped by the windshield side running board with alkaline or acidic
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the cleaners, such as wheel cleaner. Do not use
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust.

injury. The aluminum inserts could otherwise be
damaged.
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
Cleaning the sensors
wiper blades.
! If you clean the sensors with a power
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the washer, make sure that you keep a distance
wiper blade could be damaged. of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle
and the power washer nozzle. Information
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do about the correct distance is available from
not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph- the equipment manufacturer.
ite coating could be damaged. This could
cause wiper noise.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if the
wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the
windshield (Y page 120).
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp
cloth.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
which are suitable for plastic light lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
could scratch or damage the plastic light len-
ses. X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with
water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light-
ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning
agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or
cleaning cloths.
Z
316 Care
Cleaning the rear view camera and 360° flash rust to form on the surface. You can
camera restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by
cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area after washing.
around the rear view camera or 360° camera X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product
with a power washer. tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch

Dispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in an
environmentally responsible manner.
! Please note the care instructions in the

trailer coupling manufacturer's operating
instructions.
The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. dirty or corroded.
X
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the X Remove rust on the ball, e.g. with a wire
ignition lock (Y page 132). brush.
or X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a
X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice on brush.
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS- X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball
GO start function (Y page 133). coupling.
X Open the camera cover for cleaning via the X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is
multimedia system (see Digital Operator's working properly.
Manual).
You can also have the maintenance work on the
X To clean the camera: use clean water and a ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried out
soft cloth to clean camera lens :. by a qualified specialist workshop.
When you switch off the ignition, the camera
cover closes automatically.
Interior care
Cleaning the exhaust pipes
Cleaning the display
G WARNING
! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline
become very hot. If you come into contact
Rabrasive cleaning agents
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
Rcommercially-available household cleaning
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
agents
Always be particularly careful around the These may damage the display surface. Do
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow not put pressure on the display surface when
these components to cool down before touch- cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-
ing them. age to the display.
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-

based cleaning agents, such as bathroom
cleaner or wheel cleaner.
Impurities combined with the effects of road grit
and corrosive environmental factors may cause
Care 317
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-
is switched off and has cooled down. ing the surface.
X Clean the display surface using a commer-
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
display cleaner. mostly made of anodized aluminum and can
X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use
cloth. a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning
the trim pieces.
Cleaning the plastic trim If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are
G WARNING unsure as to whether the trim pieces are
Care products and cleaning agents containing chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
come loose in the event of air bag deploy-
X Trim elements with piano black finish:
ment. There is a risk of injury.
wipe with a soft, damp cotton cloth. Use clean
Do not use any care products and cleaning water.

agents to clean the cockpit. X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
ucts recommended and approved by
! Never attach the following to plastic surfa- Mercedes-Benz.
ces:
Rstickers Cleaning the seat covers
Rfilms
Rperfume oil container or similar General notes
You could otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers
made out of real leather, artificial leather or
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage
sunscreen to come into contact with the plas-
the cover.
tic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of
the surfaces. Note that regular care is essential to ensure that
the appearance and comfort of the covers is
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
retained over time.
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod- Genuine leather seat covers
ucts recommended and approved by ! To retain the natural appearance of the
Mercedes-Benz. leather, observe the following cleaning
The surface may change color temporarily. instructions:
Wait until the surface is dry again.
RClean genuine leather covers carefully with
a damp cloth and then wipe the covers
Cleaning the steering wheel and selec- down with a dry cloth.
tor lever RMake sure that the leather does not
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use become soaked. It may otherwise become
leather care agents that have been recom- rough and cracked.
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ROnly use leather care agents that have
been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified
Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele- specialist workshop.
ments
Leather is a natural product.
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes example:
Z
318 Care
Rdifferences in the texture

Rmarks caused by growth and injury
Rslight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not
material defects.
Seat covers of other materials
! Observe the following when cleaning:
Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results
depend on the type of dirt and how long it
has been there.

Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.
Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines.
Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical

cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by
heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †)
or in direct sunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets

X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or
dry shampoo.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning
agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Where will I find...? 319
Where will I find...? Information on reflective safety jackets

Reflective safety jacket
Removing/replacing the reflective
safety jacket
: Maximum number of washes

; Maximum wash temperature
= Do not bleach
? Do not iron
A Do not use a laundry dryer
The reflective safety jackets are located in the B Do not dry-clean
safety jacket compartments in the stowage
compartments of the front doors. There are also
C This is a class 2 jacket
Breakdown assistance
safety jacket compartments in the stowage RThe safety jackets only meet the require-
compartments of the rear doors, in which reflec- ments defined by the legal standard:
tive safety jackets can be stowed. - if the correct size is used
X To remove: pull out safety jacket bag : with - if the reflective safety jackets are correctly
the reflective safety jacket by loop ;. fastened
X Open safety jacket bag : and pull out the RBefore use, ensure that the reflective safety
reflective safety jacket. jackets are clean and intact. The special prop-
X To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll erties may otherwise be compromised.
it up and stow it in safety jacket bag :. RThe reflective safety jackets should be stored
X Slide safety jacket bag : along the lower in their original packaging in a dry place away
edge of the armrest into the safety jacket from sources of heat and light.
compartment. Meanwhile, ensure that RThe maximum number of washes specified is
loop ; hangs out well within reach. not the only factor influencing the life span of
X Observe the legal requirements in each indi- the reflective safety jackets. Their life span
vidual country for the use of safety jackets. also depends on use, care, storage, etc.
RThe reflective safety jackets should be dis-
i Remove a new reflective safety jacket from
its packaging material before sliding it into posed of and replaced with new ones:
the safety jacket compartment. The packag- - after 15 washes, and/or
ing material may otherwise cause it to slip out - if the reflective strips have become
or make removing it difficult. scratched, and/or
- if the backing material and/or reflective
strips have become soiled and cannot be
cleaned off, and/or
- if the fluorescence has faded, for example
due to the effects of sunlight
RDispose of reflective safety jackets in an envi-
ronmentally responsible manner. To do so,
contact your local waste disposal company.
320 Where will I find...?
Towing eye Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit

General notes
Apart from certain country-specific variations,
the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change
tool kit.
Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to
the vehicle. For more information on which tire
changing tools are required and approved to
perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult
Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for
example:
Towing eye : is located in the left-hand stow- RJack
age well under the cargo compartment floor. RWheel chock
X To remove: open the tailgate. RLug wrench
X Open the cargo compartment floor RAlignment bolt
(Y page 288).
X Remove towing eye :.
Removing the tire-change tool kit
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

Removing the TIREFIT kit
Example
: Ratchet for jack
; Lug wrench
= Jack
? Alignment bolt
The TIREFIT kit s located in the left-hand stow- A Socket wrench for ratchet
age compartment.
B Folding wheel chock
X To remove: open the tailgate.
The tire-change tool kit is located in the left-
X Open the cargo compartment floor
hand stowage well, under the cargo compart-
(Y page 288). ment floor.
X Push retaining clamps : on the cover down
X To remove: open the tailgate.
so as to release them.
X Open the cargo compartment floor
X Fold up cover in the direction of arrow ;.
(Y page 288).
X Remove tire inflation compressor = and tire
sealant bottle ?.
X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 322).
Flat tire 321
Flat tire Vehicles with MOExtended tires (tires

with run-flat characteristics)
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
General notes
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper- With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-
ties) (Y page 321) acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one
cles with MOExtended tires or more tires. The affected tire must not show
any clearly visible damage.
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 320)
You can recognize a MOExtended tire by the
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are MOExtended marking which appears on the
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
is therefore recommended that you additionally next to the tire size designation, the load-bear-
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 351).
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-
a qualified specialist workshop. tion with an active tire pressure loss warning
system or with an active tire pressure monitor.
Information on changing and mounting wheels
(Y page 357). If a pressure loss warning message appears
in the multifunction display:
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from Robserve the instructions in the display mes-
traffic. sages (Y page 250).
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. Rcheck the tire for damage
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away Rif driving on, observe the following notes
(Y page 154). The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi-
straight-ahead position. cle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fully
laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km).
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-
tance possible depends upon:
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS‑GO RVehicle speed
X Open the driver's door. RRoad condition

The vehicle electronics are now in position ROutside temperature
u. This means: "Key removed". The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni- may be reduced by extreme driving conditions
tion lock (Y page 133). or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a
X Make sure that the engine cannot be started moderate style of driving.
via your smartphone (Y page 134). The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
X Make sure that the passengers are not endan- counted from the moment the tire pressure loss
gered as they do so. Make sure that no one is warning appears in the multifunction display.
near the danger area while a wheel is being You must not exceed a maximum permissible
changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
in the wheel change should, for example, When replacing one or all tires, please observe
stand behind the barrier. the following specifications for your vehicle's
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic tires:
conditions when doing so. Rsize
X Close the driver's door. Rthe type and
Rthe "MOExtended" marking
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be
used as a temporary measure. Make sure that
322 Flat tire
you use the proper size and type (summer or G WARNING

winter tires).
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
is therefore recommended that you additionally tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
than those mentioned above.
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
a qualified specialist workshop. Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or
Important safety notes on a flat tire.
G WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
G WARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
tion. It must not come into contact with your
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden

from children. There is a risk of injury.
vehicle.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
observe the following:
Ryou hear banging noises.
RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin
Rthevehicle starts to shake. immediately with water.
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with
RESP® is intervening constantly. your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. oughly with clean water.
After driving in emergency mode, have the RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
workshop with regard to their further use. The plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
defective tire must be replaced in every case. and seek medical attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
TIREFIT kit RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
TIREFIT is a tire sealant. ! After use, excess tire sealant may run out of
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to the filler hose. This could cause stains.
0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire Therefore, place the tire sealant bottle with
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera- filler hose in the plastic bag which is con-
tures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †). tained in the TIREFIT kit.
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Flat tire 323
! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor X Pull connector ? with cable and hose A out
for longer than ten minutes at a time without of the tire inflation compressor housing.
a break. It may otherwise overheat. X Push connector on hose A into flange B on
The tire inflation compressor can be operated tire sealant bottle : until the connector
again once it has cooled down. engages.
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc- X Place tire sealant bottle : head down into
tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com- recess ; of the tire inflation compressor.
pressor.
Using the TIREFIT kit

X Do not remove any foreign objects which have
penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.
X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-
nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation
compressor from the stowage well under-
neath the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 320).
X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty

tire.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
X Insert plug ? into cigarette lighter socket

(Y page 292) or into another 12 V socket in
your vehicle (Y page 293).
X Press on and off switch = on the tire inflation
compressor.
X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
instrument cluster within the driver's field of The tire is inflated.
vision. First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The
X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the pressure may briefly rise to approximately
valve on the wheel with the defective tire. 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then
have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa
(2.0 bar/29 psi).
If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres-
sure reached" (Y page 324).
If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire
pressure not reached" (Y page 324).
If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected
areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if
possible.
Z
324 Flat tire
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry been attained after ten minutes:
cleaner as soon as possible. X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
Tire pressure not reached faulty tire.
If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is
not been attained after ten minutes: unscrewed.
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
tion compressor.
faulty tire. X Pull away immediately.
Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is X Stop after driving for approximately ten
unscrewed. minutes and check the tire pressure with the
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx- tire inflation compressor.
imately 30 ft (10 m). The tire pressure must now be at least
X Pump up the tire again.
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire pres- G WARNING
sure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi). If the required tire pressure is not reached
after driving for a short period, the tire is too
G WARNING badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
If the required tire pressure is not reached the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
after the specified time, the tire is too badly tire pressure that is too low can significantly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
pressure that is too low can significantly Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- specialist workshop.
acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified In cases such as the one mentioned above, con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or
specialist workshop. call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Tire pressure reached X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
G WARNING Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant the driver's side or the tire pressure table in
impairs the driving characteristics and is not the fuel filler flap for values.
X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
tire inflation compressor.
accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
the specified maximum speed with a tire that
has been repaired using tire sealant.
The maximum permissible speed for a tire

sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).
The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be
affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's
field of vision.
Battery (vehicle) 325
X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres- immediately. Do not drive any further. You
sure release button : next to pressure should have all work involving the battery car-
gauge ;.
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the
filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire. For further information about ABS and ESP®,
Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is see (Y page 65) and (Y page 70).
unscrewed.
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-
X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the
ion battery:
sealed tire.
X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla- G WARNING
tion compressor. Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
The filler hose remains attached to the tire of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-
sealant bottle. sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work- explosion.
shop and have the tire changed there. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon
body to remove any existing electrostatic
as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
build-up.
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
four years at a qualified specialist workshop. The highly flammable gas mixture forms when
charging the battery as well as when jump-start-
ing.
Battery (vehicle) Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-
tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of
12 V battery – important safety notes electrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-
ple:
Special tools and expert knowledge are required
when working on the battery, e.g. removal and Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic
installation. You should therefore have all work fibers
involving the battery carried out at a qualified Rdue to friction between clothing and seats
specialist workshop. Rif you push or pull the battery across the car-
G WARNING pet or other synthetic materials
Rif you rub the battery with a cloth
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and G WARNING
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can During the charging process, a battery produ-
lead to function restrictions applying to ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys- sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper- RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. connected battery does not come into con-
You could lose control of the vehicle, for tact with vehicle parts.
example: RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-
Rwhen braking tery.
Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuvers RIt is important that you observe the descri-
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not bed order of the battery terminals when
adapted to the road conditions connecting and disconnecting a battery.
There is a risk of an accident. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci- battery poles with identical polarity are
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop connected.
Z
326 Battery (vehicle)
RItis particularly important to observe the Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be

described order when connecting and dis- absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12-
volt battery yourself, please observe the fol-
connecting the jumper cables. lowing:
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
RSecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
terminals while the engine is running. away.
RSwitch off the ignition.
G WARNING RDisconnect the negative terminal first and
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. then the positive terminal.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do The transmission is locked in position j
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over after disconnecting the battery.
the battery. Keep children away from batter- After the work has been done, install the bat-
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with tery and replace the cover of the positive ter-
minal clamp firmly.
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
tion. Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
tective measures when handling batteries.
All vehicles: Risk of explosion.
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the Fire, open flames and smoking are

law to dispose of them with prohibited when handling the bat-
tery. Avoid creating sparks.
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately Electrolyte or battery acid is corro-
and recycled to protect the sive. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
environment. clothing.
Dispose of batteries in an Wear suitable protective clothing,
environmentally friendly especially gloves, apron and face-
guard.
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe- Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid
splashes off with clean water. Con-
cialist workshop or a special tact a physician if necessary.
collection point for used bat- Wear eye protection.
teries.
! Have the battery checked regularly at a

qualified specialist workshop. Keep children away.
Observe the service intervals in the Mainte-
nance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist
workshop for more information.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
! Always have work on batteries carried out at
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you only use batteries which have
been tested and approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
increased impact protection to prevent vehicle
occupants from suffering acid burns should the
battery be damaged in the event of an accident.
Battery (vehicle) 327
In order for the battery to achieve the maximum G WARNING

possible service life, it must always be suffi-
ciently charged. A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
In this case, have the battery disconnected at a can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
qualified specialist workshop. You can also an explosion.
charge the battery with a charger recommended Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special-
ist workshop for further information. charging it or jump-starting.
Have the battery condition of charge checked All vehicles:
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for
short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a ! Only charge the battery using the jump-
lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist starting connection point.
workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle The jump-starting connection point is in the
parked for a long period of time. engine compartment (Y page 328).
Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle
X Open the hood.
and do not require any electrical consumers.
The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus X Connect the battery charger to the positive
conserving battery power. terminal and ground point in the same order
as when connecting the donor battery in the
jump-starting procedure (Y page 328).
Charging the 12 V battery Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not
lean over a battery. Never charge the battery if it
Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a
! Only use battery chargers with a maximum battery charger which has been tested and
charging voltage of 14.4 V. approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger
unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium- cles and tested and approved by Mercedes-
ion battery: Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the
! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging of the battery in its installed position.
charging voltage of 14.8 V. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for further information and availability. Read the
G WARNING battery charger's operating instructions before
charging the battery.
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
ion battery: if the warning and indicator lamps
risk of an explosion. on the instrument cluster do not light up at low
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating temperatures, it is very likely that the dis-
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient charged battery has frozen. In this case you may
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the
Do not lean over a battery. battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery
may be shorter. The starting characteristics can
be impaired, particularly at low temperatures.
G WARNING Have the thawed-out battery checked at a quali-
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. fied specialist workshop.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: at low
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over temperatures, do not charge a battery which has
been removed using a battery charger. Allow the
the battery. Keep children away from batter- battery to warm up gently first, if necessary.
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with Otherwise, the service life can be shortened and
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- the starting characteristics impaired, especially
tion. at low temperatures.
Z
328 Jump-starting
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-
partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery:
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
If the warning and indicator lamps do not light up on the instrument cluster when temperatures are
low, it is probably because the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge
the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The
starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out
battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
All vehicles:
! Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the
catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.
Jump-starting 329
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-
start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust
system are cold.
RAll vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: do not start the engine if the battery
is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
RJump-starting may be performed only using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for
a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
RThe jumper cables are not damaged.
RBare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper
cables are connected to the battery.
RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts that can move when the engine is running,
such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be
off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock and remove it
(Y page 132).
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting
device.
Z
330 Towing and tow-starting
X Slide cover A of positive terminal : in the direction of the arrow.

X Connect positive terminal : on your vehicle to positive terminal ; of donor battery B using the
jumper cable, Always begin with positive terminal : on your own vehicle first.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal = of donor battery C to ground point ? of your vehicle using the
jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point ? and negative terminal =, then from pos-
itive clamp : and positive terminal ;. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.
X Close cover A of positive terminal : after removing jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified
Towing and tow-starting G WARNING

When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
and its weight is greater than the permissible

G WARNING gross weight of your vehicle, the:
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or Rthe towing eye could detach itself
no longer available if: Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-
Rthe engine is not running. over.
Rthe brake system or the power steering is There is a risk of an accident.
malfunctioning. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply its weight should not be greater than the per-
or the vehicle's electrical system. missible gross weight of your vehicle.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more
Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight
force may be necessary to steer or brake. of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden-
There is a risk of an accident. tification plate (Y page 363).
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
! When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot
make sure that the steering moves freely. DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated,
the vehicle brakes automatically in certain
G WARNING situations.
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
steering wheel lock has been engaged. There these systems in the following or similar sit-
is a risk of an accident. uations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Always switch off the ignition when towing the
Rin the car wash
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.
! Make sure that the electric parking brake is
released. If the electric parking brake is faulty,
visit a qualified specialist workshop.
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
towing eyes, or the trailer tow hitch, if availa-
ble. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.
Towing and tow-starting 331
! Do not use the trailer tow hitch for recovery Installing/removing the towing eye
or towing. Do not use the towing eye for
recovery. this could damage the vehicle. If in Installing the towing eye
doubt, have the vehicle recovered using a
crane. G WARNING
! When towing, pull away slowly and The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There is
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the a risk of burns when removing the rear cover.
vehicles could be damaged. Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular
! Shift the automatic transmission to position care when removing the rear cover.
i and do not open the driver's or front pas-
senger's door during towing. The automatic
transmission may otherwise shift to position
j, which could damage the transmission.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This
could damage the vehicle.
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph
(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
raised and transported.
It is better to have the vehicle transported than
to have it towed away.
If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage,
have it transported on a transporter or trailer.
The automatic transmission must be in position
i when the vehicle is being towed. If the auto- Mercedes-AMG vehicles
matic transmission cannot be shifted to position
i, have the vehicle transported on a trans-
porter or trailer.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock
Rcannot release the electric parking brake
Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to
position i
Disarm the automatic locking feature before the
vehicle is towed (Y page 84). You could other-
wise be locked out when pushing or towing the
vehicle.
All other vehicles

The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are
located in the bumpers. They are at the rear and
at the front, under covers :.
Z
332 Towing and tow-starting
X Remove the towing eye from the retainer for the direction of travel flash. After resetting
(Y page 320). the combination switch, the hazard warning
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use a suitable lamp starts flashing again.
object, e.g. a screwdriver, to pry off cover :
on the front bumper from underneath. Take
the cover from the opening, but do not Transporting the vehicle
remove it.
Press the mark on cover : on the rear General notes
bumper inward and remove.
X All other vehicles: press the mark on
cover : inward and remove.
X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
will go and tighten it.
Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch do not have a
bracket for the screw-in towing eye at the back.
Connect the towbar to the trailer tow hitch
(Y page 204).
Removing the towing eye

X Unscrew and remove the towing eye. ! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the
X Attach cover : to the bumper and press until front and rear axles must be stationary and on
it engages. the same transportation vehicle. Positioning
over the connection point of the transport
vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may
Towing a vehicle with both axles on otherwise be damaged.
the ground ! You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
The automatic transmission automatically shifts axle or steering components. Otherwise, the
to position j when you open the driver's or vehicle could be damaged.
front-passenger door or when you remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. It is essential to The towing eye or trailer tow hitch can be used
observe the following steps to ensure that the to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if
automatic transmission remains in position i you wish to transport it.
during towing. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. tion lock.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- X Shift the automatic transmission to position
tion lock. i.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal. As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
X Shift the automatic transmission to position X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
i. applying the electric parking brake.
X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni- X Shift the automatic transmission to position
tion lock. j.
X Release the brake pedal. X Turn the SmartKey to position u in the igni-
X Release the electric parking brake. tion lock and remove it.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps X Secure the vehicle.
(Y page 113).
In order to signal a change of direction when
towing the vehicle with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination switch
as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps
Fuses 333
Notes on 4MATIC vehicles If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified special-
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed ist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as Center.
doing so will damage the transmission.
! Only use fuses that have been approved for
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
with both axles on the ground or be loaded up correct fuse rating for the system concerned.
and transported. Otherwise, components or systems could be
If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is damaged.
damaged, have the vehicle transported on a
truck or trailer. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
In the event of damage to the electrical sys-
tem: if the battery is defective, the automatic ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is
transmission will be locked in position P. To shift lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seep-
the automatic transmission to position N, you ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-
must provide power to the vehicle's electrical ation of the fuses.
system in the same way as when jump-starting The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
(Y page 328). faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or nents on the circuit and their functions stop
trailer. operating.
Tow-starting (emergency engine Before changing a fuse
starting)
Observe the important safety notes
! Vehicles with automatic transmission must (Y page 333)
not be tow-started. You could otherwise dam- X Switch off the engine.
age the automatic transmission. X Switch off all electrical consumers.
i You can find information on "Jump-starting" X Make sure that the ignition is switched off
under (Y page 328). (Y page 133).
or
X When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey
Fuses to position u in the ignition lock and remove
it (Y page 132).
Important safety notes X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
G WARNING (Y page 154).

If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must be off.
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
age, the electric cables could be overloaded.
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an RFuse box on the driver's side of the dashboard
accident and injury. RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell

RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
driver's side
new fuses having the correct amperage.
RFuse box under the cargo compartment floor
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when
same rating, which you can recognize by the viewed in the direction of travel
color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the
fuse allocation chart.
The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the
cargo compartment (Y page 334).
Z
334 Fuses
Dashboard fuse box X Open the hood (Y page 306).

X To open: turn fasteners ; on cover : coun-
The fuse box is under a cover on the side of the ter-clockwise as far as they will go.
dashboard. You can obtain further information
X Remove fuse box cover : up.
from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-

well
X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from

the fuse box.
X Loosen screws =, fold up fuse box lid ? and
remove it.
X To close: check whether the seal is posi-

X Open the front-passenger door.
tioned correctly in lid ?.
X To open: fold cover : out towards the rear
X Insert lid ? into the bracket at the rear of the
and remove it.
fuse box.
X To close: clip in cover : at the rear. X Fold down lid ? of the fuse box and tighten
X Fold cover : forwards until it engages. screws =.
X Insert cover : and turn fasteners ; clock-
wise as far as they will go.
Fuse box in the engine compartment X Close the hood.
G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield Fuse box in the cargo compartment
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
the ignition before opening the hood.
Fuses 335
Opening
X Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards
(Y page 288).
X Release the Velcro fastener and lift up
cover : in the cavity trim of the cargo com-
partment in the direction of the arrow.
Closing
X Fold back cover : in the opposite direction
to the arrow and close the Velcro fastener.
Make sure that cover : is in the recess of the
cavity trim provided for it.
i The fuse allocation chart is located in a
recess at the side of the fuse box. You can find
the corresponding fuse rating and fuse type
on the fuse allocation chart.
Z
336 Operation
Important safety notes Further information regarding wheels and tires

can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"
(Y page 360).
G WARNING You can ask for information regarding permitted
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, wheel-tire combinations at an authorized
the wheel brakes or suspension components Mercedes-Benz Center.
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- Information on tire pressure can be found:
dent. Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
Always replace wheels and tires with those on the B-pillar on the driver's side
that fulfill the specifications of the original (Y page 346)
part. Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 339)
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 339)
correct:
Rdesignation
Rmodel Operation
When replacing tires, make sure to use the Information on driving
correct:
Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is
Rdesignation heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
Rmanufacturer While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
Rmodel and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-
ing to one side. This may indicate that the
wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that
G WARNING a tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
Wheels and tires
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden
There is a risk of accident. tire damage could also be causing the unusual
handling characteristics. If you find no signs of
Tires without run-flat characteristics: damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a
Rdo not drive with a flat tire. qualified specialist workshop.
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your When parking your vehicle, make sure that the
tires do not get deformed by the curb or other
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over
consult a qualified specialist workshop. obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse
Tires with run-flat characteristics: angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels
or tires.
Rpay attention to the information and warn-
ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics). Regular checking of wheels and tires
Accessories that are not approved for your vehi- G WARNING
cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-
rectly can impair the operating safety. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
Before purchasing and using non-approved sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
shop and inquire about: Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
Rsuitability and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Check wheels and tires for damage at least once
a month. Check wheels and tires after driving
Operation 337
off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels For safety reasons, replace the tires before
can cause a loss of tire pressure. the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
Pay particular attention to damage such as: tire tread depth is reached.
Rcuts in the tires
Rpunctures in the tires
Rtears in the tires
Rbulges on tires
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width of
the tire (Y page 337). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the
valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount
anything onto the valve other than the standard Marking : shows where the bar indicator
valve cap or other valve caps approved by (arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any tread.
other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure
monitoring systems. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.
Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par- They are visible once a tread depth of approx-
ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres- imately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this
sure as necessary (Y page 339). is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be
The service life of tires depends, among other replaced.
things, on the following factors:
RDriving style
Wheels and tires

RTire pressure Selecting, mounting and replacing
RDistance covered tires
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type
and make.
Notes on tire tread Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-
ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
G WARNING Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 321).
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk wheels.
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the
speed is not adapted to suit the driving con- first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires only
ditions. There is a risk of accident. reach their full performance after this dis-
tance.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires RDo not drive with tires which have too little
may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- tread depth, as this significantly reduces the
ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
should regularly check the tread depth and RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,
the condition of the tread across the entire regardless of wear.
width of all tires.
Minimum tire tread depth for:
RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
Z
338 Winter operation
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat M+S tires

properties)
G WARNING
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
or more tires. and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc- a risk of an accident.
tion with an active tire pressure loss warning M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
system or with an active tire pressure monitor (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-
Benz. At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are
flat tire (Y page 321). identified by the M+S marking.
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
is therefore recommended that you additionally the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount Only these tires will allow driving safety systems
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from winter. These tires have been developed specif-
a qualified specialist workshop. ically for driving in snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all
wheels to maintain safe handling characteris-
Winter operation tics.
Always observe the maximum permissible
General notes speed specified for the M+S tires you have
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified mounted.
Wheels and tires
specialist workshop at the onset of winter. When you have mounted the M+S tires:
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" X Check the tire pressures (Y page 342).
section (Y page 356). X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-
sure loss warning system (Y page 343).
X Restart the tire pressure monitor
Driving with summer tires (Y page 345).
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle Snow chains
to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold
temperatures could cause cracks to form, G WARNING
thereby damaging the tires permanently.
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for If snow chains are installed to the front
this type of damage. wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could
G WARNING cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- There is a risk of an accident.
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of To avoid hazardous situations:
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Rnever install snow chains to the front
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
wheels
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the
rear wheels.
Tire pressure 339
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Tire pressure

mends that you only use snow chains that have
been specially approved for your vehicle by Tire pressure specifications
Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
standard of quality. For more information, Important safety notes
please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear G WARNING
the following points in mind: Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
RSnow chains may not be mounted on all following risks:
wheel/tire combinations. Observe the infor- Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load
mation regarding permitted wheel/tire com-
binations (Y page 360). and vehicle speed increase.
ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
completely covered by snow. Remove the unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
snow chains as soon as possible when you traction.
come to a road that is not snow-covered. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow
ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if
you wish to mount snow chains. There is a risk of an accident.
RDo not exceed the maximum permissible Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
speed of 31 mph (50 km/h). and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
ROn vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL, you ing the spare wheel:
must only drive at raised vehicle level if snow
Rmonthly, at least
chains have been installed (Y page 173).
RWhen snow chains are installed, never use Rif the load changes
Active Parking Assist (Y page 178). Rbefore beginning a long journey
You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pulling Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
Wheels and tires

away with snow chains installed: off-road driving
RAll vehicles (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
(Y page 70)
RMercedes‑AMG vehicles (Y page 71) The data on the Tire and Loading Information
You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a placard and tire pressure table shown here are
controlled manner, achieving an increased driv- examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-
ing force (cutting action). cle-specific and may deviate from the data
shown here. The tire pressure specifications
that are valid for your vehicle can be found on
the Tire and Loading Information placard and
tire pressure table on the vehicle.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Operation with a trailer: the applicable value
for the rear axle is the maximum tire pressure
value stated in the table inside the fuel filler flap.
Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
340 Tire pressure
Tire and Loading Information placard
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully

laden" are defined in the table for different num-
: Recommended tire pressures
bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on actual number of seats may differ.
the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 346).
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid
for the maximum permissible load and up to the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel
filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires
permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see
Wheels and tires
illustration (example).
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.
The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can
be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 351).
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower
values for lighter loads and/or lower road
speeds, the pressures should be reset to the
higher values:
Rif you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds
The tire pressures for increased loads and/or
The tire pressure table contains the recommen- higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat- table, may have a negative effect on driving
ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con- comfort.
ditions. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol- lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud-
lowing tire pressure information is only valid for den loss of pressure.
that tire size; see illustration (example). For more information, contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Tire pressure 341
Important notes on tire pressure too low for the current operating conditions. If
you check the tire pressure when the tires are
G WARNING warm, the resulting value will be higher than if
the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the reduce the tire pressure to the value specified
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise
pressure that is too low may result in a tire be too low.
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tire pressures for
RCheck the tire for foreign objects. cold tires:
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
valve is leaking. on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
(Y page 149)
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires

If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and Underinflated tires
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
G WARNING
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-
sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
risk of an accident. they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
ing properties and the driving characteristics.
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Wheels and tires

Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire tires, including the spare wheel.
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire Underinflated tires may:
pressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec- Roverheat,leading to tire defects
tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure
Radverselyaffect handling
can be checked in the on-board computer.
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pres- Overinflated tires
sures when the tires are cold.
The tires are cold: G WARNING
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours because they are damaged more easily by
and road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than also suffer from irregular wear, which can
1 mile (1.6 km) severely impair the braking properties and the
The tire temperature changes depending on the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the accident.
tire load. If the tire temperature changes by
18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take tires, including the spare wheel.
this into account when checking the pressure of
warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is
Z
342 Tire pressure
Overinflated tires may: Checking tire pressures manually

Rincrease the braking distance
To determine and set the correct tire pressure,
Radversely affect handling proceed as follows:
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be
Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort checked.
Rbe more susceptible to damage X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
Maximum tire pressures X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the
recommended value on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure table
(Y page 339).
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire
pressure to the recommended value.
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To
do so, press down the metal pin in the valve,
using the tip of a pen for example. Then check
the tire pressure again using the tire pressure
checker.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-
sure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire Tire pressure loss warning system
inflation pressure. Always observe the recom-
mended tire pressure for your vehicle when General notes
adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 339).
Wheels and tires
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- loss warning system monitors the set tire pres-
cific and may deviate from the values in the sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.
illustration. This enables the system to detect significant
pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of
a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,
Checking the tire pressures a corresponding warning message will appear in
the multifunction display.
Important safety notes You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning
by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press
Observe the notes on tire pressure 'OK' to Restart message which appears in
(Y page 339). the Service menu of the multifunction display.
Information on air pressure for the tires on your Information on the message display can be
vehicle can be found: found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
warning system" section (Y page 343).
placard on the B-pillar
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap Important safety notes
(Y page 149) The tire pressure warning system does not warn
Rin the "Tire pressure" section you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the notes on the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 339).
The tire pressure loss warning does not replace
the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An
even loss of pressure on several tires at the
Tire pressure 343
same time cannot be detected by the tire pres- X Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres‐
sure loss warning system. sure.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you X Press a to confirm.
of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is The Run Flat Indicator Active Press
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a 'OK' to Restart message is shown in the
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a multifunction display.
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
If you wish to confirm the restart:
movements.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning X Press the a button.
system is limited or delayed if: The Tire Pressure Now OK? message is
shown on the multifunction display.
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
X Press 9 or : to select Yes.
tires.
Rroad conditions are wintry.
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted mes-
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
sage is shown on the multifunction display.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (corner-
After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss
ing at high speeds or driving with high rates of warning system will monitor the set tire pres-
acceleration). sures of all four tires.
Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehi-
cle or on the roof). X Press the % button.
or
Restarting the tire pressure loss warn- X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
ing system appears, press 9 or : to select Can‐
cel.
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if X Press a to confirm.
you have: The tire pressure values stored at the last
Wheels and tires

Rchanged the tire pressure restart will continue to be monitored.
Rchanged the wheels or tires
Rmounted new wheels or tires
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire Tire pressure monitor
pressures are set properly on all four tires for
the respective operating conditions. General notes
The recommended tire pressure can be found If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
on the Tire and Loading Information placard cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire
on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure mon-
table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire itor warns you if the pressure drops in one or
pressure loss warning system can only give more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only
reliable warnings if you have set the correct functions if the corresponding sensors are
tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is installed in all wheels.
set, these incorrect values will be monitored. Information on tire pressures is displayed in the
X Also observe the notes in the section on tire multifunction display. After a few minutes of
pressures (Y page 339). driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 shown in the Service menu of the multifunction
in the ignition lock (Y page 132). display; see illustration (example).
X Press ò on the steering wheel to call up
the menu list.
select the Service menu.
wheel.
Z
344 Tire pressure
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-

sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp
will flash for approximately a minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-
Information on the message display can be
found in the "Checking the tire pressure elec- cle is started as long as the malfunction
tronically" section (Y page 345). exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able to detect
Important safety notes or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
G WARNING reasons, including the installation of incom-
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), patible replacement or alternate tires or
should be checked at least once every two wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure from functioning properly. Always check the
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
on the Tire and Loading Information placard or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres- ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires
sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
Wheels and tires
your vehicle has tires of a different size than function properly.

the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or, if available, the tire It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure label, you should determine the pressure to that recommended for cold tires
which is suitable for the operating situation
proper tire pressure for those tires.
(Y page 339). Note that the correct tire pressure
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has for the current operating situation must first be
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a sub-
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- stantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning
sure telltale when one or more of your tires threshold for the warning message is aligned to
the taught-in reference values. Restart the tire
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly,
pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of
when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, the cold tires (Y page 345). The current pres-
you should stop and check your tires as soon sures are saved as new reference values. As a
as possible, and inflate them to the proper result, a warning message will appear if the tire
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- pressure drops significantly.
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of
lead to tire failure. an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the
notes on the recommended tire pressure
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency (Y page 339).
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
handling and stopping ability. Please note that of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi- sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
underinflation has not reached the level to movements.
Tire pressure 345
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning X Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres‐
lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating sure.
pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the X Press a to confirm.
warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates The multifunction display shows the current
whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire tire pressure of each wheel.
pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
If the vehicle was parked for longer than
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire 20 minutes, the following message appears:
pressure on one or more tires is significantly Tire pressure will be displayed after
too low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal- driving a few minutes.
functioning. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a itor automatically detects new wheels or new
minute and then remains lit constantly, the sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. pressure value to the individual wheels is not
In addition to the warning lamp, a message possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active
appears in the multifunction display. Observe message is shown instead of the tire pressure
the information on display messages display. The tire pressures are already being
(Y page 250). monitored.
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction
of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A Tire pressure monitor warning mes-
malfunction will be indicated by the tire pres- sages
sure warning lamp flashing for approximately
one minute and then remaining lit. When the If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is
warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of shown in the multifunction display. The yellow
driving. tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.
The tire pressure values indicated by the on- RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure
board computer may differ from those meas- message appears in the multifunction display,
ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The
Wheels and tires

the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.
tire pressures shown by the on-board computer The tire pressure must be corrected when the
refer to those measured at sea level. At high opportunity arises.
altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a RIf the Check Tires message appears in the
pressure gauge are higher than those shown by multifunction display, the tire pressure in one
the on-board computer. In this case, do not or more tires has dropped significantly. The
reduce the tire pressures. tires must be checked.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction message
be affected by interference from radio transmit- appears in the multifunction display, the tire
ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way pressure in one or more tires has dropped
radios) that may be being operated in or near the suddenly. The tires must be checked.
vehicle.
Be sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes in the display messages in the "Tires" sec-
Checking the tire pressure electroni- tion (Y page 250).
cally If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 the tire pressures may be displayed for the
(Y page 132) in the ignition lock. wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified
after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-
X Press ò on the steering wheel to call up
sures are displayed for the correct positions.
the menu list.
select the Service menu. Restarting the tire pressure monitor
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
wheel. existing warning messages are deleted and the
warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the cur-
rently set tire pressures as the reference values
Z
346 Loading the vehicle
for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure Radio type approval for the tire pres-
monitor will automatically detect the new refer- sure monitor
ence values after you have changed the tire
pressure. However, you can also set reference Country Radio type approval number
values manually as described here. The tire
pressure monitor then monitors the new tire USA FCC ID: MRXGG4
pressure values. FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4
X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-
ded for the corresponding driving situation on Canada IC: 2546A-GG4
the Tire and Loading Information placard on
the B-pillar on the driver's side.
You can find more tire pressures for various Loading the vehicle
operating conditions in the tire pressure table
inside the filler flap. Instruction labels for tires and loads
Observe the information on tire pressure
when doing so (Y page 339). G WARNING
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
all four wheels. blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 steering and driving characteristics and lead
in the ignition lock (Y page 132). to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
X Press ò on the steering wheel to call up Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
the menu list. rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
select the Service menu. exceeding the maximum load.
wheel. Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the
X Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres‐ maximum possible load.
Wheels and tires
sure. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is

X Press a to confirm. on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire
The multifunction display shows the current and Loading Information placard shows the
tire pressure of each wheel or the Tire maximum permissible number of occu-
pressure will be displayed after pants and the maximum permissible vehicle
driving a few minutes message. load. It also contains details of the tire sizes
X Press the : button. and corresponding pressures for tires
The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐ mounted at the factory.
erence Values message is shown on the (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-
multifunction display. pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-
If you wish to confirm the restart: tification plate informs you of the gross
vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the
X Press the a button. vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted mes- fuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-
sage is shown on the multifunction display. mation about the maximum gross axle
After driving for a few minutes, the system weight rating on the front and rear axle.
checks whether the current tire pressures are The maximum gross axle weight rating is
within the specified range. The new tire pres- the maximum weight that can be carried by
sures are then accepted as reference values one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed
and monitored. the maximum load or the maximum gross
If you wish to cancel the restart: axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.
X Press the % button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Loading the vehicle 347
Number of seats
: B-pillar, driver's side
Maximum number of seats : indicates the

Maximum permissible gross vehicle maximum number of occupants allowed to
weight rating travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustration
are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-
specific and can differ from the details shown.
The number of seats in your vehicle can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
Wheels and tires

Determining the correct load limit
X Specification for maximum gross vehicle Step-by-step instructions
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Information placard: "The combined weight of The following steps have been developed as
occupants and cargo should never exceed required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
XXX kg or XXX lbs." Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
and luggage must not exceed the specified Safety Act of 1966".
value. X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
i The specifications shown on the Tire and exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's
Loading Information placard in the illustration Tire and Loading Information placard.
are examples. The maximum permissible X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific
and may differ from that in the illustration. the driver and passengers that will be riding in
You can find the valid maximum permissible your vehicle.
gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the
the Tire and Loading Information placard. driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or
XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-
city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
Z
348 Loading the vehicle
able cargo and luggage load capacity is cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). available cargo and luggage load capacity cal-
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of culated in step 4.
luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of
1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load
limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 346).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
weight of occupants
and load (data from the
Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard)
Step 2
Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver and
occupants)
Wheels and tires
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1

occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: 150 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 1: 150 lbs
pants (68 kg) (91 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(82 kg) (86 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs
(73 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants
All about wheels and tires 349
Step 3
Permissible load (maxi- 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
mum gross vehicle 750 lbs (340 kg) = 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) =
weight rating from the 750 lbs (340 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg)
Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard minus
the gross weight of all
occupants)
Vehicle identification plate All about wheels and tires

Even if you have calculated the total cargo care- Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
fully, you should still make sure that the gross
vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight ards
rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-
the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 346). ards
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas-
sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-
mum permissible load that can be carried by one
axle (front or rear axle).
Wheels and tires

To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the
maximum permissible values (gross vehicle
weight and maximum gross axle weight rating),
have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-
pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.
weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. government specifications. Their purpose is to
provide drivers with uniform reliable information
on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers
have to grade tires using three performance fac-
tors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and
= temperature grade. These regulations do not
apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in
North America are provided with the corre-
sponding quality grading markings on the side-
wall of the tire.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable,
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
Example:
RTreadwear grade: 200
RTraction grade: AA
RTemperature grade: A
All passenger car tires must conform to the stat-
utory safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
Z
350 All about wheels and tires
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)
cific and may deviate from the values in the (Y page 338).
illustration.
Temperature
Treadwear
G WARNING
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
government course. For example, a tire graded not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
150 would wear one and one-half times as well tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
on the government course as a tire graded 100. in combination, can cause excessive heat
The relative performance of tires depends upon build-up and possible tire failure.
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
variations in driving habits, service practices and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
and differences in road characteristics and cli- generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
mate. heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
Traction tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
G WARNING excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
performance which all passenger car tires must
based on straight-ahead braking traction meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char- higher levels of performance on the laboratory
acteristics. test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Wheels and tires
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to

the drive train.
The traction grades – from highest to lowest –
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-
ured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.
You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread
depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.
Observe the legally required minimum tire tread
depth (Y page 337). Winter tires can reduce the
braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in
comparison with summer tires. The braking dis-
tance is still much further than on surfaces that
are not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-
priate care when driving.
Tire labeling tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
Overview
: Tire width
; Nominal aspect ratio in %
= Tire code
? Rim diameter
A Load bearing index
B Speed rating
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard
(Y page 354) General: depending on the manufacturer's
; DOT, Tire Identification Number standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may
(Y page 353) not contain any letters or may contain one letter
= Maximum tire load (Y page 353) that precedes the size description.
? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 342) If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
tion (as shown above): these are passenger
Wheels and tires

A Manufacturer vehicle tires according to European manufac-
B Tire material (Y page 354) turing standards.
C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity If "P" precedes the size description: these are
and speed rating (Y page 351) passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-
D Load index (Y page 353) ufacturing standards.
E Tire name If "LT" precedes the size description: these are
The markings described above are on the tire in light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing
addition to the tire name (sales designation) and standards.
the manufacturer's name. If "T" precedes the size description: compact
emergency wheels with high tire pressure that
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate are only designed for temporary use in an emer-
from the data in the example. gency.
Tire width:tire width : shows the nominal tire
Tire size designation, load-bearing width in millimeters.
capacity and speed rating Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size
ratio between the tire height and tire width and
G WARNING is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcula-
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa- ted by dividing the tire width by the tire height.
city and the approved maximum speed could Tire code:tire code = specifies the tire type.
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-
is a risk of accident. onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size
Z
description, depending on the manufacturer ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of

(e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter the size description, depending on the man-
of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).
flange. The rim diameter is specified in The service specification is made up of load-
inches (in). bearing index A and speed rating B.
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a RIf the size description of your tire includes
numerical code that specifies the maximum "ZR" and there are no service specifications,
load-bearing capacity of a tire. ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the the maximum speed.
specified load limit. The maximum permissible If a service specification is available, the max-
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and imum speed is limited according to the speed
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on rating in the service specification. Example:
the driver's side (Y page 346). 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is
Example: the service specification. The letter "Y" rep-
resents the speed rating. The maximum
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum
speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.
(300 km/h).
For further information on the maximum tire
RThe size description for all tires with maxi-
load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 353).
mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
For further information on the load bearing
must include "ZR",and the service specifica-
index, see "Load index" (Y page 353).
tion must be given in parentheses. Example:
Speed rating:speed rating B specifies the 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-
approved maximum speed of the tire. cates that the maximum speed of the tire is
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-
from the data in the example. ufacturer about the maximum speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Regardless of the speed rating, always observe
Wheels and tires
the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your Index Speed rating
driving style to the traffic conditions.
Summer tires Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Index Speed rating T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
have the i snowflake symbol on the tire
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-
ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) snow. They have been especially developed
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) for driving on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) (210 km/h).
1 Or M+S i for winter tires.

The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory Maximum load rating
may be higher than the maximum speed that the
electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. You
can find information on this under "Tires"
(Y page 360).
Further information about reading tire data can
be obtained from any qualified specialist work-
shop.
Load index
Maximum tire load : is the maximum permis-

sible weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 346).
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
In addition to the load-bearing index, load
index : may also be imprinted on the sidewall
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
of the tire. You will find this after the letter that US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-
Wheels and tires

identifies the speed rating (Y page 351). ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on
RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the the sidewall of each tire produced.
example above), represents a standard load
(SL) tire
RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire
RLight Load: represents a light load tire
RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends
on the maximum load that the tire can carry at
a certain pressure
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders
to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-
relevant matters. It makes it possible for the
purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-
tion code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and
manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks that the tire complies with the
Z
requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans- Bar

portation. Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
Manufacturer identification code: manufac- per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)
turer identification code ; provides details on are the equivalent of 1 bar.
the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code DOT (Department of Transportation)
with four symbols. DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
For further information about retreaded tires, U S Department of Transportation.
see (Y page 360).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. Normal occupant weight
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by The number of occupants for which the vehicle
the manufacturer as a code to describe specific is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).
characteristics of the tire. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A
A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires
provides information about the age of a tire. The with regards to tread quality, tire traction and
first and second positions represent the week of temperature characteristics. The quality grad-
manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal- ing assessment is made by the manufacturer
endar week. Positions three and four represent following specifications from the U.S. govern-
the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that ment. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of
is marked "3214" was manufactured in week 32 the tire.
in 2014.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate Recommended tire pressures
from the data in the example. The recommended tire pressure applies to the
tires mounted at the factory.
Tire characteristics The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-
Wheels and tires
mum permissible vehicle speed.

The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-
ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-
ditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
The combined weight of all standard and
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
This information describes the type of tire cord the vehicle or not.
and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;. Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate mounted.
from the data in the example.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Definition of terms for tires and loading The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
Tire ply composition and material used exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross
Describes the number of plies or the number of axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle
layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's
and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, side.
polyester and other materials.
Speed rating Maximum load rating

The speed rating is part of the tire identification. The maximum tire load is the maximum permis-
It specifies the speed range for which the tire is sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is
approved. approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Maximum permissible tire pressure
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel,
accessories installed, occupants, luggage and Maximum load on one tire
the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi- dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by
cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi- two.
cle identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side. PSI (pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross Aspect ratio
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the Relationship between tire height and tire width
vehicle including all accessories, occupants, in percent.
fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if
applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is Tire pressure
specified on the vehicle identification plate on This is pressure inside the tire applying an out-
the B-pillar on the driver's side. ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur-
Maximum loaded vehicle weight face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per
square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.
The maximum weight is the sum of: The tire pressure should only be corrected when
Rthe curb weight of the vehicle the tires are cold.
Rthe weight of the accessories
Wheels and tires

Cold tire pressure
Rthe load limit
The tires are cold:
Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires
equipment
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
Kilopascal (kPa) and
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre- Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than
sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is 1 mile (1.6 km)
bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
1 bar. Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact with
Load index the road.
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of Bead
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely
more precisely. on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the
bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from
Curb weight the wheel rim.
The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and Sidewall
coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys- The part of the tire between the tread and the
tem and optional equipment if these are instal- bead.
led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-
gers or luggage.
Z
356 Changing a wheel
Weight of optional extras Rotating the wheels

The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard G WARNING
parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). These Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
optional extras, such as high-performance severely impair the driving characteristics if
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
formance battery, are not included in the curb
weight and the weight of the accessories. The wheel brakes or suspension components
may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
TIN (Tire Identification Number) dent.
This is a unique identifier which can be used by Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example and tires are of the same dimensions.
for a product recall, and thus identify the pur-
chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
monitor, electronic components are located
the manufacturing date.
in the wheel.
Load bearing index Tire-mounting tools should not be used near
The load bearing index (also load index) is a code the valve. This could damage the electronic
that contains the maximum load bearing capa- components.
city of a tire. Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Traction Always observe the instructions and safety
Traction is the result of friction between the tires notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
and the road surface. (Y page 357).
Treadwear indicators The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib- Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
Wheels and tires
uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in
has been reached. the center.
Occupant distribution On vehicles that have the same size front and
rear wheels, you can rotate the tires according
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's war-
designated seating positions. ranty book in your vehicle documents. If no war-
Total load limit ranty book is available, the tires should be rota-
ted every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg 10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in be required earlier. Do not change the direction
the vehicle. of wheel rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the
brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rota-
Changing a wheel ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary,
restart the tire pressure loss warning system
Flat tire (Y page 343) or the tire pressure monitor
The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 345).
(Y page 321) contains information and notes on
how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv-
ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat Direction of rotation
tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 321). Tires with a specified direction of rotation have
additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-
planing. These advantages can only be gained if
Changing a wheel 357
the tires are installed corresponding to the Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
direction of rotation. rolling away
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its
correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires
from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it
can be found in the tire-change tool kit
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and (Y page 320).
level ground.
The folding wheel chock is an additional safety
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead away, for example when changing a wheel.
position. X Fold both plates upwards :.
X Fold out lower plate ;.
X Make sure that the vehicle level is set to "Nor-
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the
mal" on vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL openings in base plate =.
(Y page 173).
Wheels and tires

X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in key posi-
tion u. This is the same as the key having
been removed.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock (Y page 133).
X Make sure that the engine cannot be started
X Place chocks or other suitable items under
via your smartphone (Y page 134).
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago-
X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.
X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
Raising the vehicle
G WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
Z
358 Changing a wheel
must be positioned vertically, directly under

the jacking point of the vehicle.
! Only position the jack at the appropriate

jacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, you
could damage the vehicle.
Observe the following when raising the vehi-
cle:
RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-
cific jack that has been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the
RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the wheel you wish to change by about one full
vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
changed. It must not be used for performing
maintenance work under the vehicle.
RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-
hill slopes.
RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-
ing away by applying the parking brake and
inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the
parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,
flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a
slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be
used, e.g. rubber mats.
Wheels and tires
The jacking points are located just behind the

RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects
front wheel housings and just in front of the rear
as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not wheel housings (arrows).
be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity
due to the restricted height. X Take the ratchet wrench out of the tire-chang-
RMake sure that the distance between the

ing tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of
the jack so that the letters AUF are visible.
underside of the tires and the ground does not
exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
RDo not place your hands or feet under the
raised vehicle.
RDo not lie under the vehicle.
RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
RNever open or close a door or the tailgate
when the vehicle is raised.
RMake sure that no persons are present in the
vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
X Position jack = at jacking point ;.

Changing a wheel 359
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could

lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
G WARNING
X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
beneath the jacking point. when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits
completely on jacking point ; and the base Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
of the jack lies evenly on the ground. when the vehicle is on the ground.
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is raised
a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground. Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section
(Y page 356).
Removing a wheel Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
otherwise be damaged when you screw them only use wheel bolts which have been approved
in. for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective
wheel.
Wheels and tires

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-

pletely.
X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-
X Remove the wheel. faces.
X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align-
ment bolt and push it on.
Mounting a new wheel
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-
G WARNING tight.
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel tight.
Z
360 Wheel/tire combination
Lowering the vehicle Wheel/tire combination

G WARNING You can ask for information regarding permitted
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
and bolts are not tightened to the specified Mercedes-Benz Center.
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
Have the tightening torque immediately mends that you only use tires and wheels
checked at a qualified specialist workshop which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz
after a wheel is changed. specifically for your vehicle.
These tires have been specially adapted for
X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon use with the control systems, such as ABS or
nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visi- ESP®, and are marked as follows:
ble. RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
once again standing firmly on the ground. (tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
X Place the jack to one side.
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may
only be used on wheels that have been spe-
cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain
characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise
emissions or fuel consumption, may other-
wise be adversely affected. In addition, when
driving with a load, tire dimension variations
Wheels and tires
could cause the tires to come into contact

with the bodywork and axle components. This
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise could result in damage to the tires or the vehi-
pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). cle.
The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-
(130 Nm). age resulting from the use of tires, wheels or
accessories other than those tested and
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
approved.
X Stow the jack and the rest of the tire-change
Information on tires, wheels and approved
tool kit in the cargo compartment again. combinations can be obtained from any quali-
X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted fied specialist workshop.
wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observe the recommended tire pressure ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-
(Y page 339). ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-
ous damage cannot always be detected on
When you are driving with the collapsible spare retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz
wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded
system or the tire pressure monitor cannot func- tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if
tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss you have no information about their previous
warning system or tire pressure monitor when usage.
the defective wheel has been replaced with a
new wheel. The recommended pressures for various oper-
ating conditions can be found:
Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys-
tem: all installed wheels must be equipped with Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
functioning sensors. on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
Wheel/tire combination 361
Observe the notes on recommended tire pres-

sures under various operating conditions
(Y page 339).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance
recommendations of the tire manufacturer in
the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip
the vehicle:
Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left
and right)
Rwith the same type of tires at a given time
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
tires)
Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-
ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 321).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
Wheels and tires
Z
362 Vehicle electronics
Information regarding technical data In particular, the following conditions must be

complied with:
i The data stated here specifically refers to a Ronly approved wavebands may be used.
vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an Robserve the maximum permissible output
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the in these wavebands.
data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Ronly approved antenna positions may be
used.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
Vehicle electronics may cause damage to your health and the health
of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into
Installing two-way radios and mobile account current scientific discussions relating
phones (RF transmitters) to the possible health hazards that may result
from electromagnetic fields.
G WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from modified
or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can
interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can
compromise the operational safety of the
vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
You should have all work to electrical and
electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
G WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from incor- Approved antenna positions
rectly operated RF transmitters can interfere : Front roof area
with the vehicle electronics, for example: ; Rear roof area
= Rear fender
Rif the RF transmitter is not connected with
Vehicles with panorama roof with power
an exterior antenna
Technical data
tilt/sliding panel: installing an antenna to the

Rthe exterior antenna has been installed front or rear roof area is not permitted.
incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type On the rear fenders, it is recommended to posi-
This can compromise the operational safety tion the antenna on the side of the vehicle clos-
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. est to the center of the road.
Have the low-reflection exterior antenna Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609
(Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for installa-
mounted at a qualified specialist workshop. tion of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting
When operating RF transmitters in the vehi- equipment") when retrofitting RF transmitters
cle, always connect them with the low-reflec- (radio frequency). Observe the legal require-
tion exterior antenna. ments for accessory parts.
If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio
! The operating permit may be invalidated if equipment, use the power supply or antenna
the instructions for installation and use of RF connections intended for use with the basic wir-
transmitters are not observed. ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Sup-
plement when installing.
Deviations with respect to frequency bands,
maximum transmission outputs or antenna
positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Identification plates 363
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the Identification plates

base of the antenna must not exceed the fol-
lowing values: Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
Frequency band Maximum
cle identification number (VIN)
transmission
output
Short wave 100 W
3 - 54 MHz
4 m waveband 30 W
74 - 88 MHz
2 m waveband 50 W
144 - 174 MHz
Trunked radio system/ 10 W
Tetra Location of vehicle identification plate (exam-
380 - 460 MHz ple, left-hand-drive vehicle)
70 cm waveband 35 W
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
400 - 460 MHz
Mobile communications 10 W
(2G/3G/4G)
The following can be used in the vehicle without

restrictions:
RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-
sion output of up to 100 mW
RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi-
Technical data
mum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio/Tetra)
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA
RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
only)
There is no restriction for antenna positions on : Paint code
the outside of the vehicle for the following fre- ; VIN
quency bands:
RTrunked radio system/Tetra
R70 cm waveband
R2G/3G/4G
Z
364 Service products and filling capacities
Engine number
Example: vehicle identification plate (Can-

ada only)
: Paint code : Engine number (stamped into the crank-
; VIN case)
; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
i The data shown on the vehicle identification = Emission control information plate, includ-
plate is used only as an example. This data is ing the certification of both federal and Cali-
different for every vehicle and can deviate fornian emissions standards
from the data shown here. You can find the
data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle
identification plate.
Service products and filling capaci-
ties
Vehicle identification number (VIN) Important safety notes
G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
Technical data
and disposal of service products on the labels

of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost H Environmental note

position. Dispose of service products in an environ-
X Fold floor covering ; upwards. mentally responsible manner.
The VIN is visible :.
The VIN can also be found on the vehicle iden- Service products include the following:
tification plate (Y page 363). RFuels
The VIN can also be found at the lower edge of RExhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.
the windshield (Y page 364). DEF
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
RCoolant
RBrake fluid
RWindshield washer fluid
RClimate control system refrigerant
Service products and filling capacities 365
Components and service products must match. If you or others come into contact with fuel,
Only use products recommended by Mercedes- observe the following:
Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of
products which have not been recommended is RWash away fuel from skin immediately
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or using soap and water.
goodwill gestures. Products approved by
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
Mercedes-Benz are listed in this Operator's
Manual in the appropriate section. immediately rinse them thoroughly with
Information on tested and approved products clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
can be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz Service out delay.
Center or on the Internet at RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
You can recognize service products approved by ing.
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on
RImmediately change out of clothing which
the containers:
has come into contact with fuel.
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations indi- Tank capacity
cate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB Model Total capacity
229.5). They have not necessarily been GLC 300 d 4MATIC 13.2 US gal
approved by Mercedes-Benz. (50.0 l)
Other identifications, for example:
All other models 17.4 US gal
R0 W-30
(66.0 l)
R5 W-30
R5 W-40
Model Of which
reserve
Fuel All models Approx.
1.8 US gal (7.0 l)
Technical data
G WARNING Gasoline
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
Fuel grade
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
sion. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
refueling. result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
G WARNING and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury. ! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade
gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
Z
! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions
the vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam- for use on the product label. More information
age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust about recommended additives can be
system. obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
! Do not use the following:
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran-
RGasoline with more than 10% ethanol ded fuels that have additives.
RE100 (100% ethanol) The fuel quality available in some countries may
RGasoline with methanol not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the
RM100 (100% methanol) fuel injection system as a result. In such cases,
RGasoline with metalliferous additives and in consultation with an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed
RDiesel
with the cleaning additive recommended by
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom- Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes
mended for your vehicle. and mixing ratios specified on the container.
! To ensure the longevity and full perform-
ance of the engine, only premium-grade Diesel
unleaded gasoline must be used.
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable Fuel grade
and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline G WARNING
of a lower grade, observe the following pre-
cautions: If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular
unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre- When the engine is running, exhaust system
mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as components could overheat without being
possible. noticed. There is a risk of fire.
RDo not drive at the maximum speed. Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine with diesel fuel.
speeds over 3,000 rpm.
You will usually find information about the fuel ! Refuel only using diesel fuel that conforms
quality on the pump. If you cannot find the label to European standard EN 590 or an equivalent
Technical data
on the fuel pump, ask the gas station staff. specification. Fuel that does not conform to
EN 590 can lead to increased wear and dam-
i For further information, consult a qualified age the engine and exhaust system.
specialist workshop or visit
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). ! Do not use the following:
As a temporary measure, if the recommended Rmarine diesel
fuel is not available, you may also use regular Rheating oil
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of Rbio-diesel
87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per- Rvegetable oil
formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid
Rgasoline
driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration.
Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI. Rparaffin
Information on refueling (Y page 149). Rkerosene
Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and do
Additives not use any special additives. Otherwise,
! Operating the engine with fuel additives engine damage may occur.
added later can lead to engine failure. Do not ! In countries outside the EU, only use low-
mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not sulfur Euro diesel with a sulfur content of
include additives for the removal and preven- under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission con-
tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only be trol system could be damaged.
mixed with additives recommended by
You will usually find information about the fuel Purity

quality on the pump. If you cannot find the label
on the fuel pump, ask the gas station staff. ! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other service
Information on refueling (Y page 149). products, cleaning agents or dust) lead to:
Rincreased emission values
Low outside temperatures Rdamage to the catalytic converter
i Diesel fuel with improved cold flow proper- Rengine damage
ties is available during the winter months. Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas
Further information about fuel properties can
aftertreatment system
be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at gas
stations. Assuring the purity of DEF is particularly impor-
tant with respect to avoiding malfunctions in the
BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system.
DEF If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g. during
repair work, it must not be returned to the tank.
Important safety notes The purity of the fluid can no longer be guaran-
teed.
Comply with the important safety notes for ser-
vice products when handling DEF (Y page 364). Filling capacities
DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas
aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: Model Total capacity
Rnot poisonous
All models 29.1 US qt
Rcolorless and odorless
(27.5 l)
Rnot flammable
When you open the DEF container, small
amounts of ammonia vapor may be released.
Engine oil
Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are
particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous General notes
membranes and to the eyes. You may experi-
ence a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and
throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are
Technical data
possible.
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank
only in well-ventilated areas.
Low outside temperatures

DEF freezes at a temperature of approximately
-11 †. The vehicle is delivered from the factory
equipped with a DEF preheating system. Winter
operation can thus be guaranteed even at tem-
peratures below -11 †.
! Do not use engine oil or an oil filter with
specifications deviating from those expressly
Additives required for the prescribed service intervals.
Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in
! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO order to set replacement intervals longer than
22241. Do not use additives with DEF and do
those prescribed. This could otherwise cause
not dilute DEF with water. This may destroy
damage to the engine or exhaust gas after-
the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment sys-
treatment.
tem.
Follow the instructions on the service interval
display for changing the engine oil. This could
Z
otherwise cause damage to the engine or fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
exhaust gas aftertreatment. brake system when the brakes are applied
When handling engine oil, observe the important hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
safety notes on service products (Y page 364). There is a risk of an accident.
The engine oils are matched to the performance
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.
You should therefore only use engine oils and oil the specified intervals.
filters that are approved for vehicles with main-
tenance systems. When handling brake fluid, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, (Y page 364).
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Or visit the website The brake fluid change intervals can be found in
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. the Maintenance Booklet.
The table shows which engine oils have been Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-
approved for your vehicle. Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval 331.0.
Gasoline engines MB-Freigabe or Information about approved brake fluid can be
MB-Approval obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or
All models 229.5, 229.6 on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a
Diesel engines MB-Freigabe or qualified specialist workshop in accordance
MB-Approval with the replacement intervals and the
All models 228.51, 229.31, replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
229.51, 229.52 Booklet.
i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain- Coolant

ers.
Filling capacities
Technical data
G WARNING
The following values refer to an oil change
including the oil filter. If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
Model Capacity ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
GLC 300 d 4MATIC 6.3 US qt (6.0 l) Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
All other models 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
antifreeze from components before starting
Additives the engine.
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
This could damage the engine. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
Brake fluid Further information on coolants can be found
in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-
G WARNING vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the
Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even
in countries where high temperatures prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not Windshield washer system

sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating. Important safety notes
i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a G WARNING
qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
Comply with the important safety notes for ser- it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
vice products when handling coolant nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
(Y page 364). fire and injury.
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- Make sure that no windshield washer con-
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the fol- centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
lowing tasks:
RAnti-corrosion protection ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
RAntifreeze protection plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB
RRaising the boiling point
WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam-
age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to
-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
during operation is approximately 266 ‡ washer fluid should be mixed together. The
(130 †). spray nozzles may otherwise become
The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor blocked.
concentration in the engine cooling system Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other-
should: wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-
cooling system against freezing down to tant safety notes on service products
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). (Y page 364).
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down At temperatures above freezing:
to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
dissipated as effectively.
water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ SummerFit.
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance
Technical data
with MB Specifications for Service Products Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
310.1. At temperatures below freezing:
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection. For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-
mation on the antifreeze reservoir.
i The coolant is checked with every mainte-
nance interval at a qualified specialist work- i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
shop. merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all
year round.
Filling capacities
Model Capacity Climate control system refrigerant
GLC 300 d 4MATIC 10.6 US qt (10.0 l) Important safety notes
Mercedes-AMG 12.2 US qt (11.5 l) The climate control system of your vehicle is fil-
GLC 43 4MATIC led with refrigerant R‑134a.
All other models 9.5 US qt (9.0 l) The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
type used can be found on the radiator cross
member.
Z
370 Vehicle data
! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil Vehicle data
approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.
The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with General notes
any other PAG oil that is not approved for
R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
control system may be damaged. Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:
Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or - tires
replacing component parts, may only be carried - load
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli- - condition of the suspension
cable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, - optional equipment
must be adhered to.
Roptional equipment reduces the maximum
Always have work on the climate control system
payload.
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the information relating to level con-
trol:
Refrigerant instruction label
RAIR BODY CONTROL (Y page 173)
Dimensions and weights
Example: refrigerant instruction label

: Warning symbol
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable standards
Technical data
? PAG oil part number Model : ;

A Type of refrigerant Opening Maximum
Warning symbol : advises you about: height headroom
RPossible dangers Mercedes- 82.9 in 75.6 in
RHaving service work carried out at a qualified AMG GLC 43 (2106 mm) (1920 mm)
specialist workshop 4MATIC
All other mod- 84.5 in 78.4 in
Filling capacities els (2146 mm) (1992 mm)
All models
Mercedes-AMG
Refrigerant 22.2 ± 0.4 oz GLC 43 4MATIC
(630 ± 10 g)
Vehicle length 183.5 in (4661 mm)
PAG oil 2.8 oz
(80 g) Vehicle width 82.5 in (2096 mm)
including exterior
mirrors
Vehicle height 64.1 in (1629 mm)
Trailer tow hitch 371
Mercedes-AMG The drawbar load acts from above onto the ball
GLC 43 4MATIC head on the trailer tow hitch.
The trailer drawbar noseweight is not included in
Wheelbase 113.1 in (2873 mm) the towing weight.
Turning circle 39.7 ft (12.10 m) Model Permissible nose-
weight
Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg)
All models 280 lbs (127 kg)
Maximum trunk
load
The actual noseweight may not be higher than
the value which is given. The value can be found
All other models on the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification
plates. The lowest weight applies.
Vehicle length 183.3 in (4656 mm) The maximum permissible trailer drawbar nose-
Vehicle width 82.5 in (2096 mm) weight is the maximum weight with which the
including exterior trailer drawbar can be loaded. The permissible
mirrors trailer drawbar noseweight is the limit for
Mercedes-Benz-approved trailer couplings.
Vehicle height 65.5 in (1664 mm)
Wheelbase 113.1 in (2873 mm)
Gross rear axle weight rating when
Turning circle 38.7 ft (11.80 m) towing a trailer
Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg) Missing values were not available at time of
Maximum trunk going to print.
220 lb (100 kg)
load Model Gross axle weight
rating
GLC 300 d 4MATIC
Trailer tow hitch
Mercedes-AMG 2822 lbs (1280 kg)
Trailer loads GLC 43 4MATIC
Technical data
Permissible trailer load, braked (at a All other models 2755 lbs (1250 kg)
minimum gradient-climbing capability
of 12% from a standstill)
Ball position of the ball coupling
Model
All models 3501 lb (1588 kg)
Maximum drawbar noseweight

! Use a drawbar noseweight as close as pos-
sible to the maximum permissible nose-
weight. Do not use a noseweight of less than
50 kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose.
Note that the payload and the rear axle load
are reduced by the actual payload.
Towing a trailer is not possible with all models.
Further information (Y page 203).
The drawbar load reduces the permissible over-
all load and rear axle load.
Z
372 Trailer tow hitch
When the ball coupling is selected, the following

dimensions must not be exceeded:
: 7.0 in
; 0.625 in
= 1.25 in
Technical data

MY17 GLC SUV Operator

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MY17 GLC SUV Operator

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Your Operator's Manual

Digital form inside the vehicle

Booklet inside the vehicle

Digital form via the Internet

Digital form as an App

Apple® iOS Android™

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-

Mirrors ................................................. 106

Maintenance and care ...................... 306

Breakdown assistance ..................... 319

Wheels and tires ............................... 336

Technical data ................................... 362

1, 2, 3 ... Adaptive Brake Assist

Airbag Automatic engine start (ECO start/

Replacing bulbs ............................. 118 Brakes

General notes ................................ 311 Change of address .............................. 29

Problem with the rear window Coolant (engine)

DEF Displays in the instrument cluster .. 168

EBD (electronic brake force distri- Limited braking efficiency on sal-

Emissions control Display message ............................ 228

Front wheel arch cover Opening/closing the garage door .. 304

High-beam headlamps iPod®

Light function, active Matte finish (cleaning instruc-

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu- Music files

Function/notes ............................. 175 Q

Object detection (function/ Warning lamp ................................. 262

Important safety guidelines ............. 45 Setting the language

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 81 Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot

SUV see also Digital Operator's Man-

Using ............................................. 323 Service life ..................................... 337

Tow-starting Transmission oil

Locking (in an emergency) ............... 84 General notes ................................ 256

Rear window wiper ........................ 120

Introduction Operating the Digital Operator's Man-

cle. The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in

Maintenance When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe

Sports Utility Vehicle G WARNING

Customer Assistance Center

uity Digital Corporation.

Function Page Function Page

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

Center console, lower section (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Center console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Function Page Function Page

Overhead control panel

C ï Info call button I F Breakdown assistance

Door control panel

Function Page Function Page

switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-

When fastening the seat belt, always make sure

Releasing seat belts

est possible distance to the air bags

The side impact air bag on the front-passenger

Occupant Classification System Occupant Classification System opera-

Requirements : PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp

recommended that you install the child System self-test

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning.

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning G WARNING

ded protective function. This poses an

tion. depending on the hazardous situation detected: